JP7313624B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result.

Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of gaming machines. In this pachinko machine, a variable display game is executed to variably display a plurality of identification information (designs, symbols, etc.) displayed on a display device provided in the game area based on the winning of a game ball in a start hole provided in the game area (start winning), and when the mode of the plurality of identification information stopped after the lapse of a predetermined time is a predetermined special result mode, a special game state is entered.
In such a game machine, there is known a game machine in which a movable accessory operates so as to overlap a display device (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2017-121302 A

However, it has not been possible to sufficiently improve the amusement of the game only by performing the effect by the display of the display device and the effect by the action of the movable accessory. An object of the present invention is to improve the amusement of games.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1,
display means for displaying a predetermined image;
a first effect means positioned in front of the display means and capable of executing a predetermined effect of changing the visibility of the predetermined image;
a second effect means positioned in front of the first effect means and capable of executing an effect that changes the visibility of the first effect means;
A game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and when the result of the game is a special result, a state advantageous to the player is generated,
After displaying the first identification information in each of the plurality of fluctuation display areas in correspondence with the game, the fluctuation display is stopped in each of the above multiple fluctuations display areas, and the result of corresponding to the result of the game is displayed by the combination of the 1st identification information that is stopped in the multiple fluctuations display area, and the result corresponding to the result of the game is displayed. After displaying the second identification information that is smaller than the first identification information in correspondence with the game, the second decoration game that stops the result of the game result is displayed in the above means, and the display is displayed in the display.
The first effect means can render the first identification information displayed in at least one of the variable display areas unidentifiable by executing the predetermined effect,
The second effect means is capable of executing a specific effect that reduces the visibility of the first identification information, the second identification information and the first effect means,
The visibility of the second identification information can be made higher than the visibility of the first identification information displayed in the one variable display area by the first effect means executing the predetermined effect and the second effect means executing the specific effect.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

1 is a front view of a gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS It is the perspective view which looked at the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is an enlarged explanatory view showing the details of the collective display device. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a game machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the distribution rate of the result of a special figure fluctuation display game, the distribution rate of a big hit design, the distribution rate of a small hit design, and the distribution rate of a support per design. It is a figure for demonstrating the transition of a game state. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining transition of a group of change selection tables; It is a figure explaining the number of times of support when a support hit is derived during general electricity support. It is a figure explaining the number of times of support when a support hit is derived during general electricity support. 4 is a flowchart for explaining main processing; 4 is a flowchart for explaining main processing; 4 is a flowchart for explaining timer interrupt processing; It is a flow chart explaining special figure game processing. It is a flow chart explaining a start opening switch monitoring process. 10 is a flowchart for explaining hard random number acquisition processing; It is a flow chart for explaining a special figure starting mouth switch common processing. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure reservation information determination process. It is a flow chart for explaining the special figure usual processing. It is a flow chart for explaining special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart explaining big-hit flag 1 setting processing and big-hit flag 2 setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining a big-hit determination process and a small-hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining support hit determination processing. It is a flow chart for explaining a special figure 1 stop design setting process. It is a flow chart for explaining a special figure 2 stop design setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure information setting process. It is a flow chart for explaining processing during special figure fluctuation. It is a flowchart explaining processing during special figure display. It is a flowchart explaining processing during special figure display. FIG. 10 is a flowchart for explaining a time reduction variation number update process; FIG. It is a flow chart explaining production mode information check processing. 10 is a flowchart for explaining fanfare/interval processing transition setting processing 1; It is a flow chart explaining processing shift setting processing during small hit fanfare. It is a flow chart explaining support operation setting processing. It is a flow chart for explaining a special figure normal processing shift setting process. It is a flow chart explaining jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the big-hit end setting process 1 and the big-hit end setting process 2. FIG. It is a flow chart explaining the main processing of a production control device. 9 is a flowchart for explaining received command check processing; 9 is a flowchart for explaining received command analysis processing; It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game in which the result is "support hit". It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game in which the result is "support hit". It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game in which the result is "support hit". It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game in which the result is "support hit". It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game in which the result is "support hit". It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game in which the result is "support hit". It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game in which the result is "support hit". It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game in which the result is "support hit". FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a case where a pseudo-continuous effect is executed as a special effect performed during a variable display game in which the result is "support win". It is a figure which shows an example of the additional production performed after the special-figure variation display game whose result is "support hit" is over. It is a figure explaining an example of production|presentation. It is a figure explaining an example of production|presentation. It is a figure explaining an example of production|presentation. It is a figure explaining the change of the visibility in an example of production|presentation. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a second modification of the support hit determination, and is a diagram showing an example of a distribution rate. It is a figure explaining the modification 2 of support hit determination, Comprising: It is a flowchart explaining a special figure starting entrance switch common process. It is a figure explaining the modification 2 of support hit determination, Comprising: It is a flowchart explaining a big-hit flag 1 setting process and a big-hit flag 2 setting process. It is a figure explaining the modification 2 of support hit determination, Comprising: It is a flowchart explaining support hit determination processing. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the third modified example of the support hit determination, and is a diagram showing distribution ratios. It is a figure explaining the modification 3 of support hit determination, Comprising: It is a flowchart explaining a big-hit flag 1 setting process and a big-hit flag 2 setting process. It is a diagram for explaining the modification 3 of the support hit determination, and is a flowchart for explaining the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a diagram for explaining the modification 3 of the support hit determination, and is a flowchart for explaining the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a modification 4 of the support hit determination, and is a diagram showing distribution ratios. It is a diagram for explaining the modification 4 of the support hit determination, and is a flowchart for explaining the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a diagram for explaining the modification 4 of the support hit determination, and is a flowchart for explaining the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. FIG. 20 is a diagram for explaining another modified example 11, and is a diagram for explaining the transition of the game state. FIG. 20 is a diagram for explaining another modified example 11, and is a diagram showing distribution ratios. FIG. 20 is a diagram for explaining another modified example 11, and is a flowchart for explaining specific area switch monitoring processing. It is a figure explaining other modification 11, Comprising: It is a flowchart explaining a small-hit remaining ball process. It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game on the collective display device and a variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) on the display device. It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game on the collective display device and a variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) on the display device. It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game on the collective display device and a variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) on the display device. It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game on the collective display device and a variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) on the display device. It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game on the collective display device and a variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) on the display device. It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game on the collective display device and a variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) on the display device. It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game on the collective display device and a variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) on the display device. It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game on the collective display device and a variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) on the display device. It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game on the collective display device and a variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) on the display device. It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game on the collective display device and a variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) on the display device. It is a front view of the game board of the second embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of the game machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the allocation rate in 2nd Embodiment. It is a diagram for explaining the transition of the game state in the second embodiment.

<First embodiment>
FIG. 1 is a front view of the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, and FIG. 2 is a front side perspective view of the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment.
As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the game machine 10 of this embodiment includes a front frame 12, which is assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be openable and rotatable. A game board 30 (see FIG. 3) is housed in a housing (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12 . A glass frame (transparent plate holding frame) 15 having a cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (body frame) 12 .

A display plate 350 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is provided on the glass frame 15 at a position behind the cover glass 14 . The display board 350 can see through the game board 30 and can display a predetermined display. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, a light guide plate is used to make an image emerge when light is introduced from the side edge, but it may be configured by a transparent liquid crystal display device or an EL display device.
When the display board 350 does not display a predetermined display, the display board 350 is transparent so as not to hinder the visual recognition of the game board 30 behind it. When a predetermined display is displayed on the display board 350, the visibility of the game board 30 behind the predetermined display is lowered. In this state, the rear game board 30 may be visible through a predetermined display, or the rear game board 30 may be invisible due to the predetermined display.

Above the glass frame 15, a model name display section 16 for displaying the model name of the gaming machine 10 is provided.
In addition, on the left and right of the glass frame 15, a frame decoration device 18 that incorporates a lamp, an LED, etc. inside and emits light for decoration, presentation, and notification when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a dispensing abnormality occurs, the lamp, LED, etc. is an abnormality notification color (e.g., red)) and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (e.g., sound effect) is provided. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is provided below the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 as well. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the details of the abnormality are notified by voice from the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b. It should be noted that a lamp may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15 for announcing abnormal dispensing.

Further, in the lower part of the glass frame 15, an upper tray (storage tray) 21 for supplying game balls to a batted ball shooting device (not shown), an upper tray ball outlet 22 for discharging game balls paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the game machine 10, and the like are provided. Further, the upper edge of the upper plate 21 is provided with a performance button 25 incorporating a performance button switch 25a (see FIG. 6) for receiving a pressing operation input from the player. The performance button 25 also incorporates a drive source for vibrating the performance button 25 . That is, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment has a vibration function of making a predetermined notification by vibrating the effect button 25 . The production button 25 may be configured to be convertible from a normal state (the state shown in FIGS. 1 and 2) to a projecting state (a state in which the upper surface (pressing surface) of the production button 25 is higher than in the normal state).

In the lower part of the front frame 12, there are provided a lower tray (receiving tray) 23 for storing game balls paid out with the upper tray 21 full, an operation section 24 of a hitting ball shooting device, and the like. Furthermore, a keyhole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 12 .

Also, to the right of the effect button 25, there is a lending button (ball lending button) 27a operated by the player when receiving a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, a return button (ejection button) 27b operated to eject a prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine, a balance indicator (balance display section) 27c for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, an upper tray operation lever 27d operated to flow down the game balls in the upper tray 21 to the lower tray 23, owned by the player. A mobile terminal placing portion 28 or the like is provided for placing a mobile terminal such as a smart phone. Further, to the left of the effect button 25, a volume control button 27e, a cross key 29, and the like are provided.
In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the ball shooting device shoots a game ball supplied from the upper tray 21 toward the game area 32 on the front side of the game board 30 when the player rotates the operation unit 24 . In addition, by operating the production button 25 or the cross key 29 by the player, in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 3), the player's operation can be intervened.

Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 30 of this embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 3, the game board 30 includes a flat plate-like game board main body 80 that serves as an attachment base for various members. The game board main body 80 is made of wood or synthetic resin, and a game area 32 surrounded by a resin side case 33 provided at each of the four corners of the game board 30 and an outer peripheral wall (guide rail) 31 is provided on the front surface of the game board main body 80.例文帳に追加The game machine 10 is configured to play a game by shooting game balls from a hitting ball shooting device into a game area 32 surrounded by an outer peripheral wall 31 . In the game area 32, windmills, obstacle nails, etc. are arranged as members for changing the flowing direction of the game ball, and the shot game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

A center case 40 that forms a window that serves as a display area for the variable display game is attached to substantially the center of the game area 32 . Behind the window formed in the center case 40, a display device 41 is arranged as a performance display device (variation display device) for variably displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information.

The display device 41 (variable display device) is composed of a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) or a CRT (cathode-ray tube). Still images and moving images can be displayed as effect images in an area (display area) in which an image can be displayed on the display screen. For example, a plurality of pieces of identification information (special symbols), characters for directing a special figure variation display game, background images for enhancing effect effects, and other game-related information are displayed. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variably displayed), and a decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game is performed. The display screen also displays images for effects based on the progress of the game (for example, a big win display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.).

The center case 40 is provided with a warp passage forming member 614 forming a warp passage for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, and a stage portion 620 on which the game ball passing through the warp passage can roll. Since the stage portion 620 of the center case 40 is arranged above the starting prize winning port 36, the game ball rolling on the stage portion 620 easily enters the starting prize winning port 36. - 特許庁
A board effect device 44 is provided on the upper part of the center case 40 to effect a game effect by operating it. This board effect device 44 is operable between a position above the center case 40 and a position indicated by a dotted line, which is a position closer to the center of the display device 41 than this position.

A normal pattern start gate (normal pattern start gate) 34 is provided in the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40 . Inside the normal pattern starting gate 34, a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 5) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal pattern starting gate 34 is provided. When the game ball hit into the game area 32 passes through the normal pattern starting gate 34, the normal pattern fluctuation display game is executed.

Two general winning openings 35 are arranged in the lower left game area 32 of the center case 40 , and one general winning opening 35 is arranged in the lower right game area 32 of the center case 40 . Winning of game balls into these general winning openings 35 is detected by winning opening switches 35a (see FIG. 5) provided in the general winning openings 35. FIG.

The game area 32 below the center case 40 is provided with a starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning area) that provides a condition for starting the special figure 1 variation display game (first special figure variation display game). A game ball that has entered the starting winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 5).

In the right part of the center case 40, there is provided a normal variable winning device 37 (second start winning area) that provides a starting condition for the special figure 2 variation display game (second special figure variation display game). A game ball that has won the normal variable winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 5).
The normal variable prize winning device 37 is provided with a movable member (not shown), and this movable member normally maintains a closed state (disadvantageous state for the player) in which game balls cannot enter. Then, when the result of the normal pattern variation display game becomes a predetermined result, the normal variation winning device 37 is changed to an open state (a state advantageous to the player) in which game balls easily flow into the normal variation prize winning device 37 by a general electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 5) as a driving device.

In the present embodiment, the movable member of the normal variable winning device 37 is a so-called tongue type normal electric accessory that opens and closes by sliding forward and backward by the universal electric solenoid 37c, but the movable member of the normal variable winning device 37 is not limited to this. The movable member of the normal variable winning device 37 may be, for example, an attacker-type normal electric accessory that is opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted forward by the general electric solenoid 37c, or a tulip-shaped normal electric accessory that opens in an inverted "V" shape by the general electric solenoid 37c.
Further, the normal variable prize winning device 37 may allow game balls to win prizes even when the movable member is in the closed state, and may be in a state in which the game balls are less likely to win in the closed state than in the open state.

In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, a first special variable prize winning device (upper large prize winning port) 38 is provided between the normal pattern start gate 34 and the normal variable prize winning device 37, which can be changed between a state not accepting game balls and a state easy to accept the game balls according to the result of the special pattern variation display game. The first special variable winning device 38 converts the upper big winning opening into a state in which game balls can flow in by moving forward and backward (slides) of an opening/closing member (not shown). A first special variable prize winning device 38 converts the closed state in which the upper large prize winning port is closed to an open state according to the result of the special figure variable display game, and facilitates the inflow of game balls into the upper large prize winning port, thereby imparting a predetermined game value (prize balls) to the player. A game ball that has won the first special variable winning device 38 is detected by a big winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 5).

A specific area into which game balls can flow is provided inside the upper big prize opening (winning area), and a lever member operated by a lever solenoid 38f (see FIG. 5) is provided so as to change the probability of game balls flowing into the specific area. A specific area switch 38d (see FIG. 5) capable of detecting the inflow of a game ball is provided in the specific area, and based on the detection of the game ball by the specific area switch 38d, a state advantageous to the player occurs (in this embodiment, a high probability state occurs after the special game state ends). A game ball that has flowed into the specific area is discharged to the outside of the first special variable winning device 38 .

In addition, inside the upper big winning opening, there is provided a remaining ball discharge opening switch 38e (see FIG. 5) for detecting game balls discharged outside the first special variable winning device 38 without flowing into the specific area. When the number of game balls detected by the large winning opening switch 38a provided inside the upper big winning opening (the number of game balls flowing into the upper big winning opening) matches the number of game balls detected by the specific area switch 38d and the remaining ball discharge opening switch 38e (the number of game balls discharged from the upper big winning opening), it can be confirmed that all the game balls in the upper big winning opening have been discharged. is not opened.

In the game area 32 below the center case 40, on the right side of the starting prize winning port 36, there is provided a second special variable prize winning device (lower big prize winning port) 39 capable of switching between a state of not accepting game balls and a state of easy acceptance according to the result of the special figure variation display game. The second special variable winning device 39 converts the lower big winning opening into a state in which game balls can flow in by moving forward and backward (slides) of an opening/closing member (not shown). The second special variable prize winning device 39 converts the closed state of the lower special prize winning port to the open state according to the result of the special figure variable display game, and facilitates the inflow of game balls into the lower special prize winning port, thereby imparting a predetermined game value (prize ball) to the player. A game ball that has won the second special variable winning device 39 is detected by a big winning opening switch (count switch) 39a (see FIG. 5).

In the game area 32 below the start winning opening 36, an out opening 30a for collecting game balls that have not won a winning opening or the like is provided. In addition, outside the game area 32 and at the lower right corner of the game board main body 80, a batch display device 50 for executing a special figure variation display game (a special figure 1 variation display game, a special figure 2 variation display game) and a normal figure variation display game is provided.

Collective display device 50, for example, as shown in FIG. 4 (a), a special figure 1 indicator (first special figure variation display unit) 51 (A0 to A7) for special figure 1 variation display game and a special figure 2 indicator (second special figure variation display unit) 52 (B0 to B7) for special figure 2 variation display game, special figure 1 suspension indicator 53 (C0, C1) for notifying the number of start memories of special figure 1 variation display game and start of special figure 2 variation display game It is provided with a special figure 2 reservation display 54 (C2, C3) for notifying the number of memories.

In addition, the batch display device 50 includes a round display part 55 (D0 to D3) for displaying the number of rounds (the number of opening and closing times of the special variable winning devices 38, 39) at the time of the big win, and a game state display part 56 (C6, C7, D7) for displaying the game state of the game machine 10.例文帳に追加The game state display unit 56 includes a first game state display unit 56a (C6) that informs the player of the method of beating that is advantageous to the player (a method of beating corresponding to the game state), out of left (normal) and right), a second game state display unit 56b (C7) that informs that it is in a time saving state (when the variable time reduction function is activated), and a third game state display unit that informs that the probability state of the big win is a high probability state when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on. 56c (D7) is provided.
Furthermore, the collective display device 50 is provided with a normal pattern display device 57 (D4 to D6) for the normal pattern fluctuation display game, and a normal pattern suspension display device 58 (C4, C5) for notifying the start memory number of the normal pattern fluctuation display game.

In the special figure variation display game on the special figure 1 display device 51, during the execution time (variation time) of the special figure 1 variation display game, for example, as shown in FIG. It is displayed that it is fluctuating by alternately switching between the light-off state and the light-off state. The switching cycle is set to 60 ms, for example. Then, when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts, when the result of the game is "losing", the result mode of losing is displayed (for example, the LED lamp A0 is lit and the LED lamps A1 to A7 are turned off). In addition, the special figure 1 indicator 51 may be configured by a 7-segment type indicator.

In the special figure variation display game on the special figure 2 display device 52, during the execution time (variation time) of the special figure 2 variation display game, for example, as shown in FIG. It is displayed that it is fluctuating by alternately switching between the light-off state) and the light-off state. The switching cycle is set to 60 ms, for example. Then, when the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts, when the result of the game is "losing", it becomes a losing result mode (for example, the LED lamp B0 is lit and the LED lamps B1 to B7 are turned off). In addition, the special figure 2 indicator 52 may be composed of a 7-segment type indicator.

The special figure 1 reservation indicator 53 shows the number of undigested balls (starting memory number = number of reservations) among the number of winning balls to the start winning opening 36 that is the condition for starting the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51. For example, as shown in FIG. The blink period is set to 128 ms, for example.
The special figure 2 reservation indicator 54 shows the number of undigested balls (starting memory number = number of reservations) among the number of winning balls to the normal fluctuation winning device 37, which is the condition for starting the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52. For example, as shown in FIG. The blink period is set to 128 ms, for example.

A round display part 55 turns off all the LEDs (LED lamps D0 to D3) when not in the special game state, and turns on the LEDs corresponding to the number of rounds selected according to the result, as shown in FIG. 4(e), during the special game state. The round display section 55 may be configured by a 7-segment type display.

For example, as shown in FIG. 4(f), the first game state display part 56a turns off the LED when the game state is such that left-handed hitting is more advantageous for the player than right-handed hitting (during normal hitting), and turns the LED on when the game state is such that right-handed hitting is more advantageous for the player than left-handed hitting (during right-handed hitting).
For example, as shown in FIG. 4(f), the second game state display unit 56b turns the LED on when it is in the time saving state, and turns the LED off when it is not in the time saving state.
For example, as shown in FIG. 4(f), the third game state display unit 56c turns on the LED when the power is turned on in the high probability state, and turns off the LED when it is not in the high probability state.

The normal pattern fluctuation display game on the normal pattern display device 57 alternately changes the pattern number for fluctuation as shown in FIG. The switching cycle is set to 60 ms, for example. When the result is "hit", one of the plurality of LEDs (e.g., LED lamp D4) is turned on to indicate that it is a hit, and when the result is "lose", one of the plurality of LEDs (e.g., LED lamps D5, D6) is turned on to indicate that it is a loss.
The normal pattern holding display 58 indicates the number of undigested balls (the normal pattern starting memory number = the number of reservations) among the number of passing balls of the normal pattern starting gate 34, which is the condition for starting the fluctuation of the normal pattern display 57. For example, as shown in FIG.

FIG. 5 is a block diagram of the control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of this embodiment.
The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100. The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) for comprehensively controlling a game. 40 and so on.

The CPU unit 110 includes a game microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and has an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 that generates a clock that serves as a reference for the CPU operation clock, timer interrupt, and random number generation circuit. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with a DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC32V, DC12V, DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 to be operable.

The power supply device 400 has an AC-DC converter that generates a DC 32V DC voltage from a 24V AC power supply, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC 12V or DC 5V from a DC 32V voltage, a normal power supply unit 410, a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies power supply voltage to the RAM inside the game microcomputer 111 at the time of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit. A control signal generator 430 for generating and outputting a control signal such as a reset signal is provided.

In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 may be provided on a separate board or integrated with the game control device 100, that is, on the main board. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, by providing the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the present embodiment, they can be removed from the target of replacement and the cost can be reduced.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured with one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. Backup power is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (especially built-in RAM) of the game control device 100 so that the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power outage or after the power is cut off. In other words, the game control device 100 serves as a game information storage and holding means that can store and hold game information even when a power failure occurs and the power supply to the game machine is stopped, and can restart the game based on the stored information after the power failure is restored. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32 V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, and detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops to, for example, 17 V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and outputs a reset signal after a predetermined time. Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, the reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that time.

Also, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112 . When the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, based on which the information stored in the RAM 111C in the game microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111 . A reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

The game microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (read only memory) 111B, and a RAM (random access memory) 111C that can be read and written at any time.

The ROM 111B nonvolatilely stores immutable information (programs, fixed data, judgment values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control, and the RAM 111C is used as a work area for the CPU 111A during game control and as a storage area for various signals and random values. An electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used as the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C.

Further, the ROM 111B stores a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines, for example, the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the content of the effect, the presence or absence of the occurrence of the ready-to-win state, and the like. The fluctuation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to refer to the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the starting memory to determine the fluctuation pattern. In addition, the variation pattern table includes a winning variation pattern table selected when the result is a loss, a big hit variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Furthermore, these pattern tables include a table for determining the second half variation pattern, which is the variation pattern after entering the reach state (second half variation group table, second half variation pattern selection table, etc.), and a table for determining the first half variation pattern, which is the variation pattern before entering the reach state (first half variation group table, first half variation pattern selection table, etc.).

Here, reach (reach state) has a display device that can change the display state, has a display device that can change, derives multiple display results due to different timing, and is a special result constitution that has been prescribed in advance, and in the gaming machine 10, which is an advantageous gaming state (special gaming status) in the gaming status (special gaming state). The display status is the display status that satisfies the conditions that have already been derived and displayed when part of the multiple display results are not yet derived and displayed. In other words, the ready-to-reach state refers to a display mode that does not deviate from the display conditions for the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and the display result reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed. And, for example, a state in which variable display is performed using a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are uniform (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is a display state when at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas determined before the display result is derived and displayed satisfies the condition of the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, in the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game, after variably displaying a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle and right variation display areas of the display device, the variation display is stopped in the order of left, right and middle to display the result mode. In the left and right variation display areas, the state in which the variation display is stopped in a state (for example, the same identification information) that satisfies the conditions for the special result mode is the ready-to-win state. In addition, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, a state in which any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas satisfy the condition for the special result mode (for example, a state in which the same identification information is obtained, except for the special result mode) may be set as the ready-to-win state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from this ready-to-win state.

A plurality of ready-to-reach performances are included in this ready-to-win state, and normal ready-to-reach (N-to-reach), special 1-to-reach (SP1-to-reach), special 2-to-reach (SP2-to-reach), special 3-to-reach (SP3-to-reach), and premium ready-to-reach are set as ready-to-reach performances with different possibilities of deriving special result modes (different expected values). The expected value is higher in the order of no reach<normal reach<special 1 reach<special 2 reach<special 3 reach<premier reach. Further, this ready-to-win state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived in the special figure variable display game (when a big hit is achieved). That is, it may be included in the variation display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variation display game (when it is lost). Therefore, the state in which the ready-to-win state occurs is a state with a higher possibility of winning a big hit than the case in which the ready-to-win state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes the game control program in the ROM 111B, generates control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the performance control device 300, and generates and outputs drive signals for solenoids and display devices to control the entire game machine 10. In addition, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a jackpot random number for determining the winning of the special figure variation display game, a special symbol pattern random number for determining the pattern of the big win, a variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game (including the execution time of the variation display game in various reach and non-reach variation displays), a winning random number for determining the hit in the normal figure variation display game, etc. A random number generation circuit and an oscillation circuit. A clock generator is provided for generating a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) for the CPU 111A based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from 113 and a clock for updating the random number generation circuit.

In addition, the CPU 111A acquires any one variation pattern table from among the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the processing relating to the special figure variation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111A selects and acquires any one variation pattern table from among a plurality of variation pattern tables based on the game result of the special figure variation display game (big win, small win or loss), the probability state of the special figure variation display game as the current game state (low probability state or high probability state), the number of start memories, etc. Here, the CPU 111A serves as variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one variation pattern table out of a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when executing the special figure variation display game.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, etc., and drives the payout motor of the payout unit according to a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100, and performs control for paying out prize balls. In addition, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit, and performs control for paying out the rental balls.

The input unit 120 of the game microcomputer 111 includes a board radio wave sensor 62 for detecting the emission of radio waves to the game machine, a starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning port 36, a starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, a winning port switch 35a in the general winning port 35, a large winning port switch 38a in the first special variable winning device 38, a large winning port switch 39a in the second special variable winning device 39, and a normal figure. A gate switch 34a in the starting gate 34, a specific area switch 38d and a remaining ball outlet switch 38e provided in the first special variable prize winning device 38, and an out ball detection switch 32a for detecting all game balls (safe balls and out balls) that have been shot into the game area 32 and finished the game are connected, and a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from these switches is input and converted to a positive logic signal of 0V-5V. An interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 is provided. The proximity I/F 121 has an input range of 7 V to 11 V, and is configured to detect an abnormal state such as an illegal short circuit in the lead wire of a sensor or proximity switch, disconnection of the sensor or switch from a connector, or floating due to a disconnection of the lead wire, and output an abnormality detection signal.

The output of the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 , the third input port 124 or the fourth input port 126 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 . Among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121 , the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36 a, the starting port 2 switch 37 a, the prize winning port switch 35 a, the big winning port switches 38 a and 39 a and the gate switch 34 a are input to the second input port 123 . Among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121 , the detection signals of the specific area switch 38 d , the remaining ball outlet switch 38 e and the out ball detection switch 32 a are input to the fourth input port 126 . Among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121 , the detection signal of the board radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when abnormality of the sensor or switch is detected are input to the third input port 124 .

Further, to the third input port 124, a detection signal of a fraud detection magnetic sensor 61 provided on the front frame 12 or the like of the game machine 10, a detection signal of a vibration sensor 65 for detecting vibration of the game machine 10, a detection signal of a glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10, and a detection signal of a body frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (body frame) 12 or the like of the game machine 10 are input.

Further, the third input port 124 receives a signal from a setting key switch 152 that detects the operation of the setting key operating section. The setting key operation part has a keyhole into which the setting key is inserted, and is configured to turn the setting key from the first position to the second position (predetermined state) only when the corresponding setting key is inserted. The setting key switch 152 is a sensor capable of detecting that it is turned to the second position, is turned on when turned to the second position, and turned off when not turned to the second position.

The RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key operation part are operation parts for selecting from a plurality of probability setting values to which the probability values for special results in the special figure variation display game are assigned, and by operating these operation parts, the probability setting values to which the probability values for special results in the special figure variation display games are assigned can be selected, and the probability values corresponding to the selected probability setting values are used in the game. Here, six "setting 1" to "setting 6" are prepared as probability setting values.

When selecting a probability setting value, the setting key of the setting key operation part is turned to the second position and the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated (depressed) while the gaming machine is turned on to enter a probability set value change mode in which the probability set value can be changed, and the probability set value can be changed by operating (depressing) the RAM initialization switch 112 during the probability set value change mode. The selected probability setting value is displayed on the performance display device 153 for displaying the calculated base value and character ratio. Specifically, the performance display device 153 displays the information of the probability setting value while operating the probability setting value (during the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode), and otherwise displays the calculated base value and the character ratio.

By turning on the power of the game machine with the setting key of the setting key operating part turned to the second position (the RAM initialization switch 112 is not operated), the currently selected probability setting value is displayed on the performance display device 153, but the probability setting value confirmation mode in which the probability setting value cannot be changed is entered. Note that the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key operating portion cannot be operated unless the front frame 12 is opened.
The performance display device 153 is a 7-segment display, and displays the set probability values in numbers 1-6. Of course, the display mode is not limited to this, and any display mode may be used as long as the probability setting value can be recognized. Further, a display device of another type such as a liquid crystal display device may be used, or a set probability value may be indicated by the lighting mode or emission color of one or a plurality of LEDs.

In addition, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the output to the second input port 123 and the output to the fourth input port 126 (excluding the detection signal of the out-ball detection switch 32a) are also supplied from the main board 100 via the relay board 70 to a test firing test apparatus (not shown). Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a are configured to be input to the game microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123.

As described above, the proximity I/F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I/F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V in addition to a voltage such as 5 V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400 .

The data held by the second input port 123 can be read by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to a valid level) by decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123 by the gaming microcomputer 111. The same applies to the third input port 124, the fourth input port 126, and the first input port 122 described later.

The input unit 120 also receives a frame radio wave illegal signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on the detection of radio waves by a frame radio wave sensor provided in the front frame 12), a payout busy signal (a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept commands), a payout abnormality status signal (a status signal indicating a payout abnormality), a shoot ball out switch signal (a signal indicating a lack of game balls before payout), an overflow switch signal (a game ball is out of the lower tray 23). A first input port 122 is provided that takes in a signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more is stored (is full) and a touch switch signal (a signal based on the input of the touch switch provided in the operation unit 24) and supplies it to the game microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

In addition, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as power failure monitoring signals and reset signals from the power supply device 400 to the game microcomputer 111 and the like, and the Schmidt buffer 125 has a function of removing noise from these input signals. A power failure monitoring signal from the power supply 400 and an initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the game microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 . That is, they are treated as signals equivalent to the signals from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals for receiving signals from the outside provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise has been removed by the Schmidt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the game microcomputer 111 and is also supplied to each port of the output section 130 . In addition, the reset signal RESET is output directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test-firing test signal held at the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test-firing test apparatus. Also, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test-firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 . Note that the reset signal RESET is not supplied to each port 122 , 123 , 124 , 126 of the input section 120 . The data set to each port of the output section 130 by the game microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input must be reset to prevent malfunction of the system, but the data read by the game microcomputer 111 from each port of the input section 120 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input is discarded by resetting the game microcomputer 111.例文帳に追加

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200 . Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. In addition, it is made into the one-way communication which made it impossible to input a signal to the game control apparatus 100 from the production control apparatus 300 side.

Further, in the output unit 130, a buffer 133 which is connected to the data bus 140 and outputs, via the relay board 70, the data for notifying the special symbol information of the variable display game and the signal indicating the probability state of the big hit to a test-firing test device of an accreditation organization (not shown) can be mounted. This buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko game machine as an actual machine (mass-produced product) installed in amusement arcades. A detection signal of a switch that does not require processing, such as a starting switch, output from the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the test-firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133 .

On the other hand, detection signals such as those from the magnetic sensor 61, board radio wave sensor 62, and vibration sensor 65, which cannot be directly supplied to the test-firing test device, are temporarily captured by the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, and supplied to the test-firing test device from the data bus 140 via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 as an error signal indicating, for example, that the gaming machine is in a state in which game control is not possible. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test-firing test apparatus, a connector that relays the signal line of the switch detection signal that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. A chip enable signal CE output from the game microcomputer 111 is also supplied to a port on the relay board 70, and a signal of the port selectively controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

The output section 130 is also provided with a second output port 134 connected to the data bus 140 . The second output port 134 outputs the operation data of the first big winning opening solenoid (big winning opening solenoid 1) 38b for opening the first special variable winning device 38, the second big winning opening solenoid (big winning opening solenoid 2) 39b for opening the second special variable winning device 39, the lever solenoid 38f for operating the lever member in the first special variable winning device 38, and the general electric solenoid 37c for opening the normal variable winning device 37, and outputs the currently selected probability. This is a port for outputting display data of the performance display device 153 that displays setting values.
Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a third output port 135 for outputting ON/OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the collective display device 50, and a fourth output port 136 for outputting ON/OFF data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED of the collective display device 50 is connected.

The output unit 130 is also provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information about the gaming machine 10 such as big win information to the external information terminal board 71 . The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photorelay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (information collection terminal, game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.) installed in the game parlor, and can supply information on the gaming machine 10 to the external device. Also, a firing permission signal is output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132 .

Further, the output unit 130 includes a first driver (drive circuit) 138a that receives operation data signals of the big winning opening solenoids 38b and 39b, the lever solenoid 38f, and the general electric solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal, a second driver 138b that outputs an ON/OFF drive signal for the segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 that is output from the third output port 135, and a collective display device that is output from the fourth output port 136. A third driver 138c outputs an on/off drive signal for the digit line on the current drawing side of 50, a fourth driver 138d outputs an external information signal to be supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device to the external information terminal board 71, and a fifth driver 138e receives a display data signal of the performance display device 153 output from the second output port 134 to generate and output a drive signal. Data is transmitted through serial communication from the second output port 134 to the fifth driver 138e.

DC 32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138a so as to drive a solenoid that operates at 32V. DC 5V is supplied from the power supply device 400 to the fifth driver 138e as a power supply voltage so that the performance display device 153 that operates at 5V can be driven.
Also, the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50 is supplied with DC 12V. The third driver 138c, which drives the digit lines, draws current from the digit lines according to display data, so the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

The second driver 138b, which outputs 12V, causes current to flow into the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line, and the third driver 138c, which outputs ground potential, draws current from the cathode terminal through the segment line, thereby supplying the power supply voltage to the LEDs sequentially selected by the dynamic driving method and lighting them.
The fourth driver 138d for outputting the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is supplied with DC 12V to give the external information signal a level of 12V.
The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, etc. may be provided on the output section 130 of the game control device 100, that is, not on the main board but on the relay board 70 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as the identification code and program of each game machine to the external inspection device 500 . The photocoupler 139 is configured to allow two-way communication so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since the data transmission and reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the game microcomputer 111 as in a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, 124, and 126 are not provided.

Although not particularly limited, non-contact type magnetic proximity sensors (hereinafter referred to as "proximity switches") are used for the starting opening 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36, the starting opening 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning apparatus 37, the winning opening switch 35a, the big winning opening switches 38a and 39a, and the gate switch 34a. In addition, a microswitch having a mechanical contact can be used for the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10 and the body frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 or the like.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG.
The effect control device 300 includes a main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 made up of an amusement chip (IC) similar to the game microcomputer 111, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor for performing image processing for video display on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311, and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling sound output for reproducing various melodies and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b. .

Connected to the main control microcomputer 311 are a program ROM 321 consisting of a PROM (programmable read-only memory) storing programs to be executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 providing a work area, a FeRAM 323 capable of retaining stored contents even if power is not supplied during a power failure, and an RTC (real time clock) 338 serving as timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day of the week, time, etc.). A RAM that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311 . A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311 . The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, determines the content of the performance, instructs the content of the output video to the VDP 312, instructs the reproduction sound to the sound source LSI 314, lights the decorative lamp, controls the driving of the motor and solenoid, and executes processing such as management of the performance time.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area and a scaler 312b that enlarges and reduces images. The VDP 312 is also connected to an image ROM 325 storing character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) 326 used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in parallel. Sending and receiving data in parallel allows commands and data to be sent in a shorter time than in serial mode.

From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronizing signal VSYNC for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 with lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30, and a synchronizing signal STS for giving data transmission timing are input. Interrupt signals INT0 to n for notifying the processing status such as the end of drawing to the VRAM and a wait signal WAIT for notifying that the VDP 312 is in a state of waiting for reception of commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 are also input from the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313 , and the video generated by the VDP 312 is displayed on the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313 .

An audio ROM 327 storing audio data is connected to the tone generator LSI 314 . The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address/data bus 340 . An interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311 . The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and the sound generated by the sound source LSI 314 is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Also, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I/F) 331 for receiving commands transmitted from the game control device 100 . Via this command I/F331, decoration special figure retention number command, decoration special figure command, fluctuation command, stop information command and the like transmitted from game control device 100 to production control device 300 are received as production control command signal (production command). Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC3.3V, the command I/F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function.

In addition, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), a frame decoration LED control circuit 333 that drives and controls a frame decoration device having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the glass frame 15 (for example, the frame decoration device 18 including the display plate 350), and a board production device 44 (including the center case 40) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). For example, there is provided a board effect movable body control circuit 334 that drives and controls a movable accessory that enhances the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41 . These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, etc. are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address/data bus 340 . The glass frame 15 may be provided with a frame effect device having a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for effect), and may be provided with a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device.

Furthermore, the production control device 300 includes a production button switch 25a built in the production button 25 provided in the glass frame 15, a cross key 29 provided in the glass frame 15, a function to detect the on / off state of the production accessory switch 47 (production motor switch) that detects the initial position of the motor in the board production device 44, and a function to input a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311. A switch input circuit 336 having a function of inputting a detection signal to the controller 311 is provided.

The normal power supply 410 of the power supply device 400 is a direct control device 300 with the above configuration and the DC32V for driving motors and solenoids to the desired level of DC voltage to the electronic components controlled by it, and drives a display device consisting of LCD panels 41, and runs the motor and LED and LED. In addition to the DC5V, which is the power supply voltage of the DC12V for moving and the command I / f331, it is configured to generate a DC15V voltage for driving motors, LEDs, and speakers. Furthermore, when using an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V as the main control microcomputer 311, a DC-DC converter for generating DC3.3V or DC1.2V based on DC5V is provided in the effect control device 300. Note that the DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply section 410 .

The reset signal generated by the control signal generator 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to reset the device. In addition, in the form of output from the main control microcomputer 311, it is supplied to the VDP 312 (VDRESET signal), the sound source LSI 314, the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) that drives the speaker, and the control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) that drive and control lamps and motors, etc., to reset them. A cooling FAN 45 for cooling various parts of the game machine 10 is connected to the performance control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the performance control device 300 is powered on.

In the following description, when the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as the special figure variation display game. In addition, when not distinguishing the decoration special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display game, it is simply referred to as the decoration special figure fluctuation display game. In addition, when the big hit (first special result) and the small hit (second special result) are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as hits (special result). Moreover, when not distinguishing the 1st special game state which is a special game state based on a big hit, and the 2nd special game state which is a special game state based on a small hit, it is simply called a special game state.

The big hit is a special result (first special result) accompanied by the operation of the conditional device, and the small win is a special result (second special result) not accompanied by the operation of the conditional device. The condition device is activated when a big win occurs (stop display of the big win pattern) in the special figure variation display game, and activation of the condition device means that, for example, a big win state occurs and a specific flag for continuously operating the special variation winning devices 38 and 39 as special electric roles is set (a role continuous operation device is operated). The fact that the conditional device does not operate means that the aforementioned flag is not set as in the case of winning a small prize lottery, for example. The "condition device" may be software means such as a flag that is turned on and off by software as described above, or hardware means such as a switch that is electrically turned on and off. In addition, "conditional device" is a term commonly used in the field of pachinko machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of electric accessories, and is used as a term with the same meaning in this specification.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by shooting game balls (pachinko balls) toward the game area 32 from the ball shooting device. The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by direction changing members such as obstacle nails and windmills placed in various places in the game area 32, and wins a normal figure start gate 34, a general winning opening 35, a starting winning opening 36, a normal variable winning apparatus 37, a first special variable winning apparatus 38 or a second special variable winning apparatus 39, or flows into the out port 30a provided at the bottom of the game area 32. and discharged from the game area 32. When a game ball wins a prize in a general prize winning port 35, a starting prize winning port 36, a normal variable prize winning device 37, a first special variable prize winning device 38 or a second special variable prize winning device 39, the number of prize balls corresponding to the type of the winning prize port is discharged to an upper tray 21 or a lower tray 23 of the glass frame 15 from a payout unit controlled by a payout control device 200 (see FIG. 5).

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player can aim to win a start winning hole 36 or a general winning hole 35 provided to the left of the starting winning hole 36 by adjusting the launch force and shooting the game ball to the left side game area (so-called left hitting), and by shooting the game ball to the right side game area (so-called right hitting), the normal figure starting gate 34, the normal variable winning device 37, the first special variable winning device 38, the second 2 special variable winning device 39, it is possible to aim to win the general winning opening 35 disposed on the right side of the second special variable winning device 39.

A gate switch 34a composed of a non-contact type switch or the like for detecting a game ball passing through the normal pattern starting gate 34 is provided in the normal pattern starting gate 34, and when the game ball hit into the game area 32 passes through the normal pattern starting gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, based on the input of the game ball detection signal from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal pattern start gate 34, if the normal pattern start memory number is less than the upper limit number (for example, 4), the normal pattern start memory number is added (+1) and one normal pattern start memory is stored in the RAM 111C. The number of memory of this normal figure start winning prize is displayed on the normal figure reservation indicator 58 of the collective display device 50. - 特許庁In addition, in the normal pattern start memory, a hit determination random value (hit random value) for determining the result of the normal pattern variation display game extracted based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a is stored.

Then, when there is the normal pattern start memory and the normal pattern change display game can be started, that is, when the normal pattern change display game is not being executed and the normal pattern change display game is not in a winning state to convert the normal pattern change prize winning device 37 to the open state, the random value for winning determination stored in the normal pattern start memory and the determination value stored in the ROM 111B are compared with each other to determine hit/loss of the normal pattern change display game, and processing for starting the normal pattern change display game is performed. When the hit determination random number matches the determination value, the normal pattern variation display game becomes a hit and a specific result mode (normal pattern specific result) is derived.

In addition, the game control device 100, as a process for executing the normal pattern fluctuation display game, displays a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns in a predetermined order over a predetermined fluctuation time on the general pattern display device 57 provided in the collective display device 50. After performing the display during normal pattern fluctuation, the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is stopped and displayed. In addition, the normal figure display device 57 may be configured by the display device 41, using, for example, numbers, symbols, character patterns, etc. as the normal identification information, and after variably displaying this for a predetermined time, stopping and displaying the result.

When the result of the normal pattern variation display game is a hit, the normal pattern display device 57 stops displaying a lighting pattern as a special result mode, operates the general electrical solenoid 37c, and controls the movable member of the normal variation prize winning device 37 to open for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds). That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member). In addition, when the result of the normal pattern variation display game is a loss, control is performed to display the lighting pattern corresponding to the state of the result of the loss on the normal pattern display device 57 .

Winning balls to the starting winning opening 36 and winning balls to the normal variable winning device 37 are detected by a starting opening 1 switch 36a and a starting opening 2 switch 37a, respectively. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, the first start memory forming the start memory (special figure start memory) based on the winning to the start winning opening 36 is stored within a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4), and the second start memory forming the start memory (special figure start memory) based on the winning to the normal variable prize winning device 37 is stored within a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4). A jackpot random number value, a special symbol pattern random number value, and each variation pattern random number value are extracted as starting memory information based on winnings to a start winning port 36 and a normal fluctuation winning device 37, respectively, and the extracted random number values are stored in a RAM 111C as first start memory and second start memory. The number of starting memories is displayed on a special figure 1 reservation display 53 and a special figure 2 reservation display 54 for notifying the number of starting winnings of the collective display device 50, and is also displayed as a decorative special figure start memory display on the display device 41 of the center case 40. - 特許庁

The game control device 100 performs a special figure 1 variation display game with a special figure 1 display device 51 (first variation display device) based on the first start memory, and performs a special figure 2 variation display game with a special figure 2 display device 52 (second variation display device) based on the second start memory. Then, when both the first starting memory and the second starting memory are stored, the special figure 2 variation display game is preferentially executed over the special figure 1 variation display game.

That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 performs execution control of the special figure 1 variation display game (first special figure variation display game) based on the first start memory stored according to the winning of the game ball to the start winning opening 36 (first start winning area), and the special figure 2 variation display game (second special figure variation display game) based on the second start memory stored according to the winning of the game ball to the normal variation winning device 37 (second start winning area). ). The execution control means is configured to execute the special figure 2 variation display game based on the second start memory with priority over the special figure 1 variation display game based on the first start memory in a state where the first start memory and the second start memory are stored.

In the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52, after performing the variable display, the predetermined result mode is stopped and displayed. Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big win, the display mode of the special figure 1 display device 51 or the special figure 2 display device 52 becomes a special result mode (big win result mode) corresponding to the first special result, resulting in a big win and a first special game state (so-called big win state). In addition, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 display device 51 or the special figure 2 display device 52 becomes a special result mode (small hit result mode) corresponding to the second special result, resulting in a small win and a second special game state (so-called small win state). That is, the special figure 1 display device 51 constitutes a first variation display means capable of displaying the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the start winning opening 36 . Also, the special figure 2 display device 52 constitutes a second variation display means capable of displaying a second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) based on winning of game balls to the normal variation winning device 37 .

In addition, the game control device (game control means) 100 can perform control to generate a game state (specific game state) in which the game can be progressed in a situation (a high probability of winning or a general electric support) that is more advantageous to the player than in the normal game state after the end of the jackpot game state (first special game state). That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 serves as a specific game state generating means.

In addition, in response to the execution of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game, the decoration special figure variation display game for variably displaying a plurality of types of decoration identification information (numbers, symbols, character patterns, etc.) on the display device 41 is executed. The decoration special figure variation display game on the display device 41 includes a decoration special figure 1 variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game and a decoration special figure 2 variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game, which are displayed in separate display areas. Then, the variation display is performed with the variation of the corresponding special figure variation display game, and the display corresponding to the result is performed with the derivation of the result mode in the corresponding special figure variation display game.

In other words, the display device 41 serves as a decoration variation display means capable of displaying a decoration variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) that variably displays decoration identification information corresponding to the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) and the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game). In addition, separate display devices may be used for the decoration special figure 1 variation display game and the decoration special figure 2 variation display game, or only one decoration special figure variation display game may be displayed. Also, the game machine 10 may not be provided with the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52, and the special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41.

FIG. 7 shows an example of distribution ratios in this embodiment.
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7A, for example, there are four types of results of the special figure variation display game: a big hit, a small hit, and a support hit. As shown in FIG. 7(b), for example, there are three kinds of big wins: a definite variable A big win in which a definite variable A big win pattern is stopped and displayed as a big win pattern (a result mode of the big win), a definite variable B big win in which the definite variable B big win pattern is stopped and displayed, and a normal big win in which the normal big win pattern is stopped and displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 7(c), for example, there are two types of small wins: a small win A in which a small win A pattern is stopped and displayed, and a small win B in which a small win B pattern is stopped and displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 7(d), for example, there are three types of support hits: support hit A in which support hit A symbols are stopped and displayed as support hit symbols (support hit result modes), support hit B in which support hit B symbols are stopped and displayed, and support hit C in which support hit C symbols are stopped and displayed. It should be noted that the support hit is neither a big hit nor a small hit, and can be said to be one type of winning pattern.

The probability variable indicates that the possibility of game balls flowing into a specific area (variable probability operation area) is high and it is easy to become a high probability state (variable probability state) after the end of the special game state. In the game machine of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the high probability state is reached depending on whether or not the game ball flows into the specific region (variable probability operation region), so even if the type of big win is variable probability, the high probability state does not occur unless the game ball flows into the specific region, and even if the type of big win is normal, the high probability state occurs when the game ball flows into the specific region.

In a special game state (jackpot game state) based on the derivation of the variable probability A jackpot and the variable probability B jackpot, the first special variable prize winning device 38 is opened in a specific round, and a long opening with V is performed in which a specific area (variable probability operation area) is opened. Long opening with V is an opening mode with a high possibility of game balls flowing into a specific area (probability variable operating area). Then, in a round other than the specific round, the first special variable prize winning device 38 is opened, but the specific area is not opened.
In the special game state (jackpot game state) based on the derivation of the normal jackpot, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened in a specific round, and short opening with V is performed to open a specific area (probability variable operation area). Short opening with V is an opening mode in which the possibility of game balls flowing into a specific area (probability variable operating area) is lower than long opening with V. Then, in a round other than the specific round, the first special variable prize winning device 38 is opened, but the specific area is not opened.
In the special game state (small hit game state) based on the derivation of the small hit, the second special variable winning device 39 is opened.

FIG. 7(a) is an example of the distribution rate of the result of the special figure variation display game. In this embodiment, the distribution rate of the result of the special figure variation display game is common between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, but may be different between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.
Also, in FIG. 7(a), the big hit distribution rate is the same when the probability setting value is "setting 1", "setting 2", and "setting 3", but may be different. Also, in FIG. 7(a), the distribution rate of the big hit is the same when the probability setting value is "setting 4", "setting 5", and "setting 6", but may be different. Also, for example, the jackpot distribution rate in "setting 1" and the jackpot distribution rate in "setting 2" are the first distribution rate (e.g., low probability: 219/65536, high probability: 2190/65536), and the jackpot distribution rate in "setting 3" and the jackpot distribution rate in "setting 4" are the second distribution rate (e.g., low probability: 262/65536, high probability: 2620/ 65536), and the jackpot distribution rate at "setting 5" and the jackpot distribution rate at "setting 6" may be set to the third distribution rate (for example, low probability: 291/65536, high probability: 2910/65536).

Also, in FIG. 7(a), the small hit distribution rate is the same regardless of the set probability value, but may be different. Also, in FIG. 7(a), the small hit distribution rate is the same regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game (whether it is a low probability state or a high probability state), but may be different.
Also, in FIG. 7(a), the allocation rate per support is the same regardless of the set probability value, but may be different.
That is, only the winning probability of the big win is changed by changing the probability set value, and the probability of the small win and the support win is not changed.
Also, in FIG. 7(a), it is possible to win a support hit only in a low probability state, but it may be possible to win in a high probability state. In this case, when the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a low probability state, it may be higher than when it is a high probability state, the low probability state and the high probability state may be the same, or the low probability state may be lower than the high probability state.

FIG. 7(b) is an example of the distribution rate of the jackpot types. In FIG. 7(b), the distribution rate of the jackpot type is common between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, but may be different. Also, in FIG. 7(b), the distribution rate of the jackpot type is the same regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game, but may be different.
FIG. 7(c) is an example of the distribution rate of the small hit type. In FIG. 7(c), the distribution rate of the small hit type is common between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, but may be different. Also, in FIG. 7(c), the distribution rate of the small hit type is the same regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game, but may be different.

FIG. 7(d) is an example of distribution ratios for types of support hits. In FIG. 7(d), the distribution rate of the type of support hit is the same regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game, but may be different.
In addition, in FIG. 7 (d), the distribution rate of C per support in Special Figure 1 is higher than the distribution rate of C per support in Special Figure 2, but the distribution rate of C per support in Special Figure 1 may be the same as the distribution rate of C per support in Special Figure 2, or may be lower than the distribution rate of C per support in Special Figure 2. In addition, in FIG. 7(d), the distribution rate of the support hit A in the special figure 1 and the distribution rate of the support hit B in the special figure 1 are the same, but they may be different. In addition, in FIG. 7(d), the distribution rate of the support per A in the special figure 2 and the distribution rate of the support per B in the special figure 2 are the same, but they may be different. Also, the sorting rate of the types of support hits in the case where it is possible to win the support hit even in the high probability state may be the same as or different from that in the low probability state.

[Game state transition diagram (game flow)]
First, the transition (transition) of the game state by the game control of the game control device 100 will be described. FIG. 8 is a diagram illustrating a game state transition diagram (game flow) showing transitions of game states in this embodiment.
The game state includes a normal game state ST14, a first specific game state ST11, a second specific game state ST12, and a third specific game state ST13. In addition, there are a first special game state (big win game state) based on the first special result (big win) and a second special game state (small win game state) based on the second special result (small win) as game states, but they are omitted here.

In each game state, the special figure probability for deriving the first special result (big hit) to be controlled by the game control device 100, the production mode controlled by the production control device 300 to determine the game production mode, the main start area which is the start area to be mainly targeted in the game state, the main variation special figure which is the type of special figure variation display game to be mainly executed, and the shooting direction of the game ball are determined.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to aim to win a prize in the start winning port 36 by hitting left, and to aim for winning in the normal variable prize winning device 37 by hitting right. In other words, it is possible to select the target starting area according to the player's will. In each game state, the game is designed on the assumption that either one of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game is mainly played, and the game is designed so that it is advantageous for the player to proceed mainly with one of the special figure variation display games that is determined to be the main one in terms of design so that the player proceeds with the game according to this design. In addition, in this specification, one special figure variation display game determined to be main in each gaming state may be referred to as main variation, and the other special figure variation display game may be referred to as irregular variation.

The normal game state ST14 is a state in which the special figure probability is low, there is no electric power support for improving the opening time per unit time of the ordinary variable prize winning device 37 to facilitate winning, and there is no time reduction for shortening the variation time of the special figure variation display game or the normal figure variation display game. Also, the production mode that defines the production mode is the normal mode. The main variation special figure is the special figure 1 variation display game, the main starting area is the starting winning opening 36, and the shooting direction is left-handed in order to aim at this starting winning opening 36. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 1 variation display game is the main variation and the special figure 2 variation display game is the irregular variation.

The first specific game state ST11 is a state in which the special figure probability is high probability, there is no electric power support for improving the opening time per unit time of the normal variation winning device 37 to facilitate winning, and there is no time reduction for shortening the variation time of the special figure variation display game or the normal figure variation display game. Also, the effect mode that defines the effect mode is the latent mode. The main variation special figure is the special figure 1 variation display game, the main starting area is the starting winning opening 36, and the shooting direction is left-handed in order to aim at this starting winning opening 36. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 1 variation display game is the main variation and the special figure 2 variation display game is the irregular variation.

The second specific game state ST12 is a state in which the special figure probability is high probability, and there is a general electric support that improves the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning. If there is general electric support, there is also a time saving to shorten the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game and the general figure fluctuation display game. A performance mode that defines a performance mode is a chance mode. In addition, the main variation special figure is a special figure 2 variation display game, the main starting area is the normal variation winning device 37, and the shooting direction is right-handed in order to aim at this normal variation winning device 37. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 2 variation display game is the main variation and the special figure 1 variation display game is the irregular variation.
The third specific game state ST13 is the same as the second specific game state ST12 except that the special figure probability is a low probability state.

Among these four game states, the normal game state ST14 is the most disadvantageous state for the player. The third specific game state ST13 is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state ST14 because of the general power support, and the first specific game state ST11 is a high probability state, so it is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state ST14 and the third specific game state ST13. The second specific game state ST12 is a high-probability state and has a general electric support, so it is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state ST14, the first specific game state ST11, and the third specific game state ST13.

The transition of the game state is performed by ending the first special game state based on the derivation of the first special result (jackpot), derivation of the support hit, and completion of the prescribed number of games. Therefore, the game state does not shift due to the end of the second special game state based on the derivation of the second special result (minor win).
Basically, when the special result that triggered the start of the special game state is a normal jackpot with a low probability state after the end of the special game state, it shifts to a third specific game state ST13, among the probability variable jackpots with a high probability state after the end of the special game state, it shifts to a second specific game state ST12 when it is a probability variable A jackpot, and shifts to a first specific game state ST11 when it is a probability variable B jackpot.

Specifically, when the probability variable A big hit is derived as a result of the special figure variation display game to enter the special game state, and when there is V passage in the special game state (when the game ball flows into the specific region (probability variable operation region) of the first special variable prize winning device 38 and is detected by the specific region switch 38d), the state shifts to the second specific game state ST12 after the special game state ends. In addition, as a result of the special figure variation display game, the probability variable B big hit is derived and becomes a special game state, and when there is V passage in the special game state (when the game ball flows into the specific region (probability variable operation region) of the first special variable winning device 38 and is detected by the specific region switch 38d), the game moves to the first specific game state ST11 after the end of the special game state. In addition, as a result of the special figure variation display game, a normal big win is derived to enter a special game state, and when there is no V passage in the special game state (when the game ball does not flow into the specific area (probability variable operation area) of the first special variable winning device 38), the game moves to a third specific game state ST13 after the special game state is finished. Since the second specific game state ST12 and the third specific game state ST13 are set to the same chance mode in the performance mode, it is difficult for the player to grasp the shift.

In addition, the number of times of ST (for example, 2000 times), which is the number of times of the special figure variation display game that can be executed in the high probability state, is set, and when the number of times of execution of the special figure variation display game from the end of the special game state in the first specific game state ST11 reaches the number of times of ST, the game may be shifted to the normal game state ST14.
Also, the number of times of ST (for example, 2000 times) which is the number of times of the special figure variation display game that can be executed in the high probability state is set, and when the number of times of execution of the special figure variation display game from the end of the special game state in the second specific game state ST12 reaches the number of times of ST, the normal game state ST14 (or the third specific game state ST13) may be entered.

When a normal big win is derived and shifts to the third specific game state ST13, it is possible to stay in the third specific game state ST13 until the special figure variation display game is executed 100 times, and when the special figure variation display game is executed 100 times without deriving a big win or a support win in the third specific game state ST13, the game machine shifts to a normal game state ST14. That is, in this embodiment, the normal jackpot support count is set to "100". It should be noted that the normal jackpot support count is not limited to "100 times" and can be changed as appropriate.

Further, when the probability variable big win A is derived and the game state shifts to the second specific game state ST12, it is possible to stay in the second specific game state ST12 until the special figure change display game is executed 1000 times, and when the special picture change display game is executed 1000 times without deriving the big win in the second specific game state ST12, the game state shifts to the first specific game state ST11. That is, in the present embodiment, the number of support times for the probability variable A jackpot is set to "1000 times". In addition, the number of support for the variable probability A jackpot is not limited to "1000 times", and can be changed as appropriate. For example, it may be "until the next jackpot".

Further, as described above, the transition of the game state is also performed by derivation of the support win.
Specifically, in the normal game state ST14 and the third specific game state ST13, when the support win is derived as a result of the special figure variation display game, the process shifts to the third specific game state ST13 after the special figure variation display game is finished. That is, the transition (transition) of the game state when the variable probability big win or the normal big win is derived goes through the special game state, whereas the transition (transition) of the game state when the support win is derived does not go through the special game state.

When the support hit A out of the support wins is derived and the game state shifts to the third specific game state ST13, it is possible to stay in the third specific game state ST13 until the special figure variation display game is executed 20 times, and when the special figure variation display game is executed 20 times without deriving the big win or the support hit in the third specific game state ST13, the game state shifts to the normal game state ST14. That is, in this embodiment, the number of times of support per support A is set to "20 times". It should be noted that the number of times of support per support A is not limited to "20 times", and can be changed as appropriate.

Further, when the support hit B out of the support hits is derived and the game state shifts to the third specific game state ST13, it is possible to stay in the third specific game state ST13 until the special figure variation display game is executed 100 times, and when the special figure variation display game is executed 100 times without deriving the big win or the support hit in the third specific game state ST13, the game state shifts to the normal game state ST14. That is, in this embodiment, the number of times of support per support B is set to "100 times". It should be noted that the number of times of support per support B is not limited to "100 times", and can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, when the support hit C of the support wins is derived and the game state shifts to the third specific game state ST13, it is possible to stay in the third specific game state ST13 until the special figure variation display game is executed 1000 times, and when the special figure variation display game is executed 1000 times without deriving the big win or the support hit in the third specific game state ST13, the game state shifts to the normal game state ST14. That is, in this embodiment, the number of times of support per support C is set to "1000 times". Note that the number of times of support per support C is not limited to "1000 times", and can be changed as appropriate.

In the present embodiment, when shifting to the chance mode via the special game state and when shifting to the chance mode without passing through the special game state, the performance mode executed during the chance mode (at least one of the performance by display using the display device 41 etc., the performance by sound using the speakers 19a and 19b etc., the performance by light using the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, the performance by the movable members using the board production device 44 and the frame production device, and the selection mode of the variation pattern). It is possible to make it different. That is, since the performance mode of the performance executed in the chance mode generated based on the derivation of the big win (ordinary big win, probability variable A big win) can be made different from the performance mode of the performance executed in the chance mode generated based on the derivation of the support wins (support wins A to C), it is possible to suggest whether the chance mode is generated based on the derivation of the big win or the derivation of the support win depending on the performance mode of the performance executed during the chance mode.

FIG. 9 shows an example of a variation pattern selection mode in the third specific game state ST13.
As shown in FIG. 9A, this embodiment has variation selection table groups A to D as variation selection table groups in which selectable variation patterns are defined. These variation selection table groups differ in the types of selectable variation patterns and selection ratios. As a result, the tendency of the execution mode of the special figure variation display game differs depending on the variation selection table group to be used.

The type of variation selection table group to be used can be changed when the number of executions of the special figure variation display game in the third specific game state ST13 reaches a specified number of times (here, 20 times, 100 times).
A variation pattern scenario that defines the process of changing the variation selection table group differs for each type of chance mode. That is, the variation pattern scenario to be selected is made different depending on whether the derived result is the normal jackpot or the support hits A to C.

In the case of chance mode A, which is a chance mode corresponding to support win A, a variation pattern scenario using variation selection table group A is selected for the 0th to 20th special figure variation display games.
In the case of a chance mode B which is a chance mode corresponding to a support hit B, a variation pattern scenario using a variation selection table group A is used for the 0th to 20th special figure variation display games, and a variation selection table group B is used for the 21st to 100th special figure variation display games.

In the case of the chance mode C corresponding to the support hit C, a variation pattern scenario is selected in which the variation selection table group A is used for the 0th to 20th special figure variation display games, the variation selection table group B is used for the 21st to 100th special figure variation display games, and the variation selection table group C is used for the 101st to 1000th special figure variation display games.
In the case of chance mode D which is a chance mode corresponding to a normal big win, a variation pattern scenario is selected in which a variation selection table group A is used for the 0th to 20th special figure variation display games and a variation selection table group D is used for the 21st to 100th special figure variation display games.

By doing so, even if the third specific game state ST13 is the same, the execution mode of the special figure variation display game is different due to the different variation pattern scenarios, the execution mode of the special figure variation display game is changed, and the amusement of the game can be improved. In particular, both the supporter win B and the normal big win are in the third specific game state ST13 over the period of executing the special figure variation display game 100 times, but since the variation pattern scenarios are different, it is possible to make the game different in taste and improve the interest of the game.

The selection of the variation selection table group is not limited to those described above, and can be set arbitrarily.
Further, as shown in FIG. 9(b), any one of a plurality of types of chance modes corresponding to support hits A to C and normal jackpots may be selected.
This example includes variation pattern scenarios using variation selection tables specific to each of the support hits A to C and the normal jackpot, and it is possible to guess the type of chance mode from the variation pattern.
For example, in chance mode A2, it is possible to guess that it is chance mode A because it uses a unique variation selection table group D, and it is possible to guess that it is chance mode B because it uses unique variation selection table groups E and F in chance mode B2. In addition, since the chance mode C2 uses the unique variation selection table groups G and H, it can be estimated that the chance mode is C, and the chance mode D2 uses the unique variation selection table groups J and K, so that it can be estimated that it is the chance mode D.
By doing so, the game becomes more diverse, and the enjoyment of guessing the type of the chance mode can be given, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The timing at which the variation selection table group can be changed in the variation pattern scenario is the case where the 20th and 100th special figure variation display games are executed from the start of the third specific game state ST13, which is a delimiter at which the third specific game state ST13 may end, but it is not limited to this, and can be set to any timing.
Also, the change timing of the variation selection table group may be different for each chance mode.

Further, instead of determining all the variation selection table groups to be used at the start of the chance mode, the variation selection table group to be used next may be selected from a plurality of types at the timing when the variation selection table group can be changed.
Also, instead of a predetermined timing, a lottery for changing the variation selection table group may be performed each time the special figure variation display game is executed, and the change may be made when the lottery is won.
Also, although the third specific game state ST13 has been described in FIG. 9, it is possible to sequentially change the variation selection table group similarly in other game states.

In the present embodiment, when a support win is derived during the chance mode (during general electric support), that is, when a support win is derived in the third specific game state ST13, the number of times of support is reset and the number of times of support corresponding to a new support win is set again.
Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 10(a), in the third specific game state ST13 that has shifted with the end of the special figure variation display game in which the result is "support win B", when support win A is derived in the 10th rotation, the remaining support count is changed from 90 times to 20 times.
Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 10(b), in the third specific game state ST13 that has shifted with the end of the special figure variation display game in which the result is "support win B", when the support win A is derived at the 90th rotation, the remaining support count is changed from 10 times to 20 times.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the production mode is changed in accordance with the change in the number of remaining support. That is, for example, in the example shown in FIG. 10(a), when the number of remaining supports is changed from 90 times to 20 times, the production mode is switched from chance mode B (chance mode corresponding to support win B) to chance mode A (chance mode corresponding to support win A). Also, for example, in the example shown in FIG. 10(b), the production mode switches from the chance mode B to the chance mode A when the number of remaining supports is changed from 10 times to 20 times. Along with this, the variation pattern scenario is also switched, and the variation selection table group is reset according to the switched variation pattern scenario.

Incidentally, when a new support hit is derived in the third specific game state ST13, a variation pattern scenario different from the variation pattern scenario corresponding to the derived support hit may be set.
For example, it is possible to set a specific variation pattern scenario different from the variation pattern scenario that can be selected when a support win is derived in the normal game state ST14. In this specific variation pattern scenario, a variation pattern scenario may be set in which a specific variation selection table group other than the selectable variation selection table group is selected when a support hit is derived in the normal game state ST14. In this way, when the support win is derived for the first time in one continuous third specific game state ST13, the variation selection table group is changed, but when the support win is derived thereafter, the variation selection table group is maintained, and it is possible to give the impression that the continuous third specific game state ST13 is integrated by deriving the support win a plurality of times.

Moreover, it is not necessary to change the presentation mode in response to the change in the number of remaining support. Specifically, for example, in the example shown in FIG. 10, chance mode B may be continued even after the number of remaining support times is changed to 20 times.
Alternatively, only the rank-up of the performance mode may be permitted, and the performance mode switching such as the rank-down may not be performed. Specifically, for example, when the supporter hit derived after the supporter hit B is the supporter hit C, the production mode is switched from the chance mode B to the chance mode C (chance mode corresponding to the supporter hit C). On the other hand, if the supporter hit derived after the supporter hit B is the supporter hit A as shown in FIG. (or switch to a chance mode different from chance mode A or chance mode B).

Alternatively, when the support hit is derived during the chance mode (during the general electric support), the support count corresponding to the new support hit may be added to the remaining support count.
Specifically, for example, as shown in the left diagram of FIG. 11(a), in the third specific game state ST13 that has shifted with the end of the special figure variation display game in which the result is "support hit B", when the support hit A is derived in the 10th rotation, the remaining number of support times is changed from 90 times to 110 times (=90 times + 20 times), and for example, as shown in the right diagram of FIG. 11(a), the result is "support hit B". In the third specific game state ST13 shifted with the end of the special figure variation display game, when the support hit A is derived at the 90th rotation, the number of remaining supports may be changed from 10 times to 30 times (=10 times + 20 times).

In this case, an upper limit number (for example, 1000 times) may be set for the number of times of support, and if the sum of the number of remaining support times and the number of times of support corresponding to the new support hit exceeds the upper limit number of times, the remaining number of times of support may be changed to the upper limit number of times. Also, in this case, the rendering mode may or may not be changed in accordance with the change in the remaining support count. That is, for example, in the example shown in FIG. 11(a), when the remaining support count is changed, the production mode may be switched from the chance mode B to another chance mode, or the chance mode B may be continued even after the remaining support count is changed. Alternatively, only the rank-up of the performance mode may be permitted, and the performance mode switching such as the rank-down may not be performed.

Alternatively, when the support hit is derived during the chance mode (during the general electric support), the number of remaining supports and the support count corresponding to the new support hit may be compared, and the larger one (the one advantageous to the player) may be adopted. Specifically, for example, as shown in the left diagram of FIG. 11(b), in the third specific game state ST13 that has shifted with the end of the special figure variation display game in which the result is "support win B", when the support hit A is derived in the 10th rotation, the support count corresponding to the new support hit is 20 times, which is less than the remaining support count (90 times), so the remaining support count is not changed, for example, as shown in the right diagram of FIG. 11(b). In addition, in the third specific game state ST13 which is shifted with the end of the special figure variation display game in which the result is "support win B", when the support win A is derived at the 90th turn, the number of times of support corresponding to the new support win is 20 times, which is larger than the remaining number of support times (10 times), so the remaining number of support times may be changed from 10 times to 20 times.

In this case, the rendering mode may or may not be changed in accordance with the change in the remaining support count. That is, for example, in the example shown in the right diagram of FIG. 11(b), when the remaining support count is changed, the production mode may be switched from chance mode B to another chance mode, or the chance mode B may be continued even after the remaining support count is changed. Alternatively, only the rank-up of the performance mode may be permitted, and the performance mode switching such as the rank-down may not be performed.

In the present embodiment, the effects performed during execution of the support winning game (the special figure variation display game in which the result is "support winning") are special effects such as battle effects (described later).
Note that in a gaming machine 10 configured to adopt the larger one of the remaining number of support times and the number of support times corresponding to the new support win (that is, the gaming machine 10 performing the control shown in FIG. 11B), a special effect is performed only during execution of a support win game in which the number of supports is adopted (for example, a special figure variation display game in which the result in the right diagram of FIG. 11B is "support win A"), and a support win in which no support count is adopted During execution of the game (for example, a special figure variation display game in which the result in the left diagram of FIG. 11(b) is "Sapo hit A"), the special effect may not be performed.
Since the supporter win variation pattern selected when the result is "supporter win" is a variation pattern considering execution of the special performance during the supporter win game, if the special performance is not executed during the supporter win game, it is preferable to adjust by, for example, extending the temporary stop display time of the game result as compared to the case of executing the special performance.

Also, in the example shown in the left diagram of FIG. 11(b), as a result of the support win game in which the number of support is not adopted, the support win symbol (here, the support win A symbol) is stopped and displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as a result of a win-win-support game in which the number of times of support is not adopted, instead of win-win-support symbols, losing symbols may be stopped and displayed. In a game machine 10 configured to adopt the larger one (advantageous one for a player) of the remaining number of support times and the number of support times corresponding to a new support win, a performance control device 300 determines whether or not the game control device 100 determines not to adopt the number of support times corresponding to a new support win based on a command transmitted from the game control device 100.例文帳に追加Specifically, the effect control device 300, for example, compares the number of times of support based on the decoration special figure command for notifying the stop symbol on the display device 41 and the number of times of support based on the number of times of shortening variation command for notifying the number of times of shortened time (number of times of support), and if different, determines that the game control device 100 has determined not to adopt the number of times of support corresponding to the new hits. When the game control device 100 determines that the number of times of support corresponding to the new support win is not adopted, as a result of the support win game, the winning pattern may be stopped and displayed in place of the pattern specified by the decoration special command (the support win pattern corresponding to the new support win).

In addition, in the example shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, the support hit derived during the chance mode (during the general electric support) is the support hit A, but it is not limited to this. That is, the supporter win A may be derived during the chance mode, the supporter win B may be derived during the chance mode, and the supporter win C may be derived during the chance mode.

Here, in this embodiment, the support hit variation pattern selected when the result is "support hit" is the same as the variation pattern in which SP reach occurs among the variation patterns selected when the result is "big hit" or "loss". That is, SP reach occurs in the support winning game. In addition, in the present embodiment, when the result is a special figure variation display game other than "support hit" and the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game is a variation pattern in which SP reach occurs, special effects such as battle effects (described later) can be executed even during execution of the special figure variation display game.
In addition, special effects such as battle effects (described later) may be executable even during execution of a special figure variation display game in which SP reach does not occur. In addition, special effects such as battle effects (described later) may be dedicated to the support winning game, and may not be executed during the execution of the special figure fluctuation display game in which the result is "big hit" or "lost".

Further, the support winning variation pattern may be the same as the variation pattern in which the SP reach does not occur among the variation patterns selected when the result is a ``big hit'' or ``loss'', or may be a variation pattern dedicated to the supporting winning game.
For example, when the chance mode is not on, a variation pattern dedicated to the support winning game is selected, and when the chance mode is on, a variation pattern also used for special figure variation display games other than the support winning game (for example, a variation pattern in which SP reach occurs among the variation patterns selected when the result is "big hit" or "loss") may be selected, and the dedicated variation pattern may be a variation pattern in which a longer variation time is set than the combination variation pattern. Thus, the variable time of the support winning game executed when the chance mode is not on becomes longer than the variable time of the support winning game executed when the chance mode is on, so that mode selection, performance explanation, etc. relating to the chance mode (third specific game state ST13) can be surely executed during the variable time of the support winning game executed when the chance mode is not on, and the connection with the performance (fanfare performance, etc.) executed at the start of the chance mode can be provided.

Alternatively, the stop display time of the support winning game may be longer than the stop display time of the special figure variation display game other than the support winning game. As a result, it is possible to surely execute mode selection, performance explanation, etc. relating to the chance mode during the stop display time of the support winning game, so that it is possible to have a connection with the performance (fanfare performance, etc.) executed at the start of the chance mode.

Alternatively, a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time may be selected as the variation pattern of the first special figure variation display game after shifting to the chance mode. Specifically, for example, when the result of the first special figure variation display game after shifting to the chance mode is "loss", as the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game, a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time selected when the result is "loss", or a variation pattern dedicated to the first special figure variation display game after shifting to the chance mode may be selected. As a result, when the chance mode is started, it is possible to reliably execute mode selection, effect explanation, and the like related to the chance mode. In addition, this makes it possible to accumulate the second starting memory before the game is switched to the chance mode and the first special figure variation display game ends. Since the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine that executes the special figure 2 variation display game with priority over the special figure 1 variation display game, by generating the second start memory before the first special figure variation display game ends in the chance mode, it is possible to execute the main variation (special figure 2 variation display game) after the first special figure variation display game, and the game can be progressed so as to be advantageous to the player.

The control of the gaming machine that performs such games will be described below. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control processing by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly consists of main processing shown in FIGS. 12 and 13 and timer interrupt processing shown in FIG.

[Main processing]
First, the main processing will be explained. Main processing is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, first, a process of prohibiting interrupts (step X1) is performed, and then a stack pointer setting process (step X2) of setting a stack pointer, which is the top address of an area for saving values such as registers when an interrupt occurs, is performed. Next, register bank 0 is designated (step X3), and the upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step X4). In the case of this embodiment, the range of RAM addresses is 0000h to 01FFh, 00h or 01h is taken as the higher order, and 00h at the beginning is set in step X4. Next, a firing stop signal is output and the firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state (step X5). The launch permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 is outputting a launch stop signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited.

Thereafter, the states of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 152 are read (step X6), and processing for setting the power-on delay timer (step X7) is performed. In the process of step X7, by setting a predetermined initial value, a standby time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for the program of the subordinate control means (e.g., payout control device 200 or effect control device 300) to perform various controls according to instructions from the game control device 100 forming the main control means is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, if the game control device 100 starts up first and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the performance control device 300) starts up, it is possible to avoid the command being missed by the slave control device. That is, the game control device 100 serves as standby means for setting a predetermined waiting time for delaying activation of the main control means (game control device 100) and waiting for activation of the subordinate control devices (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) when power is turned on.

In addition, the power-on delay timer clocks time using a storage area that is not subject to RAM validity determination (checksum calculation) (RAM area not subject to validity determination, registers, or the like). As a result, when calculating check data such as the checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude some of the RAM areas for calculation.

After performing processing (step X7) for setting a power-on delay timer, it is determined whether or not power failure occurs (step X8), and if power failure occurs (step X8; Y), it waits for the power supply of the game machine to be cut off.
Specifically, in step X8, for example, the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read through the port and data bus, and the number of times (for example, two times) is set to be checked, and it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. Then, if the power failure monitoring signal is on, it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal continues to be on for the set number of checks. If the on state of the power failure monitoring signal has not continued for the number of checks, the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. Further, when the power failure monitoring signal continues to be on for the number of checks, it is determined that a power failure has occurred. The same applies to steps X34 and X54, which will be described later. In this way, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal continues to be received for a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a power failure due to noise or the like, and to appropriately deal with problems that occur when the power is turned on.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of power failure during a predetermined waiting time. As a result, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which constitutes the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with troubles at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the standby time is over, and since the memory contents at the time of the previous power shutdown are retained, there is no need to perform backup processing, etc. when a power failure occurs here. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, there is no need to back up the RAM, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, if no power failure has occurred (step X8; N), the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step X9), and it is determined whether the timer value is 0 (step X10). If the timer value is not 0 (step X10; N), that is, if the standby time has not expired, the process returns to the process of determining whether a power failure has occurred (step X8). If the timer value is 0 (step X10; Y), that is, if the waiting time has expired, access to a readable and writable RWM (read/write memory) such as RAM or EEPROM is permitted (step X11), and off data is output to all output ports (set to a state of no output) (step X12).

Next, a serial port (a port pre-installed in the game microcomputer 111, in this embodiment, used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200) is set (step X13), and a process (step X14) of starting a CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the game microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed. Incidentally, the CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111 . The clock generator includes a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a CTC circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) for the CPU 111A based on the frequency-divided signal and a signal CTC that triggers the random number update to be supplied to the random number generating circuit.
Next, a RAM abnormality flag is set (step X15). Here, regardless of whether or not there is an abnormality in the RAM, on the premise that there is an abnormality in the RAM, a RAM abnormality flag is temporarily set in a predetermined register.

Next, it is determined whether the value of power failure inspection area 1 in RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (e.g., 5Ah) (step X16), and if normal (step X16; Y), it is determined whether the value of power failure inspection area 2 in RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (e.g., A5h) (step X17). If the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step X17; Y), a checksum calculation process (step X18) is performed to calculate the checksum of the predetermined area in the RWM, and it is determined whether the calculated checksum matches the checksum at the time of power failure (step X19). If the checksums match (step X19; Y), since there is no abnormality in the RAM, the RAM abnormality flag is cleared (step X20), and the process proceeds to step X21.

If it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step X16; N or step X17; N), or if it is determined that the checksums do not match (step X19; N), it is determined whether both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are on based on the state read in step X6 (step X21). If at least one of the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (step X21; N), it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X22). When the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X22; Y), since there is abnormality in the RAM, a main abnormality error notification command for notifying that the game control device 100 is abnormal is transmitted to the performance control board (performance control device 300) (step X24).

On the other hand, if the RAM abnormality flag is not set (step X22; N), it is determined whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set (step X23). Then, when the probability setting changing flag is set (step X23; Y), a command for main abnormality error notification is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X24). The probability setting flag that is set here is the probability setting flag that was set before the power failure occurred. That is, when the game machine is powered off and restarted while the probability set value is being changed, the operation of the game control device 100 is stopped, so the process of step X24 is performed.
Next, the 7-segment display data when the game is stopped is output to the fifth driver 138e through the second output port 134 (step X25). After that, the ON data of the security signal is output and the OFF data of the signal other than the security signal is output (step X26), and the process returns to step X25.

If both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are on (step X21; Y), it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X27). If the RAM abnormality flag is not set (step X27; N), the probability setting changing flag is set (step X29). This shifts to the probability setting value change mode. After that, a command during probability setting change is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step X30), and the process proceeds to step X31. The performance control device 300 notifies that the probability set value is being changed by the display of the display device 41, the light emission of the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, the operation of the board performance device 44, the output of the sound by the speakers 19a and 19b, etc., based on the reception of the command for changing the probability setting.
On the other hand, when the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X27; Y), the process of clearing the probability set value (step X28) is performed. As a result, 0 is set in the probability setting value area in the RWM, and the probability setting value becomes "setting 1". After that, the processes of steps X29 and X30 are performed, and the process proceeds to step X31.

If at least one of the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (step X21; N) and neither the RAM abnormality flag nor the probability setting changing flag is set (step X22; N and step X23; N), it is determined whether the setting key switch 152 is on based on the state read in step X6 (step X35). If the setting key switch 152 is not on (step X35; N), it is determined whether the RAM initialization switch 112 is on based on the state read in step X6 (step X43).

If it is determined that the RAM initialization switch 112 is not on (step X43; N), i.e., if both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are off, the process proceeds to step X41 to carry out the processing for normal recovery from power failure.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (step X43; Y), the process proceeds to step X44 to perform initialization. That is, the RAM initialization switch 112 constitutes an initialization operation section that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 constitutes an initialization means for initializing data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation section.

If the setting key switch 152 is on (step X35; Y), the probability setting checking flag is set (step X36). This shifts to the probability set value confirmation mode. After that, a command during probability setting confirmation is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step X37). The performance control device 300 notifies that the probability setting value is being confirmed by the display of the display device 41, the light emission of the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, the operation of the board performance device 44, the output of the sound from the speakers 19a and 19b, etc., based on the reception of the command during confirmation of the probability setting.

Then, in order to guarantee the output of the security signal for 50 ms or more, a value corresponding to 128 ms is saved in the security signal control timer area (step X31). The security signal is output in the probability setting change/confirmation process (step X122) of the timer interrupt process when the probability set value change mode or the probability set value confirmation mode is selected, and is output in the external information edit process (step X120) of the timer interrupt process otherwise. Therefore, when the probability set value change mode or the probability set value confirmation mode ends in less than 128 milliseconds, the security signal is continuously output by the external information editing process (step X120) of the timer interrupt process. That is, even if the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode ends in less than 128 msec, the security signal is output for 128 msec after shifting to the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode. Note that the value saved in the security signal control timer area in step X31 is not limited to the value corresponding to 128 milliseconds. However, since it is necessary to output the security signal for at least 50 ms after shifting to the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode, it is necessary to save the value corresponding to 50 ms or more.

Then, the interrupt is permitted (step X32), and it is determined whether the setting key switch 152 is off (step X33). At step X33, determination is not based on the state read at step X6 (power-on state), but based on the state (current state) read at the input process (step X103) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14). If it is determined in step X33 that the setting key switch 152 is in the OFF state, the probability set value is determined.
When the setting key switch 152 is not in the OFF state (step X33; N), it is determined whether a power failure has occurred (step X34), and when the power failure has not occurred (step X34; N), the process returns to step X33, and when the power failure has occurred (step X34; Y), the process proceeds to step X55. When it is determined in step X34 that a power failure occurs while the probability setting changing flag is set, it is determined that the probability setting changing flag is set in step X23 of the main processing (FIGS. 12 and 13) after recovery from the power failure.

On the other hand, if the setting key switch 152 is in the OFF state (step X33; Y), a process of prohibiting interruption (step X38) is performed. A timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is performed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 ms) from the time when the process for enabling the interrupt (step X32) to the time when the process for disabling the interrupt (steps X38, X55) is performed. In the timer interrupt process, a probability setting change/confirmation process (step X122), which is a process related to the probability setting value, is performed. In other words, the main process is on standby until the change or confirmation of the probability set value is completed (or until a power failure occurs).
Then, a command for ending notification is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X39). In the performance control device 300, based on the reception of the notification end command, the notification being executed (notification indicating that the probability set value is being changed or notification that the probability set value is being confirmed) is terminated.

Next, it is determined whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set (step X40), and if the probability setting changing flag is not set (step X40; N), i.e., if the probability setting checking flag is set, a power failure recovery process (step X41) is performed to save the initial values at the time of power failure recovery in the areas to be initialized (for example, the power failure inspection area, the checksum area, and the area related to the error monitoring). The probability setting confirming flag is cleared at this step X41.
After that, the power failure recovery command corresponding to the special game processing number is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step X42), and the process proceeds to step X47. In the case of this embodiment, in step X42, a plurality of commands such as model designation command, probability setting information command, special figure 1 reservation number command, special figure 2 reservation number command, probability information command, effect number information command, screen designation command etc. are transmitted. As a command for designating the screen, when the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both in the normal processing to be described later, i.e., when the special figure variation display game is neither being executed nor in the special game state, the command of the customer waiting demo screen is transmitted, and in the other cases, the command of the restoration screen is transmitted. Also, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, a high-probability number-of-times information command or the like is also transmitted.

On the other hand, if the probability setting changing flag is set (step X40; Y), the RAM area other than the probability setting value is cleared to 0 (step X44). In step X44, the RAM area for the probability setting value (work area (1-byte area of the probability setting value)) and the RAM area (work area and stack area) for performance display (display of base value and character ratio) are not cleared, and the RAM area for game control (work area and stack area) is cleared to 0. Therefore, the probability setting changing flag is cleared at this step X44. It should be noted that in step X44, the stack area and the unused area may or may not be cleared.

Then, the initial values at the time of RAM initialization are saved in the area to be initialized (step X45). The area to be initialized here is an area related to setting of the customer waiting demonstration area and the production mode. And, the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step X46). In the case of this embodiment, in step X46, a plurality of commands such as a model designation command, a probability setting information command, a special figure 1 reservation number command, a special figure 2 reservation number command, a probability information command, a performance number information command, and a command for RAM initialization (a command for displaying a customer waiting demonstration screen and notifying RAM initialization with light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds)) is transmitted. Also, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, a support number information command, which is information on the number of executions of the special figure variation display game with the effect number information command and general electric support, etc. is also transmitted.

Next, a process for starting and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step X47). Specifically, the CPU 111A sets a code (specified value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Also, the bit permutation pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is set. The bit permutation pattern is a pattern that determines how to permute the bit arrangement of the extracted random number (arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and store it as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after bit transposition in the lower row). By replacing the bits of the random number according to this bit permutation pattern, it is possible to break the regularity of the random number and improve the secrecy of the random number. The bit transposition pattern may be a single fixed pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of prepared patterns. In addition, the user may be able to arbitrarily set it.

After that, the value of a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of power-on is extracted, and the corresponding various initial value random numbers (in the case of this embodiment, the special symbol pattern random number that determines the winning symbol of the special symbol, the random number (random number) that determines the winning of the general symbol) are saved in a predetermined area of the RWM as the initial value (start value) (step X48), and interrupts are permitted (step X49). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in this embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes each time power is turned on. By using this value as the initial value (start value) of various initial random numbers, the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, making it difficult for the player to acquire illegal random numbers.

Subsequently, an initial value random number update process (step X50) is performed to update the values of various initial value random numbers to break the regularity of the random numbers. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the jackpot random number, the special symbol random number, and the winning random number are configured to be generated using random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock with a speed equal to or higher than the operating clock of the CPU, and the special symbol random number and the hit random number are the processing unit of the program. In addition, in the special pattern random number and the hit random number, the so-called "initial value change method" is adopted to change the start value using each initial value random number (generated by software) each time the random number goes around. Each of the random numbers may be updated by a counter with +1 or -1, or may be updated by a random method in which all the values within the range appear separately without duplication until one cycle is completed. That is, the jackpot random numbers are random numbers updated only by hardware, and the special symbol random numbers and winning random numbers are random numbers updated by hardware and software.
In this embodiment, since there is no random number (hitting pattern random number) for determining the winning pattern of the general pattern, there is only one type of winning pattern of the general pattern, but a winning pattern random number may be provided to select the winning pattern of the general pattern from among a plurality of types.

After the initial value random number updating process of step X50, the interrupt prohibiting process (step X51) is performed, and the performance display editing process (step X52) is performed. Then, after performing processing for permitting interruption (step X53), it is determined whether power failure has occurred (step X54), and if power failure has not occurred (step X54; N), the process returns to initial value random number update processing (step X50). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number updating process, performance display editing process, and power failure monitoring are repeatedly performed. By permitting the interrupt (step X49) before the initial value random number update processing (step X50), when the timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update processing, the interrupt processing is preferentially executed, and it is possible to avoid pressure on the interrupt processing due to the timer interrupt waiting for the initial value random number update processing.

Note that the initial value random number updating process in step X50 can be performed not only in the main process but also in the timer interrupt process. If such a method is adopted, in order to avoid executing the initial value random number update process in both processes, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to prohibit interrupts and then update to cancel the interrupt. There is no problem even if the interrupt is released before the value random number update process, which has the advantage of simplifying the main process.

On the other hand, if a power failure has occurred (step X54; Y), a process of temporarily prohibiting interrupts (step X55) and a process of outputting OFF data to all output ports (step X56) are performed.
After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step X57), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step X58). Further, after performing a checksum calculation process (step X59) for calculating a checksum when the power supply of the RWM is cut off and a process (step X60) for saving the calculated checksum, a process (step X61) for prohibiting access to the RWM is performed, and then the game machine waits for the power supply to be cut off. Thus, by saving the check data in the blackout inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is cut off, it is possible to judge whether or not the information stored in the RWM before the power cutoff is correctly backed up when the power is turned on again.

From the above, in a game machine comprising main control means (game control device 100) that controls the game in an integrated manner and subordinate control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) that performs various controls according to instructions from the main control means, the main control means delays the activation of the main control means and waits for the activation of the subordinate control device when the power is turned on. Power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of power failure is provided.
In addition, a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) determines that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received over a predetermined period.

In addition, the main control means (game control device 100) has a RAM 111C capable of storing data, an initialization operation section (RAM initialization switch 112) that can be operated from the outside, and an initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing data stored in the RAM 111C based on the operation of the initialization operation section.
Also, the main control means (game control device 100) permits access to the RAM 111C after the waiting time has elapsed.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. Timer interrupt processing is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111A. That is, it is an interrupt routine that is started at predetermined intervals. When a timer interrupt occurs in the game microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled, and the timer interrupt process of FIG. 14 is started.

When timer interrupt processing is started, first, register bank 1 is designated (step X101). By switching to register bank 1, it is equivalent to performing register save processing to move the value held in a predetermined register (for example, a register used in main processing) to RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step X102). In step X102, the same processing as step X4 in the main processing is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, an input process (step X103) for reading inputs and signals from various sensors and switches, that is, reading the state of each input port is performed.

Next, it is determined whether the probability setting changing flag or the probability setting confirming flag is set (step X104), and if the probability setting changing flag or the probability setting confirming flag is set (step X104; Y), the probability setting changing/confirming process (step X122) is performed, and the timer interrupt process ends.
On the other hand, when both the probability setting changing flag and the probability setting confirming flag are not set (step X104; N), output processing (step X105) for controlling the driving of actuators such as solenoids (large winning opening solenoids 38b, 39b, lever solenoid 38f, general electric solenoid 37c) and the like is performed based on the output data set in various processes. When a firing stop signal is output in step X5 in the main processing, a firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permission state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, signal processing and the like are not performed. In addition, the launch permission signal is a first signal indicating the state of firing permission seen from the game control device, and a second signal (fire permission signal) indicating the state of firing permission seen from the payout control device is also generated in the payout control device and output to the firing control device. In other words, two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device, and when both are permitted to launch, the game ball can be launched.

Next, payout command transmission processing (step X106), random number update processing 1 (step X107), and random number update processing 2 (step X108) for outputting commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200 are performed. In the random number update process 1 (step X107), the initial values (start values) of the special symbol random numbers and hit random numbers that are the targets of the initial value random number update process are updated. After that, a winning port switch/state monitoring process (step X109) is performed to monitor whether or not there is a normal signal input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, and the big winning port switches 38a and 39a, set the prize balls, open the front frame and glass frame, and monitor errors such as illegal winning of the normal variable winning device 37 and the special variable winning devices 38 and 39.

Next, it is determined whether abnormal discharge is occurring (step X110). Abnormal discharge means that the number of game balls discharged from the first special variable winning device 38 (the number of game balls detected by the specific area switch 38d and the remaining ball discharge port switch 38e) exceeds the number of game balls flowing into the first special variable winning device 38 (the number of game balls detected by the big winning port switch 38a). Note that an abnormal discharge flag is set when abnormal discharge is occurring. Then, when abnormal discharge is occurring (step X110; Y), the process proceeds to step X116. That is, the game is prevented from progressing.

On the other hand, when abnormal discharge is not occurring (step X110; N), a special figure game process (step X112) for performing processing relating to a special figure variation display game, a normal figure game processing (step X114) for performing processing relating to a normal figure variation display game, and a segment LED editing process (step X115) for driving the segment LED provided in the gaming machine 10 and displaying various information related to the display of the special figure variation display game and the game so as to display desired content.

Then, magnet fraud monitoring processing (step X116) for checking the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61 to determine whether there is an abnormality, board radio fraud monitoring processing (step X117) for checking the detection signal from the board radio wave sensor 62 and determining whether there is an abnormality, vibration fraud monitoring processing (step X118) for checking the detection signal from the vibration sensor 65 and determining whether there is an abnormality, and abnormal discharge monitoring processing (step X119) for determining whether abnormal discharge has occurred. Furthermore, external information editing processing (step X120) for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer, and performance display monitor control processing (step X121) for controlling the performance display device 153 are performed, and the timer interrupt processing ends.

Here, in the present embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of enabling interrupts) and the process of restoring the designation of the register bank (that is, the process of designating register bank 0) are automatically performed at the time of interrupt return (at the end of timer interrupt processing). It should be noted that depending on the CPU used, there are game machines that require a command to execute a process for restoring the interrupt disabled state or a process for restoring the designation of the register bank.

[Special game processing]
Next, the details of the special figure game process (step X112) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the special figure game processing, monitoring of the input of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a, control of the entire processing relating to the special figure variation display game, and setting of the display of the special figure are performed.

As shown in FIG. 15, in the special game process, first, a start switch monitoring process (step A1) for monitoring the winning of the start 1 switch 36a and the start 2 switch 37a is performed. In the starting opening switch monitoring process, when a game ball wins in a starting winning opening 36 or a normal variable winning device 37 forming a second starting winning opening, various random numbers (such as a jackpot random number) are extracted, and game result preliminary judgment is performed to determine in advance the game result based on the winning at a stage before the start of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the winning.

Next, a special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In this big winning hole switch monitoring process, the game ball detection is monitored by the upper big winning hole switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38, and the game ball detection by the lower big winning hole switch 39a provided in the second special variable winning device 39 is monitored. Then, specific area switch monitoring processing for monitoring the detection of game balls in the specific area 38h is performed (step A3).

Next, if the special game processing timer is not "0", it is updated by -1 (step A4). In addition, the minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the special game processing timer is "0" (step A5). When the value of the special game processing timer is "0" (step A5; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already timed up, a special game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the processing corresponding to the special game processing number is set in a register (step A6), and the branch destination address of the processing corresponding to the special game processing number is obtained using the table (step A7). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special game processing number (step A8).

In step A8, when the special figure game processing number is "0", the start of variation of the special figure variation display game is monitored, and the special figure normal processing (step A9) for setting the variation start of the special figure variation display game, setting the performance, setting information necessary for performing processing during special figure variation, etc. is performed.
At step A8, if the special figure game processing number is "1", special figure fluctuation processing (step A10) for setting the special figure stop display time, setting information necessary for performing special figure display processing, etc. is performed.

At step A8, when the special figure game processing number is '2', if the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, special figure display processing (step A11) is performed for setting a fanfare command according to the kind of big win, setting a fanfare time according to the big prize winning opening pattern of each big win, setting information necessary for fanfare/interval processing, etc.

In step A8, when the special game processing number is ``3'', fanfare/interval processing (step A12) for setting the opening time of the big winning opening, updating the number of times of opening, setting information necessary for performing the processing during opening the big winning opening, etc. is performed.
At step A8, when the special game processing number is '4', if the big winning round is not the final round, an interval command is set, while if it is the final round, a process of setting an ending command, and a big winning hole open process (step A13) for setting information necessary for performing the big winning hole remaining ball processing, etc. are performed.

At step A8, when the special game processing number is '5', if the big winning round is the final round, processing for setting the time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged, processing for setting information necessary for finishing the big winning opening processing (step A14) is carried out.
At step A8, if the special figure game process number is "6", a jackpot end process (step A15) for setting information necessary for carrying out the special figure normal process is performed.

At step A8, when the special game processing number is '7', small win fanfare middle processing (step A16) for setting the opening time/opening pattern of the big winning hole when the small win occurs, fanfare command setting, setting of information necessary for executing the small winning medium processing, etc. is carried out.
At step A8, if the special game process number is "8", small hit middle processing (step A17) for setting the information necessary for setting the ending command and performing small hit remaining ball processing is performed.
In step A8, when the special game processing number is '9', small winning remaining ball processing (step A18) for setting the time required for discharging the remaining balls that have won the prize in the big winning opening during the small winning medium processing and setting information necessary for performing the small winning end processing is performed.
At step A8, if the special figure game processing number is "10", small winning end processing (step A19) for setting information necessary for carrying out special figure normal processing, etc. is performed.

After that, after preparing the table for controlling the variation of the special figure 1 indicator 51 (step A20), the symbol variation control process (step A21) relating to the control of the special symbol variation by the special figure 1 indicator 51 is performed. And, after preparing the table for controlling the variation of the special figure 2 indicator 52 (step A22), the symbol variation control process (step A23) relating to the control of the special symbol variation by the special figure 2 indicator 52 is performed. Thereafter, a lever solenoid control process (step A24) for controlling the operation of the lever solenoid 38f is performed, and the special figure game process is terminated. On the other hand, at step A5, if the value of the special game processing timer is not "0" (step A5; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the process proceeds to step A20 and the subsequent processes are performed.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the startup switch monitoring process (step A1) in the special game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 16, in the starting opening switch monitoring process, first, a first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) winning monitoring table is prepared (step A101), a hard random number acquisition process (step A102) is performed, and it is determined whether or not there is a winning in the first starting opening (step A103).
At step A103, when it is determined that there is no winning to the first start opening (step A103; N), the process proceeds to step A109 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, in step A103, when it is determined that there is a winning prize to the first start port (step A103; Y), it is determined whether or not it is during special figure time saving (during general electricity support) (step A104).

At step A104, when it is determined that it is not in the special figure time saving (step A104; N), the process proceeds to step A107 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, in step A104, when it is determined that it is in the special figure time saving (step A104; Y), a right hitting instruction notification command is prepared (step A105), and production command setting processing (step A106) for transmitting the command to the production control device 300 is performed. That is, if it is a time-saving state, regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game, a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A105), and effect command setting processing (step A106) is performed. In the case of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a prize is not won unless the first starting port (starting prize port 36) is hit to the left, and a prize is not won to the normal variable prize winning device 37 unless the ball is hit to the right. Therefore, the time-saving state is a game state in which right-handed hitting is more advantageous than left-handed hitting, but when a prize is won in the first starting port during the time-saving state (that is, when left-handed hitting is made during the time-saving state), a right-handed instruction notification command is transmitted to the performance control device 300, and the performance control device 300 performs notification (warning) instructing right-handed hitting.
Next, after preparing a table for setting information on hold by the first starting port (starting winning port 36) (step A107), special figure starting port switch common processing (step A108) is performed.

Next, a winning monitoring table for the second starting port (normal variable winning device 37) is prepared (step A109), hardware random number acquisition processing (step A110) is performed, and it is determined whether or not there is a winning for the second starting port (step A111).
When it is determined in step A111 that there is no winning to the second start opening (step A111; N), the start opening switch monitoring process is terminated.
On the other hand, in step A111, when it is determined that there is a prize to the second starting port (step A111; Y), the normal electric accessory (normal variable winning device 37) is in operation, that is, it is determined whether the normal variable winning device 37 is in an open state in which the game ball can win (step A112). process. On the other hand, in step A112, when it is determined that the normal electric accessory is not in operation (step A112; N), it is determined whether or not normal electric fraud is occurring (step A113).

In determining whether or not fraud is occurring, it is determined that fraud is occurring when the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variable prize winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations (for example, 5). The normal variable winning device 37 cannot win a game ball when it is closed, and can win a game ball only when it is open. Therefore, if a game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some kind of abnormality or dishonesty has occurred, and if there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of fraudulent wins. Then, when the number of fraudulent prizes thus counted is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (upper limit value) for determination of fraud occurrence, it is determined that fraud is occurring.

In step A113, when it is determined that the general electric fraud is not occurring (step A113; N), after preparing a table for setting information on suspension by the second start port (normal fluctuation winning device 37) (step A114), special figure start port switch common processing (step A115) is performed, and the start port switch monitoring process is completed. Further, when it is determined in step A113 that the electric power irregularity is occurring (step A113; Y), the starting port switch monitoring process is ended. That is, the second starting memory is prevented from being generated any more.

[Hard random number acquisition process]
FIG. 17 shows the hardware random number acquisition process (steps A102 and A110) in the above-described starting port switch monitoring process.
In this hardware random number acquisition process, first, out of the first starting opening (first starting winning opening 36) and the second starting opening (ordinary variable winning device 37), no-win information for the starting opening to be monitored is set (step A121), and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the starting opening switch to be monitored, out of the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a (step A122).
If there is no input to the starter switch to be monitored (step A122; N), the hardware random number acquisition process is terminated. On the other hand, if there is an input to the starter switch to be monitored (step A122; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step A123), and it is determined whether or not there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124).

If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; N), that is, if no random number has been extracted, the hard random number acquisition process is terminated.
If there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; Y), the extracted jackpot random number is loaded into the monitored hard random number latch register and prepared (step A125). Then, among the first starting opening (first starting winning opening 36) and the second starting opening (ordinary variable winning apparatus 37), the winning information of the starting opening to be monitored is set (step A126), and the hard random number acquisition process ends.

[Common process for special figure start switch]
Next, the details of the special figure starting opening switch common processing (steps A108 and A115) in the starting opening switch monitoring processing described above will be described. Special figure starting mouth switch common processing, when there is an input of the starting mouth 1 switch 36a and the starting mouth 2 switch 37a, is a process that is performed in common for each input.

As shown in FIG. 18, in the special figure starting opening switch common processing, first, of the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a, information regarding the number of winnings to the starting opening switch to be monitored is loaded to the external management device of the game machine 10. The starting opening signal output count is loaded (step A131), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step A132), and it is determined whether the output count overflows (step A133). If the output count does not overflow (step A133; N), the updated value is saved in the RWM starting signal output count area (step A134), and the process proceeds to step A135. On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (step A133; Y), the process proceeds to step A135. In this embodiment, a value from "0" to "255" can be stored in the starting signal output count area. Then, when the loaded value is "255", the updated value becomes "0" by +1 update, and it is determined that the number of outputs overflows.

Next, it is determined whether the update target special figure holding (starting memory) number corresponding to the monitoring target starting port switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a is less than the upper limit value (step A135). When the special figure reservation number to be updated is not less than the upper limit (step A135; N), the special figure start opening switch common processing is terminated.

Also, if the number of special figures reserved to be updated is less than the upper limit (step A135; Y), the number of special figures reserved to be updated (the number of special figures 1 reserved or the number of special figures 2 reserved) is updated by +1 (step A136), and the target starting entrance winning flag is saved (step A137). Subsequently, the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the start switch to be monitored and the special figure reservation number is calculated (step A138), and the jackpot random number prepared at step A125 of the hardware random number acquisition process is saved in the RWM jackpot random number storage area (step A139).

Next, the special symbol random number of the starting switch to be monitored is extracted, prepared (step A140), and saved in the special symbol random number storage area of RWM (step A141).
Next, the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are saved in the corresponding RWM variation pattern random number storage area (step A145), and the special figure reservation information determination process (step A146) is performed.
Next, prepare a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the starting opening switch to be monitored and the special figure reservation number (step A147), perform the effect command setting process (step A148), and end the special figure starting opening switch common process.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111C) serves as start storage means for extracting a predetermined random number based on the detection of a game ball in the start area of the start prize opening 36 or the normal variable prize winning device 37, and storing a predetermined number up to the upper limit as a start memory that is the right to execute the variable display game. In addition, the start memory means (game control device 100) stores various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the first start winning opening (start winning opening 36) as a first starting memory up to a predetermined number as the upper limit, and stores various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting winning opening (normal variable winning device 37) as the second starting memory up to the predetermined number.

[Special Figure Reservation Information Judgment Process]
Next, the details of the special figure reservation information determination process (step A146) in the above-described starting opening switch common process will be described. The special figure reservation information determination process is a look-ahead process that determines the result related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

As shown in FIG. 19, first, a big-hit determination process (step A154) is performed to determine whether or not the game is a big-hit according to whether or not the big-hit random number matches the big-hit determination value. Then, when the determination result is a big hit (step A155; Y), a big hit special symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starting port switch is set (step A156), stop symbol information corresponding to the special symbol random number prepared in step A140 of the special symbol starting port switch common processing is acquired (step A157), and the process proceeds to step A168.

On the other hand, if the determination result is not a big hit (step A155; N), small hit determination processing (step A159) is performed to determine whether or not the big hit random value matches the small hit determination value. Then, when the determination result is a small hit (step A160; Y), a special symbol random number check table for a small hit is set (step A161), the stop symbol information corresponding to the special symbol random number prepared in step A140 of the special symbol starting port switch common processing is acquired (step A162), and the process proceeds to step A168.

On the other hand, if the determination result is not a small hit (step A160; N), a support hit determination process (step A163) is performed to determine whether or not the big hit random value matches the support hit determination value. Then, if the determination result is not a support hit (step A164; N), stop symbol information of losing is set (step A167), and the process proceeds to step A168.
Also, when the determination result is a support hit (step A164; Y), a special symbol random number check table for support hit is set (step A165), the stop symbol information corresponding to the special symbol random number prepared at step A140 of the special figure start port switch common processing is acquired (step A166), and the process proceeds to step A168.

Then, a look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the target starting port switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step A168), and effect command setting processing is performed (step A169). Next, a special figure information setting process (step A170) for setting special figure information, which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern, is performed, and a variation pattern setting process for setting the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is performed (step A171).
After that, prepare a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number indicating the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game (step A172), perform the production command setting process (step A173), and end the special figure reservation information determination process. In addition, the special figure information setting process in step A170 and the variation pattern setting process in step A171 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure normal process.

By the above processing, a look-ahead pattern command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the starting memory of the look-ahead target and a look-ahead variation pattern command including information of the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory are prepared and transmitted to the effect control device 300. As a result, it is possible to inform the performance control device 300 of the determination result (read-ahead result) of the result-related information (whether it is a big hit or the type of variation pattern) corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory, and particularly by changing the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41, etc., so that the player can be notified of the result-related information before the start timing of the special figure variation display game.

That is, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as a start memory in the start prize memory means (game control device 100) before executing the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, determines whether or not a special result will be obtained). The timing for determining the random number stored corresponding to the starting memory in advance is not limited to the time when the starting memory is generated, but may be any time before the variable display game based on the starting memory is performed.

[Special normal processing]
Next, details of the special figure normal processing (step A9) in the special figure game processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 20, in the special figure normal processing, first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 reservation number (second start memory number) is "0" (step A301). When it is determined that the special figure 2 reservation number is "0" (step A301; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 reservation number (first start memory number) is "0" (step A305). Then, when it is determined that the number of reserved special figures 1 is "0" (step A305; Y), it is determined whether the customer waiting demonstration has been started (step A309), and when the customer waiting demonstration has not been started (step A309; N), the customer waiting demonstration flag is set in the customer waiting demonstration flag area (step A310).

Subsequently, a customer waiting demonstration command is prepared (step A311), and effect command setting processing (step A312) is performed. Next, "0" relating to special figure normal processing is set as the processing number (step A313), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A314). Then, the fluctuating design determination flag area is cleared (step A315), the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A316), and the special symbol normal processing is terminated. That is, when the starting condition is not established although the special figure fluctuation display game can be started, a customer waiting demonstration command forming standby information is transmitted to the effect control device 300.例文帳に追加
On the other hand, at step A309, if the customer waiting demonstration has already started (step A309; Y), the process proceeds to step A313 without performing steps A310 to A312.

Also, in step A301, if the special figure 2 reservation number is not "0" (step A301; N), prepare a decorative special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number (step A302). Then, effect command setting processing (step A303) is performed, special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step A304) is performed, and special figure normal processing is ended.
Also, in step A305, if the special figure 1 reservation number is not "0" (step A305; N), prepare a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation number (step A306). Then, effect command setting processing (step A307) is performed, special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step A308) is performed, and special figure normal processing is ended.

In this way, by checking the special figure 2 reservation number before checking the special figure 1 reservation number, if the special figure 2 reservation number is not "0", special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step A304) will be executed. That is, the second special figure variation display game is preferentially executed over the first special figure variation display game. In other words, the game control device 100 serves as priority control means for executing the variation display game based on the second start memory preferentially over the variation display game based on the first start memory when the second start memory means (game control device 100) has the second start memory.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation start process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step A308) in the special figure normal processing described above will be described. The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure fluctuation display game. As shown in FIG. 21(a), first, a special figure 1 variation flag indicating the type of the special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the variation pattern determination area (step A321), deviation information and big hit information are set in the big hit flag 1 for determining whether the first special figure variation display game is a big hit, and deviation information and small hit information are set in the small hit flag for determining whether the first special figure variation display game is a small hit or not. A jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A322) is performed.

Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A323) related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure information setting process (step A324) for setting the special figure information which is the parameter for setting the variation pattern is performed, and the special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the first special figure variation display game is set (step A325). After that, a variation pattern setting process (step A326) for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the first special figure variation display game is performed, and a variation start information setting process (step A327) for setting variation start information for the first special figure variation display game is performed.

Next, set "1" for special figure fluctuation processing as the processing number (step A328), and save the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (step A329).
Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A330), and a signal relating to the start of variation of special symbol 1 (for example, a special symbol 1 varying signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A331). After that, save the fluctuating flag in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A332), and set the initial value (here 100 ms) of the blinking control timer (the blinking cycle timer of the special figure 1 indicator 51) in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area (step A333). Then, the initial value ("0" in this case) is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern number area (step A334), and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is ended.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step A304) in the above-mentioned special figure usual processing will be described. The special figure 2 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the same process as the special figure 1 fluctuation start process shown in FIG. 21 (a) is performed for the second start memory.

As shown in FIG. 21(b), first, the special figure 2 variation flag indicating the type of the special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the variation pattern determination area (step A341), and the deviation information and the big hit information are set to the big hit flag 2 for determining whether the second special figure variation display game is a big hit, and the deviation information and the small hit information are set to the small hit flag for determining whether the second special figure variation display game is a small hit. A jackpot flag 2 setting process (step A342) is performed.

Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A343) related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure information setting process (step A344) for setting the special figure information which is the parameter for setting the variation pattern is performed, and the special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the second special figure variation display game is set (step A345). Thereafter, a variation pattern setting process (step A346) for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the second special figure variation display game is performed, and a variation start information setting process (step A347) for setting variation start information for the second special figure variation display game is performed.

Next, set "1" for special figure fluctuation processing as the processing number (step A348), and save the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (step A349).
Then, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step A350), and a signal relating to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol 2 (for example, the signal during special symbol 2 fluctuation is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A351). After that, save the fluctuating flag in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A352), and set the initial value (here 100ms) of the blinking control timer (the blinking period timer of the special figure 2 indicator 52) in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area (step A353). Then, the initial value (here "0") is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern number area (step A354), and the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing is ended.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as special figure variation display game execution control means for executing the special figure variation display game based on the start memory stored in the start memory means. Further, the special figure variation display game execution control means executes the first special figure variation display game as the special figure variation display game based on the first start memory, and runs the second special figure variation display game as the special figure variation display game based on the second start memory.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
FIG. 22(a) shows the big hit flag 1 setting process (step A322) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process of the present embodiment.
In this big hit flag 1 setting process, first, deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area, the small hit flag 1 area, and the support hit flag 1 area (step A361). Next, a jackpot random number is loaded from the special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) of RWM and prepared (step A362), and the special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) is cleared to 0 (step A363). It should be noted that the reservation number 1 use is an area that stores information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory of which digestion order is the first (here, the first among the special figures 1).

After that, a big-hit determination process (step A364) is performed to determine whether or not the big-hit is a big-hit according to whether or not the obtained big-hit random number matches the big-hit determination value. When the determination result of the big win determination process (step A364) is a big win (step A365; Y), the big win information is overwritten and saved in the big win flag 1 area where the losing information is saved in step A361 (step A366), and the big win flag 1 setting process is completed. On the other hand, when the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A364) is not a big hit (step A365; N), a small hit determination process (step A367) is performed to determine whether or not it is a small hit according to whether the acquired big hit random number matches the small hit determination value.

Then, when the judgment result of the small hit determination process (step A367) is a small hit (step A368; Y), the small hit information is overwritten and saved in the small hit flag 1 area where the loss information is saved in step A361 (step A369), and the big hit flag 1 setting process is finished. On the other hand, if the determination result of the small hit determination process (step A367) is not a small hit (step A368; N), it is determined whether it is in a high probability state (step A370).

If it is in a high probability state (step A370; Y), the jackpot flag 1 setting process is terminated. In this case, the winning information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area, the small hit flag 1 area and the support hit flag 1 area. On the other hand, if it is not in a high probability state (step A370; N), a support hit determination process (step A371) is performed to determine whether or not the support hit is determined according to whether or not the acquired big hit random value matches the support hit determination value.

When the determination result of the support hit determination process (step A371) is a support hit (step A372; Y), the support hit information is overwritten and saved in the support hit flag 1 area where the loss information was saved in step A361 (step A373), and the big hit flag 1 setting process is completed. On the other hand, when the determination result of the support hit determination process (step A371) is not a support hit (step A372; N), the big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated. In this case, the loss information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area, the small hit flag 1 area and the support hit flag 1 area.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
FIG. 22(b) shows the big hit flag 2 setting process (step A342) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process of the present embodiment.
In this big hit flag 2 setting process, first, deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area, the small hit flag 2 area, and the support hit flag 2 area (step A381). Next, a jackpot random number is loaded from the special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) of RWM and prepared (step A382), and the special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) is cleared to 0 (step A383). It should be noted that the reservation number 1 use is an area that stores information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory of which digestion order is the first (here, the first among the special figures 2).

After that, a big-hit determination process (step A384) is performed to determine whether or not the big-hit is a big-hit according to whether or not the obtained big-hit random number matches the big-hit determination value. When the determination result of the big win determination process (step A384) is a big win (step A385; Y), the big win information is overwritten and saved in the big win flag 2 area where the loss information was saved in step A381 (step A386), and the big win flag 2 setting process is finished. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A384) is not a big hit (step A385; N), a small hit determination process (step A387) is performed to determine whether or not it is a small hit according to whether or not the acquired big hit random number matches the small hit determination value.

Then, when the judgment result of the small hit determination process (step A387) is a small hit (step A388; Y), the small hit flag 2 area in which the loss information was saved in step A381 is overwritten with the small hit information and saved (step A389), and the big hit flag 2 setting process is finished. On the other hand, if the determination result of the small hit determination process (step A387) is not a small hit (step A388; N), it is determined whether it is in a high probability state (step A390).

If it is in a high probability state (step A390; Y), the jackpot flag 1 setting process is terminated. In this case, the loss information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area, the small hit flag 1 area and the support hit flag 1 area. On the other hand, if it is not in a high probability state (step A390; N), a support hit determination process (step A391) that determines whether or not the support hit is determined according to whether or not the acquired big hit random value matches the support hit determination value.

Then, when the determination result of the support hit determination process (step A391) is a support hit (step A392; Y), the support hit information is overwritten and saved in the support hit flag 2 area in which the loss information was saved in step A381 (step A393), and the big hit flag 2 setting process is completed. On the other hand, when the determination result of the support hit determination process (step A391) is not a support hit (step A392; N), the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated. In this case, the winning information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area, the small hit flag 2 area and the support hit flag 2 area.

[Jackpot determination process]
FIG. 23(a) shows the jackpot determination processing (steps A364 and A384) in the jackpot flag 1 setting processing and the jackpot flag 2 setting processing described above. In this big hit determination process, first, an upper limit determination value table corresponding to the probability setting value is set (step A401). The upper limit decision value table is provided for each set probability value, and defines an upper limit decision value in a high probability state and an upper limit decision value in a low probability state (normal probability state). Here, a corresponding table is set according to the currently set probability setting value.
A big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot determination value is a plurality of consecutive values, and when the jackpot random number is equal to or higher than the lower limit decision value as the lower limit of the jackpot decision value and below the upper limit decision value as the upper limit of the jackpot decision value, it is decided as a jackpot. By setting the upper limit judgment value table corresponding to the probability setting value, the big hit judgment is performed with the probability value corresponding to the probability setting value.

Next, the lower limit judgment value of the big hit judgment value is set (step A402), and it is judged whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step A403). Here, the lower limit decision value is the same value regardless of the probability setting value or probability state (high probability state or normal probability state), but the lower limit decision value may differ depending on the probability setting value or probability state. In this case, similarly to the upper limit decision value, a lower limit decision value table in which the lower limit decision value is defined for each probability setting value is selected according to the probability setting value, and the lower limit decision value to be used is selected and set according to the probability state. Of course, the upper limit judgment value table and the lower limit judgment value table may be combined into a judgment value table.

If the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step A403; Y), that is, if it is not a jackpot, the judgment result is set to be lost (step A408), and the jackpot judgment processing is terminated. It should be noted that the loss as a determination result indicates that the lottery for the big win was lost. Also, when the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (step A403; N), it is judged whether the probability is high (step A404). And when it is a high probability state (step A404; Y), the upper limit judgment value in high probability is set (step A405), and it is judged whether the target jackpot random number value is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step A407). Moreover, when it is not a high probability state (step A404; N), the upper limit decision value in low probability is set (step A406), and it is determined whether the target jackpot random number value is greater than the upper limit decision value (step A407). The upper limit judgment value set here is obtained by referring to the upper limit judgment value table set in step A401 described above.

If the value of the jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit judgment value (step A407; Y), that is, if it is not a jackpot, the judgment result is set to be lost (step A408), and the jackpot judgment processing is terminated. If the value of the big hit random number is not greater than the upper limit judgment value (step A407; N), that is, if the game is a big hit, a big hit is set as the judgment result (step A409), and the big hit judgment process ends.

[Small hit determination process]
FIG. 23(b) shows small hit determination processing (steps A367 and A387) in the above-described big hit flag 1 setting processing and big hit flag 2 setting processing. In this small hit determination process, first, a small hit upper limit determination value corresponding to the probability set value is set (step A411). The small hit upper limit judgment value is provided for each probability setting value. Also, the small hit probability is constant regardless of whether it is in a high probability state. Further, the range of the big hit determination value and the range of the small hit determination value for the same probability set value are arranged so as not to overlap each other. The range of the big-hit determination value and the range of the small-hit determination value for different probability setting values may overlap, but may not overlap.

It should be noted that the small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit determination value is a plurality of continuous values, and when the big hit random number is equal to or higher than the small hit lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value and is equal to or less than the small hit upper limit judgment value which is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value, it is judged to be a small hit. By setting the small hit upper limit judgment value corresponding to the probability set value, the small hit judgment is performed with the probability value corresponding to the probability set value.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A412). If the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A412; Y), that is, if it is not a small hit, set the deviation as the judgment result (step A414), and finish the small hit judgment process. It should be noted that the loss as a determination result indicates that the lottery for the small prize was lost. Also, if the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A412; N), it is determined whether the target jackpot random number value is greater than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step A413).

If the value of the big hit random number is greater than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step A413; Y), that is, if it is not a small hit, set a loss as the judgment result (step A414), and finish the small hit judgment process. Also, if the value of the big hit random number is not greater than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step A413; N), that is, if it is a small hit, a small hit is set as the judgment result (step A415), and the small hit judgment process ends.

[Support hit determination process]
FIG. 24 shows support hit determination processing (steps A371 and A391) in the above-described jackpot flag 1 setting processing and jackpot flag 2 setting processing. In this support hit determination process, first, a support hit upper limit determination value table corresponding to the set probability value is set (step A421). The per support upper limit judgment value table is provided for each probability set value.

The probability of winning the lottery for the supporter may be different for each probability set value, or may be the same. When the probability setting value is varied, for example, the lower the probability setting value, the easier it is to win the lottery for the supporter (that is, the setting 1 is the most likely to win, and the setting 6 is the least likely to win), or vice versa. Moreover, the probability of winning the lottery for the supporter may be different for each probability state of the big win, or may be the same. In the case of different probability states of big wins, for example, it may be made easier to win in the case of a low probability state (normal probability state) than in the case of a high probability state, or vice versa. Also, it may be possible to win only when the probability is low. Also, the probability of winning the lottery per support may be different between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. - 特許庁
Further, the range of the big hit determination value, the range of the small hit determination value and the range of the support hit determination value for the same probability set value are arranged so as not to overlap each other. The ranges of the big hit determination value and the range of the small hit determination value and the support hit determination value for different probability setting values may overlap, but they may not overlap each other.

It should be noted that the support hit means that the jackpot random number matches the support hit determination value. The support hit determination value is a plurality of continuous values, and when the big hit random number is equal to or more than the support hit lower limit determination value which is the lower limit value of the support hit determination value and is equal to or less than the support hit upper limit determination value which is the upper limit value of the support hit determination value, it is determined to be a support hit. By setting the support hit upper limit determination value table corresponding to the probability set value, the support hit determination is performed with the probability value corresponding to the probability set value.

Next, the lower limit judgment value of the support hit judgment value is set (step A422), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the support hit lower limit judgment value (step A423). Here, the value of the lower limit judgment value for the support hit is the same value regardless of the probability set value, but the lower limit judgment value for the support hit may be changed according to the probability set value. In this case, similarly to the upper limit judgment value for support hits, a lower limit judgment value for support hits is selected according to the probability set value, in which the lower limit judgment value for support hits is defined for each probability set value. Of course, the support hit upper limit determination value table and the support hit lower limit determination value table may be combined into a support hit determination value table.

If the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the support hit lower limit judgment value (step A423; Y), that is, if it is not a support hit, set a loss as the determination result (step A428) and end the support hit determination process. It should be noted that the loss as a determination result indicates that the lottery for the support hit was lost. Also, if the value of the target jackpot random number is not less than the support hit lower limit judgment value (step A423; N), it is determined whether the target jackpot random number value is greater than the support hit upper limit judgment value (step A427). The support hit upper limit judgment value set here is obtained by referring to the support hit upper limit judgment value table set in step A421 described above.

If the value of the target jackpot random number is greater than the support hit upper limit judgment value (step A427; Y), that is, if it is not a support hit, a loss is set as the judgment result (step A428), and the jackpot judgment processing ends. Also, if the value of the target jackpot random number is not greater than the support hit upper limit judgment value (step A427; N), that is, if it is a support hit, the support hit is set as the determination result (step A429), and the support hit determination process is terminated.

[Special figure 1 stop pattern setting process]
FIG. 25 shows the special figure 1 stop design setting process (step A323) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process of the present embodiment.
In this special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A431), and if it is a big hit (step A431; Y), the special figure random number is loaded from the special figure 1 special figure random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) (step A432). Next, a special figure 1 jackpot design table is set (step A433), a stop design number corresponding to the loaded special figure design random number is acquired and saved in a special figure 1 stop design number area (step A434). A jackpot type is selected by this process.

After that, the special figure 1 jackpot stop design information table is set (step A435), the stop design pattern corresponding to the stop design number is acquired and saved in the stop design pattern area (step A436). The stop design pattern is for setting the stop design in the special figure display device (here special figure 1 display device 51) and the stop design in the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop pattern number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step A437), the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop design number is acquired and saved in the time reduction determination data area (step A438), and the performance mode transition information corresponding to the stop design pattern and the probability state is saved (step A439). These information are for setting the variation pattern scenario which is the information regarding the execution mode of the special game state, the effect mode after the end of the special game state, and the transition of the variation selection table group after the end of the special game state. Then, a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A455).

On the other hand, when the big hit 1 flag is not a big hit (step A431; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step A440), and when it is a small hit (step A440; Y), the special pattern random number is loaded from the special figure 1 special pattern random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) (step A441). Next, a special figure 1 small winning design table is set (step A442), a stop design number corresponding to the loaded special figure design random number is acquired and saved in a special figure 1 stop design number area (step A443). A small hit kind is selected by this process. After that, a stop design pattern corresponding to the stop design number is acquired and saved in a stop design pattern area (step A444), presentation mode transition information corresponding to the stop design pattern is saved (step A445), and a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop design pattern is prepared (step A455).

Also, if the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step A440; N), it is determined whether the support hit flag 1 is a support hit (step A446), and if it is a support hit (step A446; Y), the special pattern random number is loaded from the special figure 1 special pattern random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) (step A447). Next, a special figure 1 per support symbol table is set (step A448), a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded special figure symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A449). This process selects the type of support hit.

After that, the stop design pattern corresponding to the stop design number is acquired and saved in the stop design pattern area (step A450), the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop design number is acquired and saved in the time reduction determination data area (step A451), the presentation mode transition information corresponding to the stop design pattern is saved (step A452), and the decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop design pattern is prepared (step A455).
In addition, when the support hit flag 1 is not support hit (step A446; N), the stop pattern number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 1 stop pattern number area (step A453), the losing stop pattern pattern is saved in the stop pattern pattern area (step A454), and a decorative special pattern command corresponding to the stop pattern pattern is prepared (step A455). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, the decoration special figure command is saved in the decoration special figure command area (step A456), and production command setting processing (step A457) is performed. This decoration special figure command is transmitted to the production|presentation control apparatus 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A458), the special symbol 1 special symbol random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) is cleared to 0 (step A459), and the special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process is completed.

[Special figure 2 stop pattern setting process]
FIG. 26 shows the special figure 2 stop design setting process (step A343) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process of the present embodiment. In addition, the special figure 2 stop design setting process performs the same process as the special figure 1 stop design setting process for the special figure 2.
In this special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A471), and if it is a big hit (step A471; Y), the special figure pattern random number is loaded from the special figure 2 special figure random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) (step A472). Next, a special figure 2 big hit design table is set (step A473), a stop design number corresponding to the loaded special figure design random number is acquired and saved in a special figure 2 stop design number area (step A474). A jackpot type is selected by this process.

After that, the special figure 2 big hit stop design information table is set (step A475), the stop design pattern corresponding to the stop design number is acquired and saved in the stop design pattern area (step A476). The stop design pattern is for setting the stop design in the special figure display device (here special figure 2 display device 52) and the stop design in the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop pattern number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step A477), the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop design number is acquired and saved in the time reduction determination data area (step A478), and the performance mode transition information corresponding to the stop design pattern and the probability state is saved (step A479). These information are for setting the variation pattern scenario which is the information regarding the execution mode of the special game state, the effect mode after the end of the special game state, and the transition of the variation selection table group after the end of the special game state. Then, a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A495).

On the other hand, when the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (step A471; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step A480), and when it is a small hit (step A480; Y), the special pattern random number is loaded from the special pattern 2 special pattern random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) (step A481). Next, the special figure 2 small winning design table is set (step A482), the stop design number corresponding to the loaded special figure design random number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 stop design number area (step A483). A small hit kind is selected by this process. After that, a stop design pattern corresponding to the stop design number is acquired and saved in a stop design pattern area (step A484), presentation mode transition information corresponding to the stop design pattern is saved (step A485), and a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop design pattern is prepared (step A495).

Also, if the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step A480; N), it is determined whether the support hit flag 2 is a support hit (step A486), and if it is a support hit (step A486; Y), the special pattern random number is loaded from the special pattern 2 special pattern random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) (step A487). Next, the special figure 2 per support symbol table is set (step A488), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded special figure symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (step A489). This process selects the type of support hit.

After that, the stop design pattern corresponding to the stop design number is acquired and saved in the stop design pattern area (step A490), the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop design number is acquired and saved in the time reduction determination data area (step A491), the presentation mode transition information corresponding to the stop design pattern is saved (step A492), and the decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop design pattern is prepared (step A495).
In addition, when the support hit flag 2 is not support hit (step A486; N), the stop pattern number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 2 stop pattern number area (step A493), the losing stop pattern pattern is saved in the stop design pattern area (step A494), and a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop design pattern is prepared (step A495). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, the decoration special figure command is saved in the decoration special figure command territory (step A496), production command setting processing (step A497) is done. This decoration special figure command is transmitted to the production|presentation control apparatus 300 later. Then, the design data corresponding to the stop design number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A498), the special design 2 special design random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) is cleared to 0 (step A499), and the special design 2 stop design setting process is completed.
In setting the stop pattern of each result in this way, by using a common special pattern random number regardless of the result, the types of necessary random numbers can be reduced, the specifications and programs of the game machine can be simplified, and the burden of control can be reduced.

[Special figure information setting process]
FIG. 27 shows the special figure information setting process (steps A166, A324, A344) in the special figure reservation information determination process, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process.
First, the variable group selection pointer table is set (step A471), and the variable group selection pointer corresponding to the game state, the number of reservations, the stop symbol pattern number, the remaining support count, and the currently set variation selection table group is acquired (step A472).
Then, save the acquired variable group selection pointer in the variable group selection pointer area (step A475), and end the special figure information setting process.

In the variation pattern selection process (A326, A346) performed after this special figure information setting process, a variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern table selected based on the variation group selection pointer acquired here.
That is, the variation pattern is selected based on the game state, the number of suspensions, the stop symbol pattern number, the number of remaining supports, and the currently set variation selection table group. By selecting a variation pattern in consideration of such factors, it is possible to execute various effects.

For example, the variation selection table group selected according to the variation pattern scenario shown in FIG. 9 includes different variation pattern tables corresponding to the results of the special figure variation display game (big win, small win, support hit or loss), and the variation pattern table corresponding to the result is selected from the currently set variation selection table group.
As a result, different variation patterns can be selected for each of big wins, small wins, support wins and losses. For example, the variation pattern table for per support includes only variation patterns including the reach state. A variation pattern for executing the same ready-to-win performance is sometimes included in a variation pattern table selected in the case of a big win, a small win and a loss, but the variation time value is made different in order to differentiate the action for deriving the result in each of the cases of the big win, the minor win, the support win and the loss, and the variation pattern of each variation pattern table is a different variation pattern.

Also, even in the same gaming state, it is possible to select different variation patterns depending on the set variation selection table group.
For example, in the chance mode B and the chance mode D shown in FIG. 9(a), both are in the third specific game state ST13 where the number of times of support is 100, but the group of variation selection tables from the 20th time to the 100th time are different, and the tendency of the variation pattern to be selected can be varied to execute a different performance.

Also, even if the number of times of support is the same 100 times, it is possible to change the performance mode by making the variation pattern different depending on the set variation selection table group. For example, whether or not to select a variation pattern including a time value for executing a performance for notifying the number of times of support is made different depending on the group of variation selection tables, and whether or not to report the number of times of support can be selected according to the set group of variation selection tables.

In addition, in the case of the third specific game state ST13, it is also possible to select a variation pattern in consideration of the remaining number of times of support. For example, in the final game in the third specific game state ST13, a variation pattern including a time value is selected for displaying a result image informing the result of the game in the third specific game state ST13. However, the variation pattern is selected in consideration of the result of the final game, and when the result is a loss, the variation pattern including the time value for displaying the result image is selected, but when the result is a big win, a small win or a sub-win, the result image is not displayed, so a variation pattern not including the time value for displaying the result image is selected.
Also, it is possible to select a specific variation pattern at any time, such as when the third specific game state ST13 starts, or when a predetermined number of times is reached, or a predetermined number of times before the end.

In addition, by enabling the selection of the variation pattern considering the game state, it is possible to select different variation patterns depending on whether the support win is in the normal game state ST14 or in the third specific game state ST13, for example.
Thus, when the support win is derived in the normal game state ST14 and the third specific game state ST13 starts, a variation pattern including the time value for executing the performance peculiar to the start is selected, and when the support win is derived in the third specific game state ST13 and the number of times of support is reset, the variation pattern including the time value for executing the performance peculiar to the reset can be selected.

In this way, by allowing the game control device 100 to select a variation pattern in consideration of various factors, it is possible to vary the variation time according to the situation and execute various effects. Although the performance control device 300 can also select the performance, it is necessary to follow the variable time selected by the game control device 100 for the variable time, and it is difficult to secure the time peculiar to the performance to be executed as described above.

As described above, in a gaming machine capable of executing a game based on establishment of a starting condition and generating a special game state in which a game value is awarded to a player when the result of the game becomes a special result, the game control means (game control device 100) for controlling the game and the normal variable winning device 37 in which the starting condition is satisfied by the winning of the game ball are provided, and the game control means controls the normal game state and the normal variable winning device 37 more than the normal game state. A specific game state in which a prize is easily awarded and a special game state can be generated, and when the game result is a predetermined result of the special results, the specific game state can be generated after the special game state is generated, and when the game result is a specific result different from the special result, the specific game state can be generated without generating the special game state. It is possible to determine whether the result of the game will be a special result, a specific result, or a losing result before the game is executed.
Therefore, the lottery can be performed using one first lottery random number, the control of the lottery can be simplified, and the burden of control can be reduced.

The special results include a first special result (big win) accompanied by the operation of the condition device and a second special result (small win) not accompanied by the operation of the condition device, and the game control means determines which of the first special result, the second special result, the specific result, and the losing result as the result of the game by one first lottery random number.
Therefore, the lottery can be performed using one first lottery random number, the control of the lottery can be simplified, and the burden of control can be reduced.

In addition, the first special result, the second special result and the specific result each include a plurality of types of results, and the game control means determines the type of the first special result, the second special result or the specific result using one second lottery random number (special pattern random number) when the lottery result by the first lottery random number is the first special result, the second special result or the specific result.
Therefore, by using a common second lottery random number even if the results are different, the lottery control can be simplified and the control load can be reduced.

Further, the game control means includes a variation pattern table for selecting a variation pattern that is a game execution mode, and a variation pattern scenario defining information about transition of the variation pattern table in the specific game state, and is configured to set the variation pattern table defined in the variation pattern scenario based on satisfying a predetermined condition in the specific game state, and when a specific result is derived, selects a variation pattern scenario to be used in the specific game state based on the specific result based on the type of the specific result selected by the second random number. It will happen.
Therefore, it becomes possible to select the transition of the variation pattern in the specific game state with the second lottery random number, simplify the lottery control, and reduce the control load.
In addition, it becomes possible to select from among a plurality of patterns for the transition of the variation pattern in the specific game state, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, in a gaming machine capable of executing a game based on establishment of a start condition and generating a special game state in which a game value is awarded to a player when the result of the game becomes a special result, the game control means comprises a game control means for controlling the game and a normal variable winning device 37 in which the starting condition is satisfied by winning of a game ball, and the game control means has a normal game state and a specific game state in which winning to the normal variable winning device 37 is easier than in the normal game state. When the result of the game becomes one of a plurality of types of specific results, a specific game state can be generated, a variation pattern table for selecting a variation pattern that is an execution mode of the game, and a variation pattern scenario in which information about the transition of the variation pattern table in the specific game state is defined, and when the specific result is derived, the variation pattern scenario to be used in the specific game state based on the specific result is selected based on the type of the specific result.
Therefore, it becomes possible to select from among a plurality of patterns for the transition of the variation pattern in the specific game state, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

[Processing during special figure fluctuation]
FIG. 28 shows the special figure changing process (step A10) in the special figure game process of the present embodiment.
In this special figure fluctuation processing, first, a design stop command corresponding to the fluctuation design determination flag is prepared (step A601), and effect command setting processing (step A602) is performed. Next, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step A603), and the set display time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A604). In the case of this embodiment, the display time is set to 600 milliseconds when the stop design pattern is a losing design pattern, the display time is set to 600 milliseconds when the stop design pattern is a jackpot design pattern, the display time is set to 600 milliseconds when the stop design pattern is a small hit design pattern, and the display time is set to 600 milliseconds when the stop design pattern is a support winning design pattern. That is, the game control device 100 serves as stop display time setting means for setting the stop display time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game.

Then, set "2" for the special figure displaying process as the process number (step A605), and save the process number in the special figure game process number area (step A606). Furthermore, the signal related to the end of the fluctuation of special figure 1 (for example, the special symbol 1 fluctuation signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A607), the signal related to the end of the fluctuation of special figure 2 (for example, the signal during special symbol 2 fluctuation is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A608), and the control timer initial value (for example, 256 msec) is set to the signal control timer area for the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game for output to the external information terminal. Save (step A609). After that, as the information for controlling the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 indicator 51, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 1 indicator 51 is saved in the special figure 1 variation control flag area (step A610), and as the information for controlling the special figure 2 variation display game in the special figure 2 indicator 52, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 2 indicator 52 is saved in the special figure 2 variation control flag area (step A611), and the special figure fluctuation processing is ended.

[Processing during special figure display]
FIG. 29 and FIG. 30 show the special figure displaying process (step A11) in the special figure game process of the present embodiment.
In this special figure display process, first, the supporter hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process and the supporter hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 setting process are loaded (step A701), and the supporter hit flag 1 area and the supporter hit flag 2 area of RWM are cleared (step A702).
Next, the small-hit flag 1 set in the big-hit flag 1 setting process and the small-hit flag 2 set in the big-hit flag 2 setting process are loaded (step A703), and the small-hit flag 1 area and the small-hit flag 2 area of RWM are cleared (step A704).

Then, the big win flag 1 set in the big win flag 1 setting process and the big win flag 2 set in the big win flag 2 setting process are loaded (step A705), and the big win flag 1 area and big win flag 2 area of the RWM are cleared (step A706). Then, it is determined whether the loaded jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (step A707), and if it is a jackpot (step A707; Y), the test signal (for example, the condition device operating signal is ON, the role continuous operation device operating signal is ON, the special symbol 2 winning signal is ON) regarding the start of the second special figure variation display game jackpot (special figure 2 jackpot) is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A710), and the upper limit of the number of rounds. A value table is set (step A711).

On the other hand, if the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (step A707; N), it is determined whether or not the loaded jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (step A708), and if it is a jackpot (step A708; Y), test signals (for example, condition device operating signal ON, character continuous operation device operating signal ON, special symbol 1 winning signal ON) regarding the start of the jackpot (special figure 1 jackpot) of the first special figure fluctuation display game are turned on. It is saved in the test signal output data area of WM (step A709), and the round number upper limit value table is set (step A711).

Next, the round number upper limit value (“10”, “7” or “2” in this embodiment) corresponding to the round number upper limit information is obtained and saved in the round number upper limit area of the RWM (step A712). Subsequently, a round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A713).

Next, the decoration special figure command is loaded from the decoration special figure command area of RWM, prepared (step A714), and production command setting processing (step A715) is performed. After that, prepare a probability information command related to information that sets the probability of winning results in the normal figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game to a normal probability state (low probability state) (step A716), and perform production command setting processing (step A717). Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the pattern information (stop pattern number or stop pattern pattern) set in the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop pattern setting process is prepared (step A718), and the performance command setting process (step A719) is performed. This fanfare command constitutes special game state start information transmitted to the effect control device 300 at the start of the special game state.

Next, the big winning hole opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of winning results in the normal figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game are saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A720). In the case of this embodiment, at step A720, the big win 2 signal and the big win 3 signal are saved as the signals corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability. It should be noted that each ON/OFF is determined by the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability. For example, the jackpot 2 signal is ON when a jackpot with a ball to be played out (the jackpot opening information is other than the jackpot opening information 1), is ON when the jackpot is a jackpot without a ball (so-called definite jackpot, etc.) when the jackpot opening information is the jackpot opening information 1), and is OFF otherwise. Also, the big win 3 signal is turned ON when the big win is a big win with balls, and is OFF when the big win is a big win with no balls.

After that, the big win fanfare time corresponding to the state of the winning result probability in the normal figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game is set (step A721), and the set big win fanfare time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A722). Then, the special game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special game mode flag save area (step A723). This stores the information of the probability state of the special figure and the time saving state when the special result occurs. Then, based on the information stored later, the effect mode after the end of the special game state is determined.

Then, the area for the number of fraudulent winning prizes of the major winning opening corresponding to the opening information for the opening of the big winning opening is cleared (step A724), and the flag outside the monitoring period is saved in the flag area for the fraud monitoring period for the major winning opening corresponding to the opening information for the large winning opening (step A725). Thereafter, a fanfare/interval processing transition setting process 1 (step A726) for shifting to fanfare/interval processing is performed, and the special figure display processing is terminated. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a special game state generating means for generating a special game state in which the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39 is changed to the open state based on the special result in either the first special variable winning device or the second special variable winning device.

On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (step A708; N), it is determined whether or not the loaded small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step A727), and if it is a small hit (step A727; Y), a test signal (for example, a special pattern 2 small hit signal is turned ON) relating to the start of the second special pattern variation display game small hit (special pattern 2 small hit) is saved in the RWM test signal output data area (step A730). ), and update processing of the number of time reduction fluctuations is performed (step A731).
In addition, if the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step A727; N), it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step A728), and if it is a small hit (step A728; Y), a test signal (for example, a special symbol 1 small hit signal is turned ON) regarding the start of the small hit of the first special symbol variation display game (special symbol 1 small hit) is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A729). ), and update processing of the number of time reduction fluctuations is performed (step A731).

Next, an effect mode information check process (step A732) regarding the setting of the effect mode is performed, and it is determined whether the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state (step A733).
If the special figure is not in high probability (step A733; N), load the decoration special figure command from the decoration special figure command area, prepare (step A734), and perform the effect command setting process (step A735). Next, a small winning fanfare command is prepared (step A736), effect command setting processing (step A737) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A738. This small winning fanfare command also constitutes special game state start information transmitted to the effect control device 300 at the start of the special game state.

Moreover, when it is in the high probability of a special figure (step A733; Y), it transfers to the process of step A738. As described above, in the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state, the occurrence of the small win opens the big winning opening, but the screen displayed on the display device 41 is not changed so as not to make the player aware of the occurrence of the small win.
Then, the special game mode flag is loaded, the loaded flag is saved in the special game mode flag saving area (step A738), small winning fanfare intermediate processing setting processing (step A739) for shifting to the small winning fanfare intermediate processing is performed, and the special symbol displaying processing is completed.

On the other hand, if the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step A728; N), it is determined whether the loaded support hit flag 2 is a support hit (step A740). If it is a support hit (step A740; Y), the support operation setting process (step A742) is performed, the special figure normal process transition setting process (step A743) for shifting to the special figure normal process is performed, and the special figure displaying process is completed.
If the support hit flag 2 is not support hit (step A740; N), it is determined whether the loaded support hit flag 1 is support hit (step A741). If it is a support hit (step A741; Y), the support operation setting process (step A742) is performed, the special figure normal process transition setting process (step A743) for shifting to the special figure normal process is performed, and the special figure display process is completed.

Moreover, when the support hit flag 1 is not a support hit (step A741; N), time shortening fluctuation frequency update processing (step A744) is performed. Then, an effect mode information check process (step A745) relating to the setting of the effect mode is performed, a switching preparation remaining rotation speed corresponding to the effect mode number is set (step A746), and it is determined whether the effect remaining rotation speed matches the switching preparation remaining rotation speed (step A747). Note that the switching preparation remaining rotation speed may be a different value (rotation speed) in all performance modes out of the plurality of performance modes, may be the same value (rotation speed) in any one performance mode out of the plurality of performance modes, or may be the same value (rotation speed) in all performance modes out of the plurality of performance modes.
When the number of rotations remaining in the effect and the number of rotations remaining in switching preparation do not match (step A747; N), a special figure normal processing transition setting process (step A750) for transitioning to the special figure normal process is performed, and the special figure displaying process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the number of rotations remaining in the production and the number of rotations remaining in switching preparation match (step A747; Y), the production mode switching preparation command is prepared (step A748), the production command setting process (step A749) is performed, the special figure normal process transition setting process (step A750) for shifting to the special figure normal process is performed, and the special figure displaying process is completed. The performance mode switching preparation command is a command for not performing the read-ahead performance from several rotations before the performance mode is switched, and by transmitting the performance mode switching preparation command to the performance control device 300, it is possible to prevent contradiction or the like from occurring in the performance across the modes.

[Time reduction fluctuation frequency update process]
FIG. 31 shows the time reduction variation count update process (steps A731 and A744) in the above-described special figure display process. In this time reduction variation number update process, first, it is determined whether or not the general electric power is being supported (step A751). Then, if the general electric power is not being supported (step A751; N), the time reduction variation frequency update process is terminated. Also, if the general electric support is in progress (step A751; Y), the number of time reduction fluctuations is updated by -1 (step A752), and it is determined whether the number of time reduction fluctuations has become "0" (step A753).

If the time reduction variation count is not "0" (step A753; N), the time reduction variation count update process is terminated. Also, when the number of time reduction fluctuations becomes "0" (step A753; Y), a signal relating to the end of time reduction (for example, turning off the 2 jackpot signals) is saved in the external information output data area (step A754). Next, a signal related to the end of the time saving (for example, the special symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 variation time shortening state signal is OFF, the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF, the normal symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal is OFF, and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A755).

Next, save the no time saving number in the game state display number area (step A756), save the normal low probability & no time saving flag in the normal game mode flag area (step A757), and save the special low probability & no time saving flag in the special game mode flag area (step A758). Next, a signal related to the left-handed instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A759), and in order to turn off the right-handed display LED (for example, the first game state display section 56a), the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A760), and the time reduction variation number update process is completed.

[Production mode information check process]
FIG. 32 shows the effect mode information check process (steps A732, A745) in the above-described special figure display process. In this effect mode information check process, first, it is determined whether or not the next mode transition information is a no-update code (step A771). If the next mode transition information is a no-update code (step A771; Y), the presentation mode information check process is terminated. In this case, the performance mode is not changed according to the number of executed special figure variation display games, and for example, the performance mode that continues until the next big hit is selected in a high probability state.

Further, when the next mode transition information is not a no-update code (step A771; N), the number of remaining production rotations, which is the number of executable times of the special figure variation display game until the change of the production mode, is updated by -1 (step A772), and it is determined whether the number of remaining production rotations has become "0" (step A773). If the number of rotations remaining for effect is not "0" (step A773; N), the effect mode information check process is terminated. In addition, when the number of rotations remaining in the effect becomes "0" (step A773; Y), that is, when changing the effect mode from the next special figure variation display game, the effect mode information address table is set (step A774), and the address of the table corresponding to the next mode shift information is acquired (step A775).

Then, the production mode number of the production mode to be transferred is acquired and saved in the production mode number area in the RWM (step A776), the production remaining rotation number of the production mode to be transferred is acquired and saved in the production remaining rotation number area in the RWM (step A777), the next mode transfer information of the production mode to be transferred is acquired and saved in the next mode transfer information area in the RWM (step A778). After that, a probability information command corresponding to the newly set production mode number is prepared (step A779), and it is determined whether the prepared probability information command matches the value of the power failure restoration transmission command area (step A780). If the prepared probability information command matches the value of the power failure restoration transmission command area (step A780; Y), that is, if the probability state has not changed, the effect mode information check process is terminated.

When the prepared probability information command does not match the value of the transmission command area at power failure recovery (step A780; N), the prepared probability information command is saved in the transmission command area at power failure recovery (step A782), and effect command setting processing (step A782) is performed.
Next, an effect rotation number command corresponding to the newly set effect remaining rotation number is prepared (step A783), and an effect command setting process (step A784) is performed.
Next, a time reduction variation count command corresponding to the time reduction variation count is prepared (step A785), and effect command setting processing (step A786) is performed.
Next, it is determined whether the new effect mode is the left-handed mode (step A787), and if it is not the left-handed mode (step A787; N), the presentation mode information check process is terminated. If the left-handed mode is set (step A787; Y), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A788), effect command setting processing (step A789) is performed, and the effect mode information check processing ends. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect that gives notice of the switching from before the specified number of rotations before switching the effect mode. By managing the performance mode by the game control device 100 in this way, control such as generating a specific reach only in a specific performance mode, for example, can be performed, and the amusement of the game can be improved.
It should be noted that the transition of the variation selection table group according to the variation pattern scenario described above may also be controlled by this effect mode information check process, or may be controlled by another equivalent process.

[Fanfare/interval process transition setting process 1]
FIG. 33 shows fanfare/interval processing transition setting processing 1 (step A726) in the above-described special figure display processing. In this fanfare/interval process transition setting process 1, first, "3", which is the process number related to the fanfare/interval process, is set (step A791), and the process number is saved in the special game process number area (step A792).

Next, a signal related to the start of the big win (special game state) (for example, turn on the big win 1 signal (output with the big win + small win), turn on the big win 4 signal (output with the big win)) is saved in the external information output data area (step A793), and the signal related to the end of the high probability & time saving (for example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned off, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is turned off, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal is turned off, and special. The symbol 2 variation time shortening state signal is OFF, the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF, the normal symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal is OFF, and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A794). After that, the round number area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special game state is cleared (step A795), the number without time saving is saved in the game state display number area (step A796), and the normal game mode low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the general game mode flag area (step A797).

Then, the variable pattern discrimination flag area is cleared (step A798), and the high probability notification flag area is cleared (step A799), and the special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A800). Next, a probability information command (low probability) is saved in a transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery for saving a command output to the performance control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step A801), and a time reduction variation frequency area for managing the number of special figure variation display games that can be executed in the time saving state is cleared (step A802). As a result, the high probability state and the time saving state end, and the normal probability state and normal state occur.

After that, the number of the effect mode 1 is saved in the effect mode number area (step A803), the effect remaining rotation speed area is cleared (step A804), and the no-update code is saved in the next mode transition information area (step A805). Then, a signal related to the right-handed instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A806), and the right-handed number is saved in the game state display number 2 area in order to light the right-handed display LED (for example, the first game state display section 56a) (step A807). As a result, the information of the effect mode is once cleared along with the occurrence of the special game state.

[Small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process]
FIG. 34 shows the process shift setting process (step A739) during small hit fanfare in the process during special figure display described above. In this small-win fanfare mid-process transition setting process, first, "7" for the small-win fanfare mid-process is set as the process number (step A811), and the process number is saved in the special game process number area (step A812).
Next, a small win fanfare time (for example, 0.3 seconds) is saved in a special game processing timer area (step A813), and a signal relating to the start of a small win (for example, turning on a big win 1 signal (output with a big win + small win)) is saved in an external information output data area (step A814).

Next, the area for the number of fraudulent prize winnings is cleared (step A815), and the flag outside the fraud monitoring period is saved in the flag area for fraudulent monitoring period for major winning openings (step A816).
Next, a signal relating to the right-handed instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A817), and the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area in order to light up the right-handed display LED (for example, the first game state display section 56a) (step A818), and the process transition setting processing during the small win fanfare is completed.

[Support operation setting process]
FIG. 35 shows the support operation setting process (step A742) in the above-described special figure display process. In this support operation setting process, first, the initial value corresponding to the time reduction determination data is saved in the time reduction variation frequency area (step A821), and the signal related to the start of time reduction (for example, turning on the jackpot 2 signal) is saved in the external information output data area (step A822). That is, when the support winning pattern stops, only a signal relating to the start of time saving (for example, turning on the jackpot 2 signal) is output as the external information signal.
Next, a signal related to the start of time saving (for example, a special symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal is ON, a special symbol 2 variation time shortening state signal is ON, a normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is ON, a normal symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal is ON, and a normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A823).

Next, save the number with time saving in the game state display number area (step A824), save the normal figure high probability & time saving flag in the general figure gate mode flag area (step A825), and synthesize the special figure game mode flag area with the special figure game mode flag area (step A826) in order to maintain the probability state flag and make it shorter.
Next, a signal related to the instruction to hit to the right (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A827), and the number indicating that the game is hitting to the right is saved in the game state display number 2 area in order to turn on the display LED indicating that the game is hitting to the right (for example, the first game state display section 56a) (step A828). Then, the effect mode information address table is set (step A829), and the address of the table corresponding to the effect mode transition information set at the time of start of fluctuation (at the time of setting the stop symbol) is acquired (step A830). In step A829, the same processing as the setting (step A904) in the jackpot end processing is performed. By acquiring the address of the corresponding table based on the presentation mode transition information, the variation pattern scenario, which is information regarding the transition of the variation selection table group, is also acquired.
That is, in the case of a support hit, a stop pattern, which is the type of support hit, is selected by a special symbol random number, and production mode transition information is selected based on the stop design to select a variation pattern scenario.

Next, as a process of saving information necessary for management of the performance mode in the game control device 100, first, the performance mode number of the performance mode set after the end of the special figure variation display game as a support hit is acquired and saved in the performance mode number area (step A831). Furthermore, the production remaining rotation number of the production mode set after the end of the special figure variation display game that became the support hit is acquired and saved in the production remaining rotation number area (step A832), the next mode transition information of the production mode set after the special figure variation display game that became the support hit is completed, and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A833). Based on the information saved here, the effect mode and the variation selection table group are shifted based on the execution of the special figure variation display game for a predetermined number of times after the end of the special figure variation display game that became a support hit.

After that, a probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number is prepared (step A834), the command is saved in the transmission command area at power failure recovery (step A835), and effect command setting processing (step A836) is performed. Here, as the probability information command, there are a plurality of commands in which the information of the production mode is further included in any of "high probability/time saving" and "low probability/time saving". Although it is not used in this process, there are a number of other commands that include "high probability, no time saving", "low probability, no time saving", and further production mode information.
Next, a performance rotation number command corresponding to the newly set performance remaining rotation number is prepared (step A837), performance command setting processing (step A838) is performed, a time reduction variation frequency command corresponding to the time reduction variation frequency is prepared (step A839), and performance command setting processing (step A840) is performed.
Then, the time reduction determination data area is cleared (step A841), the presentation mode transition information area is cleared (step A842), and the support operation setting process is terminated.

[Special figure normal processing transition setting processing]
FIG. 36 shows the special figure normal process transition setting process (steps A743 and A750) in the above-described special figure display process. In this special figure normal processing transition setting process, first, "0" for special figure normal processing is set as a processing number (step A851), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A852).
Then, the information in the fluctuating symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A853), the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A854), and the special figure normal process transition setting process is completed.

[Jackpot end processing]
FIG. 37 shows the jackpot ending process (step A15) in the special figure game process of this embodiment.
In this jackpot end processing, first, it is determined whether the probability fluctuation determination data set based on the kind of special result that triggered the execution of the special game state this time is the high probability data set when the high probability state occurs after the end of the special game state (step A901).
If it is not high probability data (step A901; N), big hit end setting processing 1 is performed (step A902), and if it is high probability data (step A901; Y), big hit end setting processing 2 is performed (step A903). Then, the effect mode information address table is set (step A904), and the address of the table corresponding to the effect mode transition information set at the time of start of fluctuation (at the time of setting the stop symbol) is obtained (step A905). The presentation mode transition information also includes a variation pattern scenario that is information regarding the transition of the variation selection table group.

Next, as processing for saving information necessary for management of the performance mode and management of the variable selection table group in the game control device 100, first, the performance mode number of the performance mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired and saved in the performance mode number area (step A906). Furthermore, the performance remaining rotation speed of the performance mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired and saved in the performance remaining rotation speed area (step A907), and the next mode shift information of the performance mode set after the special game state is completed is acquired and saved in the next mode shift information area (step A908). Based on the information saved here, the effect mode and the variation selection table group are shifted based on the execution of the special figure variation display game for a predetermined number of times after the end of the special game state.

After that, a probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number is prepared (step A909), the command is saved in the transmission command area for restoration from power failure (step A910), and effect command setting processing (step A911) is performed. Here, as the probability information command, there are a plurality of commands that include information on the production mode in any of "high probability / no time saving", "high probability / no time saving", and "low probability / time saving". Although not used in this process, there are several other commands that include information on the production mode in addition to "low probability / no time saving".
Next, an effect rotation number command corresponding to the newly set effect remaining rotation number is prepared (step A912), and an effect command setting process (step A913) is performed.
Next, a time reduction variation count command corresponding to the time reduction variation count is prepared (step A914), and effect command setting processing (step A915) is performed.

Next, "0" is set as the processing number relating to the special figure normal processing (step A916), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A917).
After that, the signals related to the end of the big win (for example, 1 big win signal OFF, 3 big win signal OFF, 4 big win signal OFF) are saved in the external information output data area (step A918), and the signals related to the end of the big win (for example, condition device operating signal OFF, role continuous operation device operating signal OFF, special symbol 1 winning signal OFF, special symbol 2 winning signal OFF) are output to the test signal output data area. (step A919). Subsequently, the information in the probability variation determination data area is cleared (step A920), the information in the pointer area of the round LED indicating the number of rounds of the big hit is cleared (step A921), and the information in the performance mode transition information area is cleared (step A922). Then, the information in the special game mode flag saving area is cleared (step A923), the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A924), and the jackpot ending process is completed.

[Jackpot end setting process 1]
FIG. 38(a) shows the jackpot end setting process 1 (step A902) in the jackpot end process described above. In this jackpot end setting process 1, first, a signal relating to the start of time saving (for example, jackpot 2 signal ON) is saved in the external information output data area (step A931). Since the signal regarding the start of the time saving is output from the jackpot, it is continuously saved in the external information output data area. Next, a signal related to the start of low probability & time reduction (for example, special symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal ON, special symbol 2 variation time shortening state signal ON, normal symbol 1 high probability state signal ON, normal symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal ON, normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A932).

Next, save the number with short working hours in the game state display number area (step A933), save the high probability & short working hours flag in the general game mode flag area (step A934), and save the low low probability & short working hours flag in the special game mode flag area (step A935). After that, the initial value of the time reduction variation frequency (for example, 100) is saved in the time reduction variation frequency region (step A936), and the jackpot end setting process 1 is terminated.

By the above processing, after the end of the special game state, the probability state of the special figure variation display game becomes the normal probability state and the time saving state. In addition, by setting the initial value (eg 100) in the time saving variation frequency region, the time saving state is terminated by executing the special figure variation display game a predetermined number of times (eg 100 times).

[Jackpot end setting process 2]
FIG. 38(b) shows the jackpot end setting process 2 (step A903) in the jackpot end process described above. In this jackpot end setting process 2, first, a signal relating to the start of a high probability (for example, jackpot 2 signal ON) is saved in the external information output data area (step A941). Since the signal regarding the start of the high probability is output from the middle of the jackpot, it is continuously saved in the external information output data area. Next, a signal regarding the start of high probability & time reduction (for example, special symbol 1 high probability state signal ON, special symbol 2 high probability state signal ON, special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal ON, special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal ON, normal symbol 1 high probability state signal ON, normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal ON, normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A942).

Next, save the number with short working hours in the game state display number area (step A943), save the high probability & short working hours flag in the general game mode flag area (step A944), and save the high probability & short working hours flag in the special game mode flag area (step A945). After that, the time shortening variation count area is cleared (step A946), and the jackpot end setting process 2 is terminated. By the above processing, after the end of the special game state, the probability state of the special figure variation display game becomes the high probability state and the time saving state until derivation of the next special result mode. In the case of the present embodiment, the right-handed mode is set during the time-saving state, but since the right-handed mode is set during the big hit, the right-handed hit is not set in the big hit end setting process 2.
That is, the game control device 100 serves as a specific game state generating control means capable of generating a specific game state (time saving state) for extending the period of opening the normal variable prize winning device 37 for a predetermined period after the end of the special game state.

Next, control by the production control device 300 will be described. The main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 performs main processing shown in FIG. 39 and timer interrupt processing (not shown).

[Main processing]
As shown in FIG. 39, in the main processing, processing at the start of the program is performed first. In the processing at the start of this program, first, interrupts are prohibited (step C1), and the CPU is initialized (step C2). Next, the VDP 312 is initialized (step C3), and interrupts are permitted (step C4). Next, the generation of display data is permitted (step C5), the random number seed is set (step C6), and the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, the power outage detected flag and the like are cleared.

After the program start processing from steps C1 to C7 is performed, loop processing is performed as the main loop processing. In this loop processing, first, WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, a performance button input process (step C9) for creating input information from an input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the performance button 25 or cross key 29 is performed. Inputs from the performance button 25 and the cross key 29 are read in timer interrupt processing, and in this performance button input processing, when there is input from the performance button 25 and the cross key 29, processing for changing performance contents is performed.

Then, hall/player setting mode processing is performed for setting changeable ranges of LED and liquid crystal brightness, volume, etc., and receiving operations by the player to change LED and liquid crystal brightness, volume, and the like (step C10). Next, a random number update process (step C11) is performed to update the random number that determines the details of the variation mode of the decoration special figure variation display game.

Next, a received command check process (step C12) for analyzing and responding to the command from the game control device 100 is performed, and an effect display editing process (step C13) for setting for controlling the progress of the effect and editing the drawing command is performed to set completion of drawing command preparation (step C14). In these processes, various data are updated in accordance with the content to be drawn, and the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer. If the drawing data for the screen to be drawn within 1/30 second (approximately 33.3 milliseconds) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

Then, it is determined whether or not it is time to switch frames (step C15). In this embodiment, in order to create a system cycle (1 frame 1/30 sec), it is determined that it is time to switch frames when a V blank interrupt (1/60 sec) is input twice. Note that the frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate. For example, image updating (frame switching) may be performed at 1/60 second, or image updating (frame switching) may be performed at a timing later than 1/60 second. If it is determined in step C15 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C15; N), the process of step C15 is repeated. On the other hand, if it is determined at step C15 that it is time to switch frames (step C15; Y), screen drawing is instructed (step C16).

After that, sound control processing (step C17) for controlling the output of sounds from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b), decoration control processing (step C18) for controlling LEDs such as the board decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18 including the display plate 350, movable body control processing (step C19) for controlling the motor and solenoid of the board effect device 44, board effect setting processing (step C20) for controlling the effect, and processing for clearing the WDT ( Return to step C8).

[Receive command check processing]
FIG. 40 shows received command check processing in the main processing described above. In this received command check process, first, the value of a command reception counter that counts how many commands have been received in one frame (1/30 second) is loaded as the number of received commands (step C201), and it is determined whether or not the number of received commands is 0 (step C202). If it is determined that the number of received commands is 0 (step C202; N), the received command check process is terminated. If it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (step C202; Y), the contents of the command reception counter area are subtracted by the number of received commands (step C203).

Next, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (step C204), the command read index is updated by +1 within the range of 0 to 31 (step C205), and it is determined whether or not copying of the commands for the number of commands received has been completed (step C206). Thus, in this embodiment, the command is not directly analyzed in the received command buffer, but the content of the received command buffer is copied to the command area (RAM area for analysis), and the command is analyzed in the command area. Thereby, in preparation for a case where a command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during command analysis, commands (data) can be moved to make space. In addition, command analysis can be collectively performed for each round of main processing.

If it is determined in step C206 that the number of command copies corresponding to the number of commands received has not been completed (step C206; N), the process returns to step C204. If it is determined that copying of commands for the number of commands received has been completed (step C206; Y), the contents of the command area are loaded (step C207), and received command analysis processing (step C208) is performed.

Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C209), and it is determined whether or not the analysis of commands corresponding to the number of commands received has been completed (step C210). If it is determined that the analysis of commands corresponding to the number of commands received has not been completed (step C210; N), the process returns to step C207. Also, when it is determined that the analysis of the commands corresponding to the number of commands received has been completed (step C210; Y), the received command check processing is terminated. In this way, in the received command check process, commands received during one frame (1/30 second) are collectively analyzed. In this embodiment, up to 32 commands can be saved.

[Receive command analysis processing]
FIG. 41 shows received command analysis processing in the received command check processing described above. In this received command analysis process, first, the upper byte of the command is separated as MODE and the lower byte as ACT (ACTION) (step C231), and it is determined whether MODE and ACT are within the normal range (steps C232 and C233). When it is determined that MODE and ACT are within the normal range (step C232; Y, step C233; Y), it is determined whether or not ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C234).

If it is determined at steps C232 and C233 that MODE or ACT is not in the normal range (step C232; N, step C233; N), or if it is determined at step C234 that the ACT for MODE is not a correct combination (step C234; N), the received command analysis process is terminated.

If it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C234; Y), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C235). Variation system command is a command to command the variation pattern of special figure. When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C235; Y), the variable command process (step C236) is performed, and the received command analysis process is terminated.

Also, in step C235, when it is determined that MODE is not within the range of variation commands (step C235; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of jackpot commands (step C237). The big hit system command is a command for commanding an operation (display of a fanfare screen, a round screen, etc.) during a big win, or a command for commanding an operation (display of a fanfare screen, end screen, etc.) during a small win. Then, when it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the jackpot command (step C237; Y), the jackpot command processing (step C238) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

Further, when it is determined at step C237 that MODE is not within the range of the jackpot commands (step C237; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of symbol commands (step C239). The symbol-based command is a command for instructing information on the symbol of the special figure (for example, what to do with the stop symbol of the special figure). When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the pattern-based command (step C239; Y), the pattern-based command processing (step C240) is performed, and the received command analysis processing ends.

If it is determined in step C239 that MODE is not within the range of symbol commands (step C239; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of one-shot commands such as the pending number command and error command (step C241). A single command is a command that stands alone, unlike a command that makes sense in combination, such as a symbol command and a variable command. The one-time commands include a customer waiting demonstration command, a pending number command, a pattern stop command, a probability information command, an error/illegal command, and a model designation command. If it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the single-shot command (step C241; Y), single-shot command processing (step C242) is performed, and the received command analysis processing ends.

If it is determined in step C241 that MODE is not within the range of single-shot commands (step C241; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of look-ahead symbol commands (step C243). When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the look-ahead symbol system command (step C243; Y), the look-ahead symbol system command process (step C244) is performed, and the received command analysis process ends.

Also, when it is determined in step C243 that MODE is not within the range of the look-ahead symbol system command (step C243; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of the look-ahead variation system command (step C245). When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the prefetch variation command (step C245; Y), prefetch variation command processing (step C246) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated. If it is determined in step C245 that the MODE is not within the range of the prefetch variation command (step C245; N), the received command analysis process is terminated.

In addition, the look-ahead variation system command and the look-ahead symbol system command are commands including information necessary for executing the look-ahead effect. The look-ahead effect (also referred to as a look-ahead notice or a look-ahead notice effect) is whether or not the special figure variation display game will be a big hit when the special figure variation display game corresponding to the start memory (suspension) that has not been executed is executed afterwards (or what kind of variation pattern it will be). A look-ahead system command (a look-ahead variation system command and a look-ahead pattern system command) is a command for notifying in advance a variation pattern and a stop design corresponding to start memory to be targeted for look-ahead performance, and is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the performance control device 300 at the time of start winning. It should be noted that normal variation-based commands and symbol-based commands that are not look-ahead are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of the special figure variation display game.

Next, a variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) on the display device 41 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 42, in the center of the display area of the display device 41, a first decoration game display section 81 for displaying the first decoration game of the decoration special figure variation display game is provided.
In the first decoration game display section 81, the decoration special figure variation display game is displayed by displaying the identification information variably in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas and then stopping the display.

In the lower right part of the display area of the display device 41, a second decoration game display section 82 for displaying the second decoration game of the decoration special figure variation display game is provided. In the second decoration game displayed in the second decoration game display part 82, similar to the first decoration game displayed in the first decoration game display part 81, identification information is variably displayed in each of the left area, the middle area and the right area, and then stopped to display the result. The identification information (small symbols) relatively smaller than the identification information (large symbols) displayed on the first decoration game display portion 81 is displayed on the second decoration game display portion 82 .

In addition, in the central lower part of the display area of the display device 41, there is provided a standby memory display section 83 for displaying the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory.
When the decoration special figure variation display game being displayed on the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 is the decoration special figure variation display game (decorative special figure 1 variation display game) corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game, the standby memory display unit 83 displays the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory (first start memory) that is the right to execute the special figure 1 variation display game. In this case, the decoration special figure start memory display displayed in the standby memory display part 83 corresponds one-to-one with the first start memory, and the decoration special figure start memory display at the left end is displayed in order of storage so that it becomes the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory stored first, and is shifted to the left each time it is consumed.

In addition, when the decoration special figure variation display game being displayed on the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 is the decoration special figure variation display game (decorative special figure 2 variation display game) corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game, the standby memory display unit 83 displays the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory (second start memory) that is the right to execute the special figure 2 variation display game. In this case, the decoration special figure start memory display displayed in the standby memory display part 83 corresponds one-to-one with the second start memory, the decoration special figure start memory display at the left end is displayed in the order of storage so that it becomes the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the first stored second start memory, and is shifted to the left each time it is consumed.
Furthermore, in the standby memory display unit 83, the result of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the starting memory and the result of the prefetch such as the fluctuation pattern can be suggested by the display mode of the decorative special figure starting memory display corresponding to the starting memory.

On the left side of the standby memory display section 83, there is provided a memory display section 84 during execution for displaying information related to the start memory corresponding to the special figure variation display game currently being executed. At the start of the special figure fluctuation display game, the decoration special figure starting memory display at the left end of the standby memory display portion 83 is shifted to the in-execution memory display portion 84 . Furthermore, in the running memory display unit 84, the result of the special figure variation display game currently running, the variation pattern, etc. can be suggested by the display mode of the decoration special figure starting memory display displayed in the running memory display unit 84. It is possible.
In the upper left part of the display area of the display device 41, a first starting memory number display section 85a that displays the first starting memory number (special figure 1 reservation number) and a second starting memory number (special figure 2 reservation number). A second starting memory number display section 85b for displaying is provided.

FIG. 42 and FIG. 43 show a case of executing a special figure variation display game in which the result is "support hit". FIG. 42 is an example of display on the display device 41, and FIG. 43 is an example of a timing chart.
When the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t61), as shown in FIGS. 42A and 43, in the display device 41, as shown in FIGS. FIG. 42(a) shows a state in which the first start memory number is 4 and the second start memory number is 0 during the stop display time of the special figure 1 variable display game in which the result is "loss".

In addition, in FIG. 42(a), the decorative special figure starting memory display at the left end of the standby memory display section 83 is displayed in a specific display mode different from the normal display mode. That is, the pending change effect suggesting the look-ahead result is executed in the standby storage display section 83 . Here, the special figure variation display game corresponding to the decoration special figure start memory display on the left end of the standby memory display part 83 is the special figure 1 variation display game whose result is "Sapo win A", and that is suggested by the display mode of the decoration special figure start memory display. That is, the number of times of support to be provided is suggested by the display mode of the decoration special figure starting memory display.

Here, since the game result is "lost", the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 on the display device 41 is "346", which is one mode of the result modes of "lost".
Also, here, the game result is "lost", the first start memory number is 4, and the second start memory number is 0, so when the stop display time ends, the special figure variation display game and the decorative special figure variation display game end, and the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game, which is the next special figure variation display game, starts (t62). After that, when the second predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable time, as shown in FIG. 42(b), in the display device 41, a transition effect (a display to shift the decoration special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 to the running memory display unit 84) is executed, and the numerical value of the first start memory number display unit 85a is changed. Here, since a plurality of decorative special figure start memory displays are displayed in the standby memory display part 83, the decoration special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display part 83 is shifted to the memory display part 84 during execution by the transition performance, and the decoration special figure start memory display other than the left end of the standby memory display part 83 is shifted to the left in the standby memory display part 83.

When the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation time (t63), as shown in FIGS. 42(b) and 43, in the display device 41, the variation display of the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game starts. After that, when the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is "support hit", as shown in FIGS.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 42(d) and 43, on the display device 41, a battle effect in which the friendly character fights the enemy character starts (t65). At the start of the battle performance, the left variation display area of the first decoration game display part 81 is moved to the left end of the display area of the display device 41 and the right variation display area of the first decoration game display part 81 is moved to the right end of the display area of the display device 41 in order to secure a battle performance display part for displaying the battle performance within the display area of the display device 41, and the visibility of the middle variation display area is lowered and made invisible. That is, the visibility of the medium fluctuation display area is lowered by the specific effect display. Further, the standby storage display section 83 and the execution storage display section 84 are hidden.

Next, as shown in FIG. 42(e), the result of the battle presentation is reported. Here, since the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is "support hit", the result of the battle presentation is "tie". On the other hand, when the result of the special figure variation display game under execution is a ``jackpot'', the result of the battle presentation is ``winning of the ally character'', and when the result of the special figure variation display game under execution is ``losing'', the result of the battle presentation is ``losing of the ally character''.

Next, as shown in FIG. 42( f ), the game result is temporarily stopped (for example, rocking display) on the first decoration game display section 81 . As a result, the visibility of the middle fluctuation display area is restored. Then, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variation display game ends and the stop display time starts (t66), as shown in FIGS. In this case, since the game result is "Supporter Win A", the display mode of the first decorative game display section 81 and the second decorative game display section 82 in the display device 41 is "434", which is the result mode of "Supporter Win A".

Further, as shown in FIGS. 42(g) and 43, when the stop display time starts (t66), the support number notification effect starts, and first, the support number given this time is notified. Here, since the game result is ``support win A'' and the number of times of support corresponding to ``support win A'' is 20 times, an effect for notifying that the number of times of support given this time is 20 times (for example, an effect of displaying ``support 20 times'' on the support time display part 86) is executed. On the other hand, when the game result is "support win B", the number of times of support corresponding to "support win B" is 100 times. Further, when the game result is "support win C", the number of times of support corresponding to "support win C" is 1000 times.
Further, as shown in FIG. 42(g), when the stop display time starts (t66), the standby memory display portion 83 and the running memory display portion 84 reappear.

Here, since the game result is ``support win'', the number of first starting memories is 3 and the number of second starting memories is 0, when the stop display time ends, the special figure variation display game and the decoration special figure variation display game are finished, and the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game which is the next special figure variation display game starts (t67). When the variable time starts (t67), as shown in FIG. 43, the game shifts to the chance mode. Specifically, in the case of the normal game state ST14, when the stop display time of the special figure variation display game in which the result is "support hit" ends (t67), the game moves to the third specific game state ST13. Also, in the case of the first specific game state ST11, when the stop display time of the special figure variation display game in which the result is "sapo hit" ends (t67), the game moves to the second specific game state ST12.

In this embodiment, the standby memory display unit 83 and the running memory display unit 84 display only the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the main fluctuation, and the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the irregular fluctuation It is configured not to display. Therefore, when it shifts to the chance mode (t67), the main variation switches from the special figure 1 variation display game to the special figure 2 variation display game, so as shown in FIGS.
Specifically, when the game state is the normal game state ST14 or the first specific game state ST11, i.e., when it is not in the chance mode (during general electricity support), the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory can be displayed in the standby memory display unit 83 and the running memory display unit 84, but the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the second start memory is hidden. Further, when the game state is the second specific game state ST12 or the third specific game state ST13, that is, when the chance mode is in progress (general electric support), the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the second start memory can be displayed in the standby memory display part 83 and the running memory display part 84, but the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory is hidden.

When the second predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable time, as shown in FIG. 42(h), the numerical value of the first starting memory number display section 85a on the display device 41 changes.
When the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation time (t68), as shown in FIGS. 42(i) and 43, in the display device 41, the variation display of the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game starts.
When the variable display starts (t68), the number of remaining supports is notified in the support number notification effect. Here, the number of times of support given this time is 20 times, and the first game (first game) after the start of the chance mode (general electric support) is being executed, so as shown in FIG.

Further, when the variable display starts (t68), as shown in FIG. 43, the chance mode notification effect starts. Specifically, in the chance mode notification effect, first, an effect is executed to notify that the game will enter the chance mode, and then an effect is executed to notify that the chance mode is in progress. During the chance mode (during general electric support), the battle production started during the execution of the special figure fluctuation display game with the result of "support hit" is continued, that is, the battle that was not settled due to the draw in the special figure fluctuation display game with the result of "support hit" continues. Therefore, in FIGS. As a result, it is possible to connect the effects before and after the transition to the chance mode.
Also, when the variable display starts (t68), as shown in FIG. 43, a right-handed instruction effect (for example, an effect displaying "Right-handed →" (see FIGS. 42(i) and (j))) starts.

Then, when the game ball wins the normal variable winning device 37 during the chance mode (during the general electric support) and the second start memory (second special figure reservation) is generated, as shown in FIG.
Also, when a support hit is derived during the chance mode (during the battle mode), a battle effect is executed and the number of support times is changed (see FIGS. 10 and 11). Each time the support count is changed, the number of allied characters may be increased or decreased, or the level of the allied characters may be increased or decreased. Specifically, for example, if the number of supports after the change is less than the number of supports before the change, the number of allied characters may be maintained (or reduced), and if the number of supports after the change is greater than the number of supports before the change, the number of allied characters may be increased, for example, as shown in FIG. 42(k).

The identification information (decorative identification information) that constitutes the support winning pattern may be composed only of general patterns (symbols 1 to 9), may be composed of general patterns and special patterns (special patterns for support), or may be composed only of special patterns. In other words, the support winning symbols temporarily stopped and displayed on the first decorative game display section 81 may consist of only general symbols as shown in FIG. 42(f), may consist of general symbols and special symbols as shown in FIG. Further, the support winning symbols stop-displayed on the first decoration game display section 81 may consist of only general symbols as shown in FIG. 42(g), may consist of general symbols and special symbols as shown in FIG.

In this embodiment, when both the first starting memory and the second starting memory are stored, the special figure 2 variation display game is executed with priority over the special figure 1 variation display game.
FIGS. 44 to 48 show a case where the special figure 2 variation display game whose result is "per support" is executed with priority over the special figure 1 variation display game. 44 to 47 are examples of displays on the display device 41 and the collective display device 50, and FIG. 48 is an example of a timing chart.

When the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts, as shown in FIG. 44(a), the variable display ends and the game result is stopped on the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 in the display device 41, and the decoration special figure start memory display (decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory) of the running memory display portion 84 disappears. Further, in the collective display device 50, the variable display is finished and the game result is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 51.例文帳に追加Here, since the game result is "lost", the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 in the display device 41 is "123", which is one mode of the result modes of "lost", and in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 is the result mode of "lose". Further, in the example shown in FIG. 44(a), the display mode of the special figure 2 indicator 52 is the result mode of "off".

Also, here, the game result is "lost" and the number of first start memories is 2 and the number of second start memories is 0, so when the stop display time ends, the special figure variation display game and the decoration special figure variation display game are finished, and the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game which is the next special figure variation display game is started. After that, when the second predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable time, as shown in FIG.

Then, when the first predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable time, as shown in FIG. 44(b), the variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game starts on the display device 41, and the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game starts on the collective display device 50.
When a game ball wins into the start winning opening 36 during execution of the special figure 1 variable display game and the first start memory (first special figure reservation) is generated, as shown in FIG. The display mode changes. Here, the new decoration special figure starting memory display is displayed in a specific display mode different from the normal display mode. That is, the pending change effect suggesting the look-ahead result is executed in the standby storage display section 83 .

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts, as shown in FIG. 44(d), the variable display ends in the display device 41, and the game result is stopped on the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82, and the decoration special figure start memory display (decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory) of the running memory display portion 84 disappears. Further, in the collective display device 50, the variable display is finished and the game result is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 51.例文帳に追加Here, since the game result is "lost", the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 in the display device 41 is "235" which is one mode of the result mode of "lost", and in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 is the result mode of "lost".

Also, here, the game result is "lost" and the number of first start memories is 2 and the number of second start memories is 0, so when the stop display time ends, the special figure variation display game and the decoration special figure variation display game are finished, and the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game which is the next special figure variation display game is started. After that, when the second predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable time, as shown in FIG.

Then, when the first predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable time, as shown in FIG. 44 (e), the variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game starts on the display device 41, and the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game starts on the collective display device 50.
When the game ball wins the normal variable winning device 37 during execution of the special figure 1 variable display game and the second start memory (second special figure reservation) is generated, as shown in FIG.

Then, when the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game ends and the stop display time starts (t71), as shown in FIGS. Further, in the collective display device 50, the variable display is finished and the game result is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 51.例文帳に追加Here, since the game result is "lost", the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 on the display device 41 is "625", which is one of the "loose" result modes.

Also, here, the game result is "lost", the number of first start memories is one, and the number of second start memories is one, so when the stop display time ends, the special figure variation display game and the decorative special figure variation display game end, and the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game, which is the next special figure variation display game, starts (t72). After that, when the second predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable time, as shown in FIG. Here, since the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory is displayed in the standby memory display part 83, even if the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game starts, the transition performance (the presentation for shifting the decoration special figure start memory display) is not executed.

Then, when the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation time (t73), as shown in FIGS. 45(a) and 48, the display device 41 starts the variation display of the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game, and the batch display device 50 starts the variation display of the special figure 2 variation display game. After that, when the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is ``support hit'', the reach variation starts in the first decoration game display part 81 of the display device 41 (t74), the battle performance starts in the display device 41 (t75), and the result of the battle performance is notified. Here, since the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is "support hit", the result of the battle effect is "tie".

Next, as shown in FIG. 45(b), the game result is temporarily stopped (for example, rocking display) on the first decorative game display section 81. FIG. Then, when the variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t76), as shown in FIG. Here, since the game result is "support hit A", the display mode of the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 in the display device 41 is "434" which is the result mode of "support hit A".

Further, as shown in FIGS. 45(c) and 48, when the stop display time starts (t76), the support number notification effect starts, and first, the support number to be given this time is notified. Here, since the game result is ``support win A'' and the number of times of support corresponding to ``support win A'' is 20 times, an effect for notifying that the number of times of support given this time is 20 times (for example, an effect of displaying ``remaining 20 times'' on the support times display part 86) is executed.
Also, as shown in FIG. 45(c), when the stop display time starts (t76), the waiting memory display section 83 and the running memory display section 84 that were hidden when the battle effect started reappear.
Here, since the game result is ``support hit'', the number of first start memories is 1 and the number of second start memories is 0, when the stop display time ends, the special figure variation display game and the decoration special figure variation display game are finished, and the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game which is the next special figure variation display game starts (t77). When the variable time starts (t77), as shown in FIG. 48, the game shifts to the chance mode.

When the second predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable time, as shown in FIG. 45 (d), in the display device 41, the numerical value of the first starting memory number display unit 85a changes, and in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 reservation display 53 changes.
When the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable time (t78), as shown in FIGS. 45(d) and 48, the variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game starts on the display device 41, and the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game starts on the collective display device 50.

When the variable display starts (t78), the number of remaining supports is notified in the support number notification effect. Here, the number of times of support granted this time is 20 times, and the first game (first game) after the start of the chance mode (universal electric support) is being executed, so as shown in FIGS.
Further, when the variable display starts (t78), as shown in FIG. 48, a right-handed instruction effect (for example, an effect displaying "Right-handed →" (see FIGS. 45(d) and (e))) starts.

Further, when the variable display starts (t78), as shown in FIG. 48, the chance mode notification effect starts. Specifically, in the chance mode notification effect, first, as shown in FIG. 45(d), an effect for informing that the game will enter the chance mode (for example, an effect for displaying a “chance mode entry screen”) is executed, and then, as shown in FIG. Here, the first decoration game display portion 81 (large pattern) is hidden by the chance mode entering screen or the chance mode in-progress screen to reduce the visibility, but the present invention is not limited to this. Specifically, for example, the chance mode entry screen and the chance mode in-progress screen may be displayed in a size that does not overlap the first decoration game display section 81 so as not to lower the visibility, or the first decoration game display section 81 may be displayed in front of the chance mode entry screen and the chance mode in-progress screen to prevent the visibility from lowering.

In this embodiment, the decorative special figure starting memory display is hidden at the start of the battle production and redisplayed at the time of design determination. If the pending change effect is executed in the standby memory display unit 83 before it is hidden, when the decorative special figure start memory display of the standby memory display unit 83 is hidden at the start of the battle effect and is redisplayed when the pattern is confirmed, for example, as shown in FIGS. May be.

Specifically, the decoration special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 in FIG. 45 (a) and the decoration special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 in FIG. The display mode of the decorative special figure starting memory display is a specific display mode before non-display (FIG. 45(a)), and a normal display mode at the time of re-display (FIG. 45(c)). That is, it reappears in a state in which the display mode has been reset.
Also, in FIG. 45(f), the decoration special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 and the decoration special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 in FIG. The display mode of the decorative special figure starting memory display is a specific display mode before non-display (Fig. 45(f)), and is also in the specific display mode when re-displaying (Fig. 45(h)).

Further, when re-displaying with the pending change effect being executed, the effect mode of the pending change effect at the time of re-display may be the same as the effect mode before non-display as shown in FIGS.
Specifically, the decoration special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 in FIG. 45 (f) and the decoration special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 in FIG. The display mode of the decoration special figure starting memory display is the same before non-display (Fig. 45(f)) and at the time of re-display (Fig. 45(h)). In other words, it reappears in a state in which the display mode before non-display (before the start of the battle effect) is inherited.
Also, in FIG. 46 (a), the decoration special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 and the decoration special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 in FIG. Of the display modes of the decorative special figure start memory display, the display mode (in the case of this embodiment, color) for suggesting the look-ahead result is the same before non-display (Fig. 46 (a)) and at the time of re-display (Fig. 46 (c)), but the display mode (here, shape) different from the display mode for suggesting the pre-read result is different before non-display (figure 46 (a)) and at the time of re-display (figure 46 (c)).

The battle production is not only started during execution of the special figure fluctuation display game whose result is "support hit", but can be started during execution of the special figure fluctuation display game whose result is other than "support hit", but whether the result of the special figure fluctuation display game being executed at the start of the battle production is "support hit" and when it is not "support hit", the presence or absence of the pending change effect at the time of reappearance and the production mode of the hold change effect at the time of reappearance may be changed.
Specifically, for example, when the decorative special figure starting memory display is hidden during the execution of the special figure variation display game (for example, at the start of the battle presentation) and is redisplayed at the start of the stop display time of the special figure variation display game (at the time of design determination), and when the pending change effect is being executed in the standby storage display unit 83 before being hidden, If the result of the special figure variation display game is "support hit", As shown in FIGS. state, and if the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a "big hit", it may be redisplayed in a state in which the pending change effect is executed (the effect mode is different from before non-display) as in FIGS.

In addition, in this embodiment, only the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the main fluctuation is displayed in the standby memory display unit 83 and the running memory display unit 84, and the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the irregular fluctuation is not displayed. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the standby memory display part 83 can display only the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the main fluctuation, and the memory display part 84 during execution can display not only the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the main fluctuation, but also the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the irregular fluctuation.
In that case, when the decoration special figure start memory display displayed in the running memory display unit 84 is the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the irregular fluctuation, for example, as shown in FIGS.

The pending change performance executed in the standby memory display unit 83 is a performance suggesting the result of the special figure variation display game corresponding to the decoration special figure start memory display and the result of the prediction such as the variation pattern by displaying the decorative special figure start memory display displayed in the standby memory display unit 83 in a specific display mode.
Further, the pending change performance executed in the memory display part 84 during execution is a performance suggesting the result of the special figure variation display game (special figure variation display game currently being executed) corresponding to the decoration special figure start memory display displayed in the memory display part 84 during execution, the variation pattern, etc. by displaying the decoration special figure start memory display displayed in the memory display part 84 during execution in a specific display mode.

Specifically, the decoration special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 in FIG. 47 (c) and the decoration special figure start memory display in the running memory display unit 84 in FIG. The display mode of the decoration special figure starting memory display is the same before moving to the running memory display section 84 (Fig. 47(c)) and after moving to the running memory display section 84 (Fig. 47(e)). In other words, the transition is made to the in-execution storage display section 84 in a state in which the display mode before the transition is inherited.
It should be noted that the display mode after shifting to the in-execution storage display section 84 may be a display mode different from the display mode before shifting. Specifically, for example, among the display modes of the decorative special figure start memory display, the display mode (in the case of this embodiment, color) for suggesting the look-ahead result is inherited even after the transition, and the display mode for suggesting the look-ahead result.

Also, in FIG. 47(h), the decoration special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 and the decoration special figure start memory display in the running memory display unit 84 in FIG. The display mode of the decoration special figure starting memory display is a specific display mode before moving to the running memory display section 84 (Fig. 47 (h)), whereas after moving to the running memory display section 84 (Figure 47 (j)), it is a normal display mode. That is, the display mode is reset and the process is shifted to the in-execution storage display section 84 .

Further, since only the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the main variation is displayed in the standby memory display part 83, when the decoration special figure start memory display displayed in the standby memory display part 83 is the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory, the decoration special figure start memory display is hidden when the chance mode starts and reappears when the chance mode ends. For example, as shown in FIG. 49, when the first start memory generated before the start of the chance mode is not digested during the chance mode, and the pending change performance for the first start memory is executed before the start of the chance mode, when the chance mode ends, the display mode before the start of the battle performance may be reappeared.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 45(d), (i), 46(d), 47(d), and (i), the standby storage display unit 83 and the active storage display unit 84 are hidden by the chance mode entry screen, but the present invention is not limited to this. Specifically, for example, the chance mode entry screen may be displayed in a size (e.g., the same size as the chance mode screen) that does not overlap the standby memory display section 83 and the execution memory display section 84 (including the decorative special figure start memory display), or the standby memory display section 83 and the execution memory display section 84 may be displayed on the near side of the chance mode entry screen.
Further, when the decoration special figure variation display game being displayed on the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 is a decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to irregular variation, the decoration special figure start memory display of the standby memory display unit 83 (decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory of the main variation) may be hidden. That is, in the examples shown in FIGS. 45(a), (f), FIG. 46(a), FIG. 47(a), and (f), the decoration special figure start memory display (first start memory decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory) displayed in the standby memory display unit 83 may be hidden.

In the example shown in FIGS. 44 to 48, at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game (t72 to t73), the display mode of the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 of the display device 41 is the "missing" result mode, and the display mode of the special figure 2 indicator 52 of the collective display device 50 is the "missing" result mode. Therefore, in a state in which the stop symbols (lost symbols) of the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 and the stop symbols (loose symbols) of the special figure 1 display device 51 are aligned, the variation display of the special figure 2 variation display game (the variation display on the special figure 2 display device 52) and the variation display of the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game (the variation display on the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82) are performed. It will start.
Of course, at the start of the special figure 2 variation display game (t72 to t73), if the stop symbols of the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 2 display device 52 do not match, the variation display of the special figure 2 variation display game (variation display on the special figure 2 display device 52) and the variation display of the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game (first decoration game display unit) 81 and the variable display in the second decoration game display section 82) are started.

The special effect performed during the special figure variation display game in which the result is "support hit" is not limited to the battle effect, and can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, for example, in addition to (or instead of) the battle effect during the special figure variation display game in which the result is "support hit", a pseudo continuous effect that repeats the variation display of the large symbol may be executed.
FIG. 50 shows an example of executing a pseudo-continuous effect as a special effect performed during the special figure 2 variable display game in which the result is "support win C". Since FIG. 50(a) is a diagram showing the same state as FIG. 45(a), its description is omitted.

Here, since the result of the special-figure variation display game being executed is "support hit", the pseudo-continuous effect is started in the first decorative game display section 81 after the start of the variation display. When the pseudo-continuous effect starts, as shown in FIG. 50(b), first, a support number suggesting special symbol and a general symbol (here, "4") suggesting the number of support to be provided are temporarily stopped and displayed. Since the result of the special figure variation display game under execution is ``support hit C'', the number of times of support actually given is 1000 times, but here, the special pattern for suggesting the number of times of support suggesting that the number of times of support given less than the number of times of support actually given is temporarily stopped and displayed. Specifically, a special symbol for indicating the number of times of support indicating that the number of times of support to be provided is 20 is temporarily stopped and displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 50(c), the suggested number of times is displayed in the support number display section 86. FIG.
Next, as shown in FIG. 50(c), the re-variation display of the large pattern is started, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 50(d), the support number suggesting special symbol and general symbol (here, "5") indicating the support number to be provided are temporarily stopped and displayed. Here, a special symbol for indicating the number of times of support indicating the number of times of support to be added is temporarily stopped and displayed. Specifically, a special symbol for indicating the number of times of support, which suggests that the number of times of support to be added is 80 times, is temporarily stopped and displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 50( e ), the suggested number of times is added to the number of times displayed in the support number display section 86 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 50(e), the re-variation display of the large pattern is started, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 50(f), the support number suggesting special symbol and general symbol (here, "6") indicating the support number to be provided are temporarily stopped and displayed. Here, a special symbol for indicating the number of times of support indicating the number of times of support to be added is temporarily stopped and displayed. Specifically, a special symbol for indicating the number of times of support indicating that the number of times of support to be added is 900 is temporarily stopped and displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 50(g), the suggested number of times is added to the number of times displayed in the support number display section 86. FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 50(g), the re-variation display of the large symbols starts, and then, as shown in FIG. Then, when the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game ends and the stop display time starts, as shown in FIG. Here, since the game result is "support win C", the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 in the display device 41 is "656", which is the result mode of "support win C".

Further, as shown in FIG. 50(i), when the stop display time starts, the number of support notification effect starts, and first, the number of support to be given this time is notified. Here, since the game result is ``support win C'' and the number of times of support corresponding to ``support win C'' is 1000 times, an effect for notifying that the number of times of support given this time is 1000 times (for example, an effect of displaying ``1000 times support!''
In addition, here, the game result is ``support hit'', the number of the first starting memories is 1 and the number of the second starting memories is 0, so when the stop display time ends, the special figure variation display game and the decoration special figure variation display game are finished, and the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game which is the next special figure variation display game is started. When the variable time starts, the game shifts to the chance mode as shown in FIG. 50(j).

In FIG. 50, the case where the pseudo-continuous performance is executed during the special figure 2 variation display game with the result of ``support hit'' is illustrated, but the pseudo-continuous performance can be performed during the special figure 1 variation display game with the result of ``support hit''. The same applies to special effects (for example, battle effects) other than the pseudo-continuous effects.
In addition, in FIG. 50, the case where the pseudo-continuous performance is executed during the special figure variation display game with the result of ``support hit C'' is illustrated, but the pseudo-continuous performance can be performed during the special figure variation display game with the result of ``support hit A'', and can also be performed during the special figure variation display game with the result of ``support hit B''.

In the pseudo-continuous effect executed during the special figure variation display game in which the result is "support hit A", for example, FIGS. 50(d) to (g) are omitted. That is, when the pseudo continuous effect is started, first, as shown in FIG. 50(b), the special symbols for suggesting the number of support times are temporarily stopped and displayed, then, as shown in FIG. Then, when the variable time of the special figure variable display game ends and the stop display time starts, the game result ("434" which is the result mode of "support win A") is stop-displayed on the first decoration game display part 81 and the second decoration game display part 82, and the game shifts to the chance mode.

Also, in the pseudo-continuous effect executed during the special figure variation display game in which the result is "support hit B", for example, FIGS. 50(f) to (g) are omitted. That is, when the pseudo-continuous effect starts, first, as shown in FIG. The game result is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the pseudo-continuous effect ends. Then, when the variable time of the special figure variable display game ends and the stop display time starts, the game result ("545" which is the result mode of "support winning B") is stop-displayed on the first decoration game display part 81 and the second decoration game display part 82, and the game shifts to the chance mode.

In FIGS. 50(b), (e), and (f), the special symbols for suggesting the number of support are temporarily stopped and displayed in the medium variation display area of the first decoration game display section 81, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, special symbols for suggesting the number of times of support may be temporarily stopped and displayed in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas.
Further, the number of times of support to be added is not limited to "80 times" and "900 times", and can be changed as appropriate. Also, the number of times of support initially suggested (the number of times of support that is less than the number of times of support actually given) is not limited to "20 times" and can be changed as appropriate.
Of course, the special performances (for example, battle performance, pseudo-continuous performance) performed during the special figure variation display game in which the result is "support hit" can be executed not only when the game state is the normal game state ST14 or the first specific game state ST11, but also when the game state is the second specific game state ST12 or the third specific game state ST13. In other words, the special effect can be executed regardless of whether the chance mode is in progress (general electric support is in progress).

In addition, when the stop display time of the special figure variation display game in which the game result is ``win the support'' starts, the support frequency notification performance is started, and first, the support frequency given this time is notified, but the support frequency notified during the stop display time may be different from the support frequency actually provided. Specifically, for example, it is possible to notify that the number of times of support that is smaller than the number of times of support that is actually given is given during the stop display time, and to execute an additional effect of adding the number of times of support during the chance mode.
FIG. 51 shows an example of an additional effect performed after the end of the special figure 2 variable display game in which the result is "support hit C". Since FIG. 51(a) shows the same state as FIG. 45(a), its description is omitted.

Here, since the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is "support win", as shown in FIG. 51(b), the support winning symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the first decoration game display section 81, and when the variation time of the special figure variation display game ends and the stop display time starts, the support winning symbols are stopped and displayed in the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 as shown in FIG. 51(c). Here, since the game result is ``supporter win C'', ``767'', which is a result mode common to ``supporter win A'', ``supporter win B'', and ``supporter win C'', is displayed temporarily or stopped as a supporter win symbol on the display device 41.例文帳に追加Of course, not only when the game result is ``supporter win C'', but also when the game result is ``supporter win A'' or ``supporter win B'', it is possible to temporarily stop or stop display ``767'', which is a result mode common to each ``supporter win'', as a supporter win symbol.

Further, as shown in FIG. 51(c), when the stop display time starts, the number of support notification effect starts, and first, the number of support to be provided is notified. Here, although the game result is ``support win C'' and the number of times of support corresponding to ``support win C'' is 1000 times, an effect (for example, an effect of displaying ``remaining 20 times'' on the support time display part 86) is executed to notify that the number of times of support given is smaller than the number of times of support actually given.
In addition, here, the game result is ``support hit'', the number of the first starting memories is 1 and the number of the second starting memories is 0, so when the stop display time ends, the special figure variation display game and the decoration special figure variation display game are finished, and the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game which is the next special figure variation display game is started. When the variable time starts, it shifts to the chance mode.

When the game shifts to the chance mode, the chance mode notification effect starts. Specifically, in the chance mode notification effect, first, as shown in FIG. 51(d), an effect for informing that the game will enter the chance mode (for example, an effect for displaying a “chance mode entry screen”) is executed, and then, as shown in FIG.
When the game ball wins the normal variable winning device 37 during the chance mode (during the general electric support) and the second start memory (second special figure reservation) is generated, as shown in FIGS.

Here, the number of times of support to be added is displayed in the new decoration special figure start memory display. Then, as shown in FIG. 51(h), the fluctuation time of the next special figure variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) starts, and when the transition effect (the effect of displaying to shift the decoration special figure start memory display) is executed, the number of times of support displayed in the decoration special figure start memory display that moves to the running memory display unit 84 is added to the number of times displayed in the support number display unit 86. Here, since "80" is displayed in the decoration special figure start memory display to be transferred to the in-execution memory display section 84, "80 times" is added to the number of times displayed in the support number display section 86. - 特許庁

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 51 (i), the fluctuation time of the next special figure variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) starts, and when the transition effect (the effect of displaying to shift the decoration special figure start memory display) is executed, the number of times of support displayed in the decoration special figure start memory display that moves to the running memory display unit 84 is added to the number of times displayed in the support number display unit 86. Here, since "900" is displayed in the decorative special figure start memory display to be transferred to the in-execution memory display unit 84, "900 times" is added to the number of times displayed in the support number display unit 86. - 特許庁In addition, the display mode of the decoration special figure starting memory display displayed as "900" is a specific display mode different from the normal display mode. That is, the pending change effect for the starting memory corresponding to the decoration special figure starting memory display is executed.

Note that the number of times of support to be added is not limited to "80 times" or "900 times", and can be changed as appropriate. In addition, the number of times of support notified before the additional effect (the number of times of support that is smaller than the number of times of support actually provided) is not limited to "20 times" and can be changed as appropriate.
In addition, in the present embodiment, the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory (here, the start memory generated in FIG. 51 (f)) that is not subject to the pending change production and the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory (here, the start memory that occurred in FIG. For example, it may be possible to display the number of times of support to be added only to the decorative special figure starting memory display corresponding to the starting memory that is not subject to the pending change production.

In addition, in the present embodiment, it is possible to display the number of times of support to be added to any of the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory of the special figure variation display game whose result is "loss", the start memory of the special figure variation display game whose result is "jackpot", and the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory of the special figure variation display game whose result is "support hit", but it is not limited to this. For example, the number of supports to be added may be displayed only on the decorative special figure starting memory display corresponding to the starting memory of the special figure fluctuation display game in which the result is "missing".

For example, when it is possible to display the number of supports to be added only in the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory of the loss variation (special figure variation display game in which the result is "loss"), the presence or absence of the display of the support number suggests whether or not there is a loss variation.
On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, in the present embodiment, by making it possible to display the number of supports to be added to any of the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the special figure variation display game whose result is "loss", the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the special figure variation display game whose result is "jackpot", and the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the special figure variation display game whose result is "support hit", the presence or absence of the display of the support number indicates whether or not it is a loss variation. Therefore, it is possible to improve interest in outlier fluctuations.

In FIG. 51, the case of executing the additional performance during the chance mode entered with the end of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game with the result of "support hit" was illustrated, but the additional performance can be executed during the chance mode entered with the end of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game with the result of "support hit".
In addition, in FIG. 51, the case of executing the additional production during the chance mode entered with the end of the special figure fluctuation display game with the result of "support hit C" was illustrated, but the additional production can be executed during the chance mode entered with the end of the special figure fluctuation display game with the result of "support hit A", or during the chance mode entered with the end of the special figure fluctuation display game with the result of "support hit B".

In addition, in FIG. 51(b), the result mode "767" common to each "support win" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the first decoration game display section 81, and in FIG. For example, when the game result is "supporter win C", the result mode of "supporter win C" may be temporarily stopped and displayed in the first decoration game display section 81, and the result mode of "supporter win C" may be temporarily stopped and displayed in the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82. - 特許庁
For example, if ``656'', which is a result mode peculiar to ``support win C'', is temporarily stopped or stopped, the player can grasp the actual number of times of support given before the execution of the additional performance, so there is a possibility that the interest of the additional performance will be reduced. On the other hand, as in the example shown in FIG. 51, the result mode common to each "support win" is displayed temporarily or stopped, so that the number of times of support actually provided can be ambiguous at the stage before the execution of the additional performance, so that the interest of the additional performance can be improved.

Next, an example of game effects will be described. FIGS. 52 to 54 show an example of game effects, and FIG. 55 shows changes in the visibility of the board effect device 44, the standby memory display section 83, the running memory display section 84, and the middle fluctuation display area 81b. In the game machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to execute an effect combining the display on the display device 41, the board effect device 44 movable to the front of the display device 41, and the display on the display board 350 arranged so as to cover the front surface of the game board 30.例文帳に追加

As shown in FIG. 52(a), when the previous special figure variation display game is completed, the identification information is stopped and displayed in the first decorative game display section 81 and the second decorative game display section 82, and the board effect device 44 is also at the initial position. Therefore, the visibility of the identification information of each variable display region including the board effect device 44, the waiting memory display portion 83, the running memory display portion 84, and the middle variable display region 81b is high (t100 in FIG. 55).
When the next special figure variation display game is started from this state, the variation display of the identification information is started in each of the left variation display area 81a, the middle variation display area 81b, and the right variation display area 81c of the first decorative game display section 81 as shown in FIG. 52(b). In addition, the variable display of the identification information also starts on the second decoration game display section 82 . Since the identification information is variably displayed, the visibility of the identification information in each variable display area including the middle variable display area 81b is lowered (t101 in FIG. 55).
That is, the variable display of identification information changes the display of the display device 41 to change the visibility of the display.

As shown in FIGS. 52(c) and (d), in this example, after the start of the variable display, the board effect device 44 moves from the initial position toward the operation position on the center side of the display area. In this process, the identification information of the medium-variation display area 81b is gradually hidden, and the visibility is gradually lowered. Further, as shown in FIG. 52(e), the action of the board effect device 44 returning to the initial position gradually improves the visibility of the identification information in the medium fluctuation display area 81b (from t102 to t103 in FIG. 55).

After that, the display on the display panel 350 is performed as shown in FIG. 52(f). Since the display on the display board 350 is performed, the visibility of the first decoration game display portion 81, the second decoration game display portion 82, the memory display portion 83 during execution, and the memory display portion 84 during execution, which overlap with the display, is lowered. Here, the display on the display board 350 is a display that can be seen through the display device 41 and the board effect device 44 positioned behind, and the visibility of the identification information displayed in the middle fluctuation display area 81b by the board effect device 44 is lowered to a lesser degree (from t104 to t105 in FIG. 55).

Then, as shown in FIG. 52(g), the ready-to-win state is reached, and here again, the board effect device 44 is operating as shown in FIG. 52(h). As a result, the visibility of the identification information in the medium fluctuation display area 81b is lowered (from t106 to t107 in FIG. 55). This effect is effected by changing the visibility of the display of the display device 41 by the board effect device 44. - 特許庁
In addition, as shown in FIG. 52(i), the display is performed on the display panel 350, and the visibility of the identification information in the medium fluctuation display area 81b is further reduced (from t107 to t108 in FIG. 55). This effect is effected by changing the visibility of the display of the board effect device 44 and the display device 41 by the display of the display board 350 .
In addition, since the display on the display board 350 overlaps with the board effect device 44, the second decoration game display part 82, and the memory display part 83 during standby, the visibility of these is also lowered, but the visibility is not lowered much because the overlapping area is small compared to the medium fluctuation display area 81b.

That is, in the portion where the display on the display board 350 overlaps, the visibility of the identification information in the medium fluctuation display area 81b is the lowest, and the visibility of the board effect device 44, the visibility of the second decoration game display section 82 and the memory display section 83 during standby, and the visibility of the memory display section 84 during execution are increased in this order, and there is a state in which there is a difference in these visibility.
As a result, even in a situation in which the performance effect of covering the middle variation display area 81b and the board presentation device 44, which are the parts that the player pays the most attention to, is sufficiently exhibited, the progress of the special figure variation display game can be easily grasped by ensuring the visibility of the second decoration game display part 82, and the information of the starting memory can be easily grasped by ensuring the visibility of the memory display part 83 during execution and the memory display part 84 during execution.
In addition to making a difference in visibility depending on the size of the area where the display on the display panel 350 overlaps, it is also possible to make a difference in visibility depending on the degree of transparency of the display on the display panel 350 . For example, the transparency of the portion overlapping the second decoration game display portion 82 and the standby memory display portion 83 may be set higher than the transparency of the portion overlapping the medium fluctuation display area 81b and the board effect device 44.

In this way, by changing visibility between the display of the board performance device 44 and the display plate 350 with respect to the identification information of the middle variable display area 81b forming a predetermined image displayed on the display device 41, various performances can be executed and the amusement of the game can be improved.
In addition, although the degree of expectation for a special result can be suggested by the display color and display contents of the display board 350, since the visibility of the in-execution memory display section 84, the second decoration game display section 82, and the during-standby memory display section 83 is ensured, it is possible to grasp the progress of the game and the degree of expectation at the same time even if the visibility of the first decoration game display section 81 is lowered.

After that, the display on the display board 350 ends, the board effect device 44 returns to the initial position, and the visibility of the display device 41 including the medium fluctuation display area 81b recovers (t109 in FIG. 55). Then, it develops into the SP reach state, and the identification information temporarily stops in the medium fluctuation display area 81b as shown in FIG. 52(j). Due to the temporary stop, the visibility of the identification information in the middle fluctuation display area 81b is improved compared to the state where the display is changed at high speed (t110 in FIG. 55). Further, during execution of the SP reach, the standby storage display section 83 and the execution storage display section 84 are not displayed.

As shown in FIG. 53(a), in this SP ready-to-win effect, an effect is performed in which identification information is transformed into different identification information. As shown in FIG. 53(a), the shape of the identification information begins to deform, and as shown in FIG. 53(b), the identification information is deformed so as to be compressed from the left and right. Further, as shown in FIGS. 53(c) and 53(d), the visibility of the middle variation display area 81b is improved as the amount of deformation decreases (from t111 to t112 in FIG. 55). That is, the effect of transforming the identification information is the first effect of changing the visibility of the display by changing the display on the display device 41 .
Also, the first effect here does not continue the state of low visibility as in variable display, but is a effect of periodically changing between a high visibility state and a low visibility state.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 53(e) and 53(f), the visibility is lowered due to the deformation again, and the board effect device 44 operates as shown in FIGS. This production is a second production in which the visibility of the display on the display device 41 is changed by operating the board production device 44 forming a movable accessory so as to overlap the display device 41 .
Here, the execution timing of the second effect is started in a state where the visibility is the lowest in the first effect in which the visibility changes periodically, and in addition to the deterioration of the visibility by the first effect, the visibility is lowered by the second effect, thereby greatly reducing the visibility.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 53(i), the display on the display panel 350 is performed while the board effect device 44 is operating, and the visibility is further reduced (t115 to t116 in FIG. 55). This effect constitutes a third effect of changing the visibility of the display of the board effect device 44 and the display device 41 by displaying a predetermined display on the display board 350 .
In the portion where the display on the display board 350 overlaps, the identification information of the middle fluctuation display area 81b has the lowest visibility due to a combination of the deformation, the overlap of the board effect device 44, and the overlap of the display on the display board 350, and the visibility is higher in the order of the visibility of the board effect device 44 and the visibility of the second decorative game display part 82, and a difference occurs in these visibility.

As shown in FIG. 53(j), when the display on the display panel 350 ends, the board effect device 44 returns to the initial position (t117 in FIG. 55), and the identification information in the reach state as shown in FIG. 54(a) temporarily stops (t118 in FIG. 55). In this example, the result is a big hit, and as shown in FIG. 54(b), the board effect device 44 operates and the display on the display board 350 is performed to deterministically inform that a special result will be derived (t118 to t121 in FIG. 55).
After that, the temporary stop is completed, the variable display is stopped, and the stop display time is reached, and as shown in FIG. As a result, the visibility of the identification information in the middle variation display area 81b is the highest. Further, during the stop display time, the display of the memory-in-waiting display section 83 and the memory-in-execution display section 84 is resumed.

When the stop display time ends, the special game state is started. As shown in FIG. 54(d), in the fanfare state, the displays of the second decoration game display section 82, the standby memory display section 83, the running memory display section 84, the first starting memory number display section 85a, and the second starting memory number display section 85b are terminated (t123 in FIG. 55).
In this example, as shown in FIGS. 54(e) and 54(f), the board effect device 44 operates during the fanfare effect, and the visibility of the identification information in the medium fluctuation display area 81b is lowered (t124 to t127 in FIG. 55). Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 54(g), the display is performed on the display panel 350 and the visibility is lowered (from t125 to t126 in FIG. 55).
After that, as shown in FIG. 54(h), the display on the display board 350 ends, the board effect device 44 returns to the initial position, the display on the first decoration game display section 81 also ends, and the round game starts as shown in FIG. 54(i) (t128 in FIG. 55).

As shown in FIG. 54(i), in the round game, a round number display 87a indicating the number of rounds, a type display 87b indicating the type of bonus, a special result display 87c indicating the derived special result, and a winning number display 87d indicating the number of winning balls are displayed.
As shown in FIG. 54(j), the operation of the board effect device 44 and the display of the display board 350 may be performed even during the round game. In this case, the visibility of part or all of the round number display 87a, the type display 87b, the special result display 87c, and the winning number display 87d changes depending on the display of the board effect device 44 or the display board 350. Of course, only one of the operation of the board rendering device 44 and the display of the display board 350 may be performed.

When the operation of the board presentation device 44 and the display of the display plate 350 are performed during the special game state, there is a so-called promotion presentation in which the execution of the special game state more advantageous to the player than the contents of the originally notified special game state is executed.
For example, during fanfare effects as shown in FIGS. 54(e) to (g), or during a round as shown in FIG.
In this case, by lowering the visibility of the result mode display on the first decorative game display section 81 shown in FIG. 54(g) and the special result display 87c shown in FIG.

As described above, the first effect of changing the display of the display device 41 to change the visibility of the display, the second effect of changing the visibility of the display of the display device 41 by operating the board effect device 44 so as to overlap the display device 41, and the third effect of changing the visibility of the display of the board effect device 44 and the display device 41 by displaying a predetermined display on the display plate 350 are performed in combination, thereby changing the visibility of the display device 41 in multiple stages. It is possible to make it possible to improve the interest of the game.
In addition, the operation of the board presentation device 44 and the display of the display plate 350 are performed so that the degree of visibility of a plurality of types of display in each part of the display device 41 is different, so that the effect of presentation can be enhanced and the visibility of the necessary display can be secured.
Also, the board rendering device 44 is opaque, and the display on the display plate 350 is translucent, so that the degree of deterioration of visibility is different, so that rendering with different tastes can be achieved.

Further, the first effect of changing the visibility by deformation of the medium fluctuation display area 81b, etc., the second effect of changing the visibility of the medium fluctuation display area 81b by the operation of the board effect device 44, and the third effect of changing the visibility of the board effect device 44 by the display of the display plate 350 can be executed independently, and can be executed in any combination.

Further, the visibility of the middle fluctuation display area 81b may not be changed by executing the third effect.
In the above example, since the identification information of the medium fluctuation display area 81b is not completely hidden by the board effect device 44, the visibility of the visible portion of the identification information of the medium fluctuation display area 81 is lowered by displaying the display board 350. However, by completely hiding the identification information of the medium fluctuation display area 81b by the board effect device 44, the visibility of the medium fluctuation display area 81 can be prevented from changing even if the display board 350 is displayed.
In addition, by hiding the medium fluctuation display area 81 and the first decoration game display part 81 in advance when displaying the display board 350, the visibility of the medium fluctuation display area 81 can be prevented from changing even if the display board 350 is displayed.

The sound volume emitted from the speaker 19 when the second performance for changing the visibility of the display of the display device 41 is executed by operating the board performance device 44 forming a movable accessory so as to overlap with the display device 41 is made different depending on the execution timing of the second performance. As a result, the effect is different depending on the execution timing of the second effect.
In the above example, during execution of the special figure variation display game, the closer the end of the special figure variation display game is, the louder the sound volume is. The volume is the lowest before reaching the reach state (from t102 to t103 in FIG. 55), and when the reach state occurs (from t106 to t109 in FIG. 55), during the SP reach (from t114 to t117 in FIG. 55), and immediately before the stop of the variable display (from t118 to t121 in FIG. 55), the volume increases in this order. As a result, it is possible to gradually raise the player's expectation towards the derivation of the result, and to improve the interest in the game. Note that the volume during operation of the board effect device 44 in the special game state (from t124 to t127 in FIG. 55) is the same volume as during the SP reach.

In addition, the light emission mode of the predetermined LEDs provided in the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46 when the third effect for displaying a predetermined display on the display plate 350 is executed is made different before the occurrence of the SP reach (from t102 to t103 and from t106 to t109 in FIG. 55) and after the occurrence of the SP reach (from t114 to t117 and from t118 to t121 in FIG. 55). As a result, the effect is different depending on whether or not the SP reach occurs.
In the above example, the LED is extinguished before the occurrence of the SP reach, and after the occurrence of the SP reach, the light emission mode before the execution timing of the second performance is continued or the light emission mode suggests the degree of expectation of the special result. It should be noted that, even during the special game state, the light emission mode before the execution timing of the second effect is continued.

When a predetermined display is performed on the display board 350, other LEDs are turned off so that the display on the display board 350 can be conspicuously seen, and the effect of presentation by the display board 350, such as suggesting the occurrence of SP reach, can be enhanced.
In addition, after the occurrence of the SP reach, the image of the display device 41 and other LEDs are illuminated to perform the SP reach performance, and while continuing these performances, the performance by the display of the display board 350 can be added, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

The volume during execution of the second effect is not limited to the order described above. For example, the lower the visibility of the medium fluctuation display area 81b, the higher the volume, or the lower the visibility of the medium fluctuation display area 81b, the lower the volume.
Also, regarding the volume during execution of the third effect, for example, the volume may be increased as the visibility of the medium fluctuation display area 81b is low, or the volume may be decreased as the visibility of the medium fluctuation display area 81b is low.

Furthermore, the sound volume may differ between when the second effect and the third effect are combined and when they are not combined.
For example, in a situation where it is possible to select either the case where the second performance and the third performance are combined at the same timing or the case where the second performance or the third performance is executed alone, the sound volume may be made larger in the case where the second performance and the third performance are combined than in the case where the second performance or the third performance is executed alone. Conversely, when the second effect and the third effect are combined, the sound volume may be made smaller than when the second effect or the third effect is executed alone.
By doing so, it is possible to provide different effects depending on whether or not the effects are combined, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In addition, when the second effect and the third effect are combined, the sound volume when the volume is the lowest (for example, before reaching the reach state (t102 to t103 in FIG. 55)) may be made smaller than the sound volume when the second effect or the third effect is executed alone during execution of the special figure fluctuation display game.
Also, when the second effect and the third effect are combined, the sound volume when the volume is the largest (for example, during SP reach (t114 to t117 in FIG. 55)) may be made smaller than the sound volume when the second effect or the third effect is executed alone during execution of the special figure variation display game.

The light emission mode of the predetermined LEDs provided in the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46 during the execution of the third effect is not limited to the above, and can be arbitrarily set.
Further, the light emission mode of the predetermined LEDs provided in the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46 during execution of the second effect may also be changed according to the execution timing of the effect. For example, before the occurrence of SP reach and after occurrence of SP reach may be different.

Furthermore, the light emission mode may be different between when the second effect and the third effect are combined and when they are not combined.
For example, in a situation where it is possible to select either the case where the second performance and the third performance are combined at the same timing or the case where the second performance or the third performance is executed alone, the emission intensity of the LED may be higher in the case where the second performance and the third performance are combined than in the case where the second performance or the third performance is executed alone. Conversely, when the second effect and the third effect are combined, the light emission intensity of the LED may be lower than when the second effect or the third effect is executed alone.
By doing so, it is possible to provide different effects depending on whether or not the effects are combined, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In addition, when the second effect and the third effect are combined during execution of the special figure variation display game, the light emission intensity when the light emission intensity of the LED is the lowest may be lower than the light emission intensity of the LED when the second effect or the third effect is performed alone during the execution of the special figure variation display game.
Further, the luminous intensity of the LED when the luminous intensity of the LED is the highest in the case where the second performance and the third performance are combined may be made smaller than the luminous intensity of the LED when the second performance or the third performance is executed alone during execution of the special figure variation display game.

Further, when the second effect and the third effect are combined, the light emission intensity of the LED may be changed according to the volume of the sound.
For example, the higher the volume, the higher the emission intensity of the LED, or the higher the volume, the lower the emission intensity of the LED.

The execution timing of the operation of the board rendering device 44 and the display of the display board 350 is not limited to the above example and can be set arbitrarily.
Further, the method for reducing the visibility of the identification information in the medium-variation display area 81b is not limited to the method described above, and other methods may be used. For example, the visibility may be reduced by inverting the identification information vertically or horizontally, the visibility may be reduced by changing the color, brightness, saturation, or transparency of the identification information, or the visibility may be reduced by superimposing another image.

Further, as the first effect, as shown in FIG. 52(b), the effect of the variable display is included in which the identification information is operated in the same manner in a plurality of variable display areas with the start of the special figure variable display game, but this effect may not be included in the first effect.
For example, as shown in FIG. 52(g), in a situation where the operating states of the identification information are different in a plurality of variable display areas and the visibility is different, the first effect may be set to reduce the visibility of the identification information. Also, the first effect may be the effect of reducing the visibility of the identification information after the start of the ready-to-win state.
Also, as shown in FIG. 52(b), the first effect may be an effect that lowers the visibility of the identification information by a change other than making the identification information operate in the same way in a plurality of change display areas with the start of the special figure change display game.

In the above example, the visibility of the identification information in the middle fluctuation display area 81b is lowered, but the visibility of the identification information in the left fluctuation display area 81a and the right fluctuation display area 81c may be lowered. Furthermore, the visibility may be reduced for images other than the identification information, such as background images, effect images, images indicating the firing direction, and the like.
In addition, reducing the visibility can be said to make the visibility difficult, and these states may include making the visibility invisible.
In addition, reducing the visibility includes covering a part or the whole of an object so that it cannot be seen, or covering a part or the whole of the object with an object or an image having low translucency.

Further, the operation and shape of the board rendering device 44 are not limited to those described above, and any type may be used. Furthermore, although the identification information of the middle fluctuation display area 81b is overlapped to reduce the visibility, the visibility may be reduced by overlapping the identification information of the left fluctuation display area 81a or the right fluctuation display area 81c, and the operation range and operation mode of the board effect device 44 can be set arbitrarily.
In addition, visibility may be reduced by overlapping with images other than identification information, for example, visibility may be reduced by overlapping with the second decoration game display section 82, the standby memory display section 83, the running memory display section 84, the background image, the effect image, the image for instructing the shooting direction, etc.

Further, the display on the display plate 350 may be displayed at a position superimposed only on the front surface of the board effect device 44 when the board effect device 44 is at the position when the board effect device 44 descends and completes its operation.
By doing so, the first effect of changing the visibility of the medium fluctuation display area 81b by deformation or the like, the second effect of changing the visibility of the medium fluctuation display area 81b by the operation of the board effect device 44, and the third effect of changing the visibility of the board effect device 44 by the display of the display plate 350 can be executed independently.
That is, it is possible to execute a case where the first, second or third effects are executed independently, a case where any combination of the first and second effects, the first and third effects, or the second and third effects is executed, and a case where the first, second and third effects are combined and executed.

Further, when the second effect or the third effect is executed, the middle variation display area 81b and the first decoration game display section 81 may not be displayed. Furthermore, when executing the second effect or the third effect, the waiting memory display section 83 and the executing memory display section 84 may not be displayed. In this case, the pedestals of the standby storage display section 83 and the in-execution storage display section 84 (the rectangular display indicating the position where the storage display is displayed in FIG. 52(a)) may remain displayed or may not be displayed.

Moreover, when a transparent liquid crystal display device or an EL display device is used as the display panel 350, it becomes possible to perform a more diverse display.
For example, when the visibility of the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 is lowered due to the display on the display plate 350, the third decoration game may be displayed on the display plate 350. FIG. Also, the third decoration game may be displayed on the display board 350 when the visibility of the first decoration game display section 81 or the second decoration game display section 82 is lowered by the board effect device 44 . By doing so, it is always possible to clearly grasp the progress of the special figure variation display game.
The display position of the third decoration game may be a position that does not overlap the first decoration game display portion 81 or the display position of the second decoration game, or may overlap the display position of the second decoration game.
Further, in the above-described example, in a situation where the board effect device 44 is superimposed on the front side of the medium change display area 81b, the identification information of the medium change display area 81b may be displayed at a position in front of the board effect device 44 on the display board 350.
Further, a predetermined display may be performed at a position in front of the board effect device 44 in accordance with the operation of the board effect device 44, and only the visibility of the board effect device 44 may be reduced.

Further, when the visibility of the standby memory display portion 83, the running memory display portion 84, the first starting memory number display portion 85a, and the second starting memory number display portion 85b is lowered by the display on the display plate 350, the starting memory display, the running memory display, or the starting memory number may be displayed on the display plate 350. By doing so, it is always possible to clearly grasp the state of the starting memory.

Further, in the above example, the board effect device 44 is arranged behind the display plate 350, the board effect device 44 serves as the first effect means capable of executing the second effect of changing the visibility of the predetermined image of the display device 41, and the display plate 350 serves as the second effect means capable of executing the third effect of changing the visibility of the first effect means.
The display board 350 may be arranged behind the board performance device 44, and in this case, the display board 350 serves as the first performance means capable of executing the second performance of changing the visibility of the predetermined image of the display device 41, and the board performance device 44 becomes the second performance means capable of executing the third performance of changing the visibility of the first performance means.
That is, it is sufficient that the second effect means for changing the visibility of the first effect means is positioned in front of the first effect means for changing the visibility of the predetermined image of the display device 41, and the structure of the first effect means and the second effect means may be of any kind. For example, both the first effect means and the second effect means may be the board effect device 44, and both the first effect means and the second effect means may be the display board 350.
Further, it is possible to allow three or more effect means to be overlapped in the front and back, so that the effect means located in front changes the visibility of the effect means located in the back.
Further, when the visibility of the predetermined image on the display device 41 is changed by another image displayed on the display device 41, the display device 41 serves as the first rendering means for changing the visibility of the predetermined image on the display device 41.例文帳に追加

From the above, in a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a state advantageous to the player when the game results in a special result, display means (display device 41) for displaying a predetermined image whose visibility can be changed by a first effect, first effect means (board effect device 44) for executing a second effect for changing the visibility of the predetermined image, and second effect means (display board 350) for executing a third effect for changing the visibility of the first effect means. , will be provided.
Therefore, it is possible to execute a variety of effects, and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, a display means (display device 41) for displaying a predetermined image, a first effect means (board effect device 44) capable of executing an effect of changing the visibility of the predetermined image, and a second effect means (display plate 350) capable of executing an effect of changing the visibility of the first effect means.
Therefore, it becomes possible to execute various effects, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result, a display means (display device 41) capable of executing a display related to the game, a movable accessory (board effect device 44) operable to overlap the front side of the display means, a display board 350 arranged in front of the display means and the movable role and capable of seeing through the display means and the movable role and displaying a predetermined display, and the display means. Effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the display, the movement of the movable accessory, and the display of the display board 350. The effect control means can perform a first effect of changing the visibility of the display by changing the display of the display means, a second effect of changing the visibility of the display of the display means by operating the movable role so as to overlap the display means, and a third effect of changing the visibility of the display of the display means by displaying a predetermined display on the display board 350. It will be
Therefore, it becomes possible to execute various effects, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Also, the first effect, the second effect, and the third effect can be executed independently, or can be executed in combination.
Therefore, it becomes possible to execute various effects, and the interest in the game can be improved.

The performance control means can display the first decoration game corresponding to the game and the second decoration game corresponding to the game and smaller in size than the first decoration game on the display means, so that the visibility of the second decoration game is higher than the visibility of the first decoration game when the third performance is executed.
Therefore, the progress of the game can be confirmed by at least the second decoration game.

Also provided is a starting memory means (game control device 100) for storing up to a predetermined upper limit number of starting memories, which is the right to execute the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball into the starting winning area (starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37), the effect control means can display the starting memory display showing information about the starting memory on the display means, and when the third effect is being executed, the visibility of the starting memory display is made higher than the visibility of the first decorative game.
Therefore, it becomes possible to check the information in the starting memory.

[Modified example 1 of support hit judgment]
In the above-described embodiment, the same random number as the big hit determination (big hit lottery) is used to perform small hit determination (small hit lottery) and support hit determination (support hit lottery). That is, in the above-described embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 19 to 26, a big hit determination, a small hit determination, and a support hit determination are performed using a big hit random number (see FIG. 7 (a)), and when the determination result is a big hit, the stop symbol information corresponding to the special symbol random number is acquired (see FIG. 7 (b)), and when the determination result is a small hit, the stop symbol information corresponding to the special symbol random number is acquired (see FIG. 7 (c)), when the determination result is a support hit, stop design information corresponding to the special symbol random number is acquired (see FIG. 7 (d)), and when the determination result is neither, stop design information for losing is acquired, but it is not limited to this.

For example, the support hit is derived only in the low probability state, but the support hit may be derived only in the normal game state ST14 (no low probability support). Also, the support hit may be derived regardless of the game state, or the support hit may be derived only when there is no general electric support (normal game state ST14, first specific game state ST11). In addition, it may be possible to select whether or not the support win can be derived based on the game state.

[Modified example 2 of support hit determination]
In the above-described embodiment, a lottery is performed using a common jackpot random number for the big win, the small win, and the support win, but the lottery may be performed using a lottery random number corresponding to each result. In this case, for example, distribution ratios as shown in FIG. 56 are obtained. Specifically, for example, a big hit determination and a small hit determination are performed using a big hit random number (see FIG. 56(a)), and when the determination result is neither a big hit nor a small hit, a support hit determination is performed using a support random number (see FIG. 56(d)).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the stop pattern information is acquired using a common special symbol random number for all of the big hit, the small win and the support hit, but the symbol random number corresponding to each result may be provided.
For example, when the determination result is a big hit, stop design information corresponding to the big hit design random number is acquired (see FIG. 56(b)), when the determination result is a small hit, stop design information corresponding to the small hit design random number is acquired (see FIG. 56(c)), and when the determination result is a support hit (i.e., "with support operation"), the stop design information corresponding to the support design random number is acquired (see FIG. 5). 6(e)), if the result of determination is neither, the stop symbol information of the missing symbol is acquired.

[Common process for special figure start switch]
In this modification, the game control device 100 executes the special figure starting opening switch common processing shown in FIG. 57 instead of the special figure starting opening switch common processing shown in FIG. In this special figure start opening switch common processing, the jackpot pattern random numbers which are the jackpot pattern random numbers are extracted and prepared in step A140, and the prepared jackpot pattern random numbers are saved in the jackpot pattern random number storage area of the RWM in step A141.
Next, a small winning design random number which is a small winning design random number is extracted and prepared (step A143), and the prepared small winning design random number is saved in the small winning design random number storage area of RWM (step A144).
After that, the support winning random number is extracted and prepared (step A150a), the prepared support winning random number is saved in the support winning random number storage area of the RWM (step A150b), the support winning design random number is extracted and prepared (step A149a), and the prepared support winning design random number is saved in the support winning design random number storage area of the RWM (step A150b). Step A149b).

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
In this modification, the game control device 100 executes a jackpot flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. 58(a) instead of the jackpot flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. 22(a). In this big hit flag 1 setting process, after performing the process of step A363, the support random number is loaded from the special figure 1 support random number storage area (for the reservation number 1) of RWM and prepared (step A374), and after performing the process (step A375) of clearing the special figure 1 support random number storage area (for the reservation number 1) to 0, the process moves to step A364. Further, the process of step A370 is not performed, and the support win can be derived regardless of the game state.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
In this modification, the game control device 100 executes the big hit flag 2 setting process shown in FIG. 58(b) instead of the big hit flag 2 setting process shown in FIG. 22(b). In this big hit flag 2 setting process, after performing the process of step A383, the support random number is loaded from the special figure 2 support random number storage area (for the reservation number 1) of RWM and prepared (step A394), and the special figure 2 support random number storage area (for the reservation number 1) is cleared to 0 (step A395), and then the process moves to step A384. Further, the process of step A370 is not performed, and the support hit can be derived regardless of the game state.

[Support hit determination process]
In this modified example, the game control device 100 executes support hit determination processing shown in FIG. 59 instead of the support hit determination processing shown in FIG. In this support hit determination process, after performing the processing of step A422, it is determined whether the value of the target support hit random number is less than the support hit lower limit determination value (step A423a).

Then, if the value of the target support hit random number is less than the support hit lower limit judgment value (step A423a; Y), that is, if it is not a support hit, a loss is set as the determination result (step A428), and the support hit determination process ends. Also, if the value of the target random number for the support hit is not less than the lower limit judgment value for the support hit (step A423a; N), it is determined whether it is in a high probability state (step A424). Then, if it is in a high probability state (step A424; Y), the support per upper limit judgment value in high probability is set (step A425), and it is determined whether the value of the target support per random number is greater than the support per upper limit judgment value (step A427a). Also, if it is not in a high probability state (step A424; N), the upper limit judgment value for the support hit in the low probability is set (step A426), and it is determined whether the value of the target random number for the support hit is greater than the upper limit judgment value for the support (step A427a).

If the value of the target support hit random number is greater than the support hit upper limit judgment value (step A427a; Y), that is, if it is not a support hit, set a loss as the determination result (step A428), and end the big hit determination process. Also, if the value of the target support hit random number is not greater than the support hit upper limit judgment value (step A427a; N), that is, if it is a support hit, the support hit is set as the determination result (step A429), and the support hit determination process ends.

The probability of winning the lottery for the supporter may be different for each probability set value, or may be the same. When the probability setting value is varied, for example, the lower the probability setting value, the easier it is to win the lottery for the supporter (that is, the setting 1 is the most likely to win, and the setting 6 is the least likely to win), or vice versa. Also, the probability of winning the lottery for the supporter may be different for each probability state of the big win, or may be the same. In the case of different probability states of big wins, for example, it is possible to make it easier to win in the low probability state (normal probability state) than in the high probability state, or vice versa. Also, it may be possible to win only when the probability is low. Moreover, the probability of winning the lottery per support may be different between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. - 特許庁

Also in this modification, the support hit may be derived only in the case of the normal game state ST14 (low-probability no support). Specifically, for example, in the normal game state ST14, if the determination result is neither a big hit nor a small hit, the support hit determination is performed using the support hit random number, if the determination result is a big hit, the stop symbol information corresponding to the big win symbol random number is acquired, if the determination result is a small win, the stop symbol information corresponding to the small win symbol random number is acquired, and if the determination result is a support win, the support hit symbol random number is acquired. Acquire the corresponding stop pattern information, and if the determination result is neither, acquire the stop pattern information of the deviation, and in the specific game state ST11 to ST13, without performing the support hit determination using the support hit random number, if the determination result is a big win, the stop symbol information corresponding to the small win symbol random number is acquired, and if the determination result is a small win, the stop symbol information corresponding to the small win symbol random number is acquired, and the determination result is a big win. However, if it is not a small hit, it is possible to acquire the out-of-order stop symbol information. That is, when it is in a high probability state or when it is in a general electricity support, the processing related to the support hit (steps A150a to A150b, steps A149a to A149b, steps A151a to A151d, steps A373a to A373b, steps A370 to A372, steps A393a to A393b, steps A390 to A392, etc.) may be skipped.
Alternatively, the support hit may be derived only in the low probability state (normal game state ST14, third specific game state ST13), or the support hit may be derived only in the case of no general electric support (normal game state ST14, first specific game state ST11).

[Modified example 3 of support hit determination]
Further, for example, without performing the support hit determination, it is possible to acquire the support hit design or the losing design using the special symbol random number. That is, if the game is not a big hit or a small hit, the stop symbol information corresponding to the special symbol random number may include the stop symbol information of the win and the support hit. In this case, for example, the distribution ratio is as shown in FIG. Specifically, for example, a big hit determination and a small hit determination are performed using a big hit random number (see FIG. 60 (a)), and when the determination result is a big hit, the stop symbol information corresponding to the special symbol random number is acquired (see FIG. 60 (b)), and when the determination result is a minor hit, the stop symbol information corresponding to the special symbol random number is acquired (see FIG. 60 (c)).

Then, when the determination result is neither a big hit nor a small hit and is in a low probability state, as the stop pattern information corresponding to the special symbol random number, stop design information of losing or stop design information of support hit is acquired (see FIG. 60 (d)).
In addition, when the determination result is neither a big hit nor a small hit and is in a high-probability state, stop symbol information of losing is acquired.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
In this modification, the game control device 100 executes a jackpot flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. 61(a) instead of the jackpot flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. 22(a). In this jackpot flag 1 setting process, the processes of steps A370 to A373 relating to the determination of the support hit are not performed. Therefore, in this modified example, the support hit determination process shown in FIG. 24 is not performed.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
In this modification, the game control device 100 executes the big hit flag 2 setting process shown in FIG. 61(b) instead of the big hit flag 2 setting process shown in FIG. 22(b). In this jackpot flag 2 setting process, the processes of steps A390 to A393 relating to the determination of the support hit are not performed.

[Special figure 1 stop pattern setting process]
In this modification, the game control device 100 executes a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process shown in FIG. 62 instead of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process shown in FIG.
In this special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, when the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step A440; N), it is determined whether it is in a low probability state (step A462). If it is in a low probability state (step A462; Y), a process (steps A447 to A452) is performed to select a deviation or per support by a special symbol random number using a special figure 1 per support symbol table in which the distribution value shown in the low probability column of FIG. 60 (d) is set. Moreover, when it is not in a low probability state (step A462; N), the process (step A453, A454) which sets a losing design is performed.

[Special figure 2 stop pattern setting process]
In this modification, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process shown in FIG. 63 instead of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process shown in FIG.
In this special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, when the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step A480; N), it is determined whether it is in a low probability state (step A502). If it is in a low probability state (step A502; Y), a process (steps A487 to A492) for selecting a deviation or per support by a special symbol random number using a special figure 2 per support symbol table in which the distribution value shown in the low probability column of FIG. 60 (d) is set is performed. Moreover, when it is not in a low probability state (step A502; N), the process (step A493, A494) which sets a losing design is performed.

Also in this modification, the support hit may be derived only in the case of the normal game state ST14 (low-probability no support). Specifically, for example, in the normal game state ST14 (no support with a low probability), when the determination result is neither a big hit nor a small hit, stop symbol information for a support win or stop symbol information for a loss may be acquired as stop symbol information corresponding to the random number for the support winning symbol.
Alternatively, the support hit may be derived only in the case of a high probability state (first specific game state ST11, second specific game state ST12), the support hit may be derived only when there is no general electric support (normal game state ST14, first specific game state ST11), or the support hit may be derived regardless of the game state.

[Modified example 4 of support hit determination]
The small winning pattern (result mode of the small winning) and the support winning pattern (result mode of the supporting win) may be used together. Concretely, for example, when combined symbols serving as small winning symbols and supporting winning symbols are provided and the combined symbols are stop-displayed on the display device 41 (and the collective display device 50), the chance mode (third specific game state ST13) may be entered after the small winning game state is finished.
In this case, for example, distribution ratios as shown in FIG. 64 are obtained. Specifically, for example, a big hit determination and a small hit determination are performed using a big hit random number (see FIG. 64 (a)), and when the determination result is a big hit, the stop symbol information corresponding to the special symbol random number is acquired (see FIG. 64 (b)).
Then, when the determination result is a small hit, as the stop pattern information corresponding to the special pattern random number, either a small hit A to C serving as a small hit design and a support design or a small hit D that is a small hit design that does not serve as a support design is acquired (see FIG. 64 (c)).

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
In this modification, the game control device 100 executes the jackpot flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. 61(a) instead of the jackpot flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. 22(a). In this jackpot flag 1 setting process, the processes of steps A370 to A373 relating to the determination of the support hit are not performed. Therefore, in this modified example, the support hit determination process shown in FIG. 24 is not performed.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
In this modification, the game control device 100 executes the big hit flag 2 setting process shown in FIG. 61(b) instead of the big win flag 2 setting process shown in FIG. 22(b). In this jackpot flag 2 setting process, the processes of steps A390 to A393 relating to the determination of the support hit are not performed.

[Special figure 1 stop pattern setting process]
In this modification, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process shown in FIG. 65 instead of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process shown in FIG.
In this special figure 1 stop pattern setting process, when the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step A440; Y), a high probability special figure 1 small hit pattern table in which the allocation value as shown in the high probability column of FIG. 64 (c) is set is set (step A463).

Next, it is determined whether it is in a low probability state (step A464), and if it is not in a low probability state (step A464; N), a small hit type is selected by a special symbol random number using a special symbol 1 per support symbol table for high probability (steps A441 to A445).
In addition, when it is in a low probability state (step A464; Y), a low probability special figure 1 small hit pattern table in which a distribution value is set as shown in the low probability column of FIG.

[Special figure 2 stop pattern setting process]
In this modification, the game control device 100 executes a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process shown in FIG. 66 instead of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process shown in FIG.
In this special figure 2 stop pattern setting process, when the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step A480; Y), a high probability special figure 2 small hit pattern table in which the allocation value as shown in the high probability column of FIG. 64 (c) is set is set (step A503).

Next, it is determined whether it is in a low probability state (step A504), and if it is not in a low probability state (step A504; N), a small hit type is selected by a special symbol random number using a special symbol 2 support per symbol table for high probability (steps A481 to A485).
In addition, if it is in a low probability state (step A504; Y), a low probability special figure 2 small hit symbol table in which the distribution value as shown in the low probability column of FIG.

Also in this modification, the support hit may be derived only in the case of the normal game state ST14 (low-probability no support). Specifically, for example, in the normal game state ST14 (no support with a low probability), when the determination result is neither a big hit nor a small hit, stop symbol information for a support win or stop symbol information for a loss may be acquired as stop symbol information corresponding to the random number for the support winning symbol.
Alternatively, the support hit may be derived only in the case of a high probability state (first specific game state ST11, second specific game state ST12), the support hit may be derived only when there is no general electric support (normal game state ST14, first specific game state ST11), or the support hit may be derived regardless of the game state.
Further, in the case of a support win, the number of times of support may be set to be one or more times, and in the case of a small win, the number of times of support may be selected to be 0 times. If 0 is selected as the number of times of support, the specific game state ends with the game. Conversely, in the case of a support win, 0 times may be selected as the number of times of support, and in the case of a small win, the number of times of support may be set to 1 or more.
In addition, in the case of a game machine performing a so-called two-type game in which only a small win can be won without a big win, a small win random number is used to draw a small win, and when the small win is won, a special pattern random number can be used to select the kind of the small win. In this case, 0 may be selected as the number of times of support.

As described above, a gaming machine that executes a game based on establishment of a starting condition and can generate a special game state when the result of the game results in a special result is provided with a game control means (game control device 100) for controlling the game and a normal variable prize winning device 37 that satisfies the starting condition by winning a game ball, and the special result includes a first special result (big win) with the operation of the condition device and a second special result (small win) without the operation of the condition device, The game control means can generate a normal game state, a specific game state in which winning to the normal variable prize winning device 37 is easier than in the normal game state, and a special game state; , the second special result, or the missing result.
Therefore, even in the case of the second special result, the specific game state can be generated, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modified example 5 of support hit determination]
Although the selection of the type of support hit is performed by the special symbol random number, it may be selected by the big hit random number.
For example, as a determination value of the big hit random number, the range of the support hit is divided into the ranges of the support hit A, the support hit B and the support hit C, and when the extracted big hit random number corresponds to the range of the support hit, the winning of the support hit and the pattern of the support hit may be set depending on which range it corresponds to. In this case, for big hits and small hits, the type is selected by the special symbol random number, but like the support hit, the type may be selected by the big hit random number instead of the special symbol random number.
Incidentally, in the case of a game machine that performs a so-called two-type game in which only a small win can be won without a big win, it is possible to similarly perform a lottery and selection of a support win using a small win random number for lottery of a small win.

[Other modification 1]
The normal variable winning device 37 may be arranged at a position where both left-handed and right-handed players can win (for example, the lower center of the game area 32). For example, in the case of a distribution in which support winning symbols (support winning A symbols, etc.) corresponding to a relatively small number of times of support are frequently stopped, the start and end of the chance mode occur frequently. In addition, when the normal variable winning device 37 is arranged at a position where both right-handed and left-handed players can win, a function (such as a nail or a flow path) for distributing game balls between the large winning opening and the normal variable winning device 37 may be provided at a position upstream of the large winning opening in the right game area. Incidentally, the support winning pattern corresponding to a relatively small number of times of support is not limited to the support winning A pattern corresponding to the number of times of support being 20 times, but can be appropriately changed, for example, the support winning pattern corresponding to the number of times of support being less than 5 times may be used.

[Other modification 2]
The result mode of the normal figure fluctuation display game may be provided with the support winning pattern (result mode of supporting support) without providing the support winning pattern (result mode of supporting hit) in the result mode of the special figure fluctuation display game. That is, instead of deriving the support hit in the special figure variation display game, the support hit may be derived in the normal figure variation display game.

[Other modification 3]
In the above-described embodiment, when the game is shifted to the chance mode, the right-handed instruction effect is always executed. That is, irrespective of the stopping support winning pattern (the number of times of support provided), the right-handed instruction effect is executed when the game shifts to the chance mode, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, only when a support winning pattern (support winning A pattern, etc.) corresponding to a relatively small number of times of support stops, a right-handed instruction performance may be executed when shifting to the chance mode, and the second start memory may be urged to accumulate. Incidentally, the support winning pattern corresponding to a relatively small number of times of support is not limited to the support winning A pattern corresponding to the number of times of support being 20 times, and can be appropriately changed, for example, the support winning pattern corresponding to the number of times of support being one time may be used.
Also, only when the first special figure variation display game after shifting to the chance mode is the special figure 1 variation display game, when the chance mode is shifted, the right-handed instruction performance may be executed to prompt the player to store the second starting memory.
Further, only when the normal game state ST14 is shifted to the chance mode, when the shift is made to the chance mode, the right-handed instruction effect may be executed to prompt the player to store the second start memory.

[Other modification 4]
In the present embodiment, when the general electric power is not supported, there is no reduction in the fluctuation time of the normal diagram fluctuation display game, and when the general electric power is supported, there is a short time for shortening the fluctuation time of the normal diagram fluctuation display game. For example, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern fluctuation display game executed when the general electric power is not supported may be the same as the fluctuation time of the normal pattern fluctuation display game executed when the general electric power support is in progress. As a result, it becomes possible to accumulate the second starting memory immediately after shifting to the chance mode. Since the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine that executes the special figure 2 variation display game with priority over the special figure 1 variation display game, by generating the second start memory before the first special figure variation display game ends after shifting to the chance mode, it becomes possible to execute the main variation (special figure 2 variation display game) after the first special figure variation display game, and the game can be progressed so as to be advantageous to the player.
When the fluctuation time of the normal pattern fluctuation display game executed when the general electric power is not supported is the same as the fluctuation time of the normal pattern fluctuation display game executed when the general electric power is supported, it is preferable to set the normal pattern hit probability to 0 when the general electric power is not supported.

[Other modification 5]
In the above embodiment, the number of times of support given this time is always notified when the chance mode is entered. That is, the number of times of support to be given this time is notified when the stop display time starts regardless of the winning support pattern (the number of times of support to be given) to be stopped, but the number of times of support to be given this time is not limited to this. Concretely, for example, when a supporting winning pattern corresponding to a relatively small number of supporting times (supporting winning A pattern, etc.) stops, even if the stop display time starts, the number of times of support to be given this time is not reported, and when other supporting winning patterns stop, when the stop display time starts, the number of times of support to be given this time may be notified. Incidentally, the support winning pattern corresponding to a relatively small number of times of support is not limited to the support winning A pattern corresponding to the number of times of support being 20 times, and can be appropriately changed, for example, the support winning pattern corresponding to the number of times of support being less than 10 times may be used.

[Other modification 6]
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 43 and 48, the right-handed instruction effect (instruction of the shooting direction) is started at the start of the variable display of the game to be executed next to the game (assist winning game) whose result is the specified result. That is, the right-handed instruction effect is started at the start of the variation display of the special figure variation display game executed first after shifting to the chance mode (t68, t78), but it is not limited to this. For example, the right-handed instruction performance may be started at the start of the variation time of the special figure variation display game (t67, t77) which is executed first after shifting to the chance mode, or at the start of the stop display time of the support winning game (t66, t76). Also, it may be started before the start of the stop display time of the support winning game (for example, during temporary stop display of the result of the support winning game).

[Other modification 7]
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 43 and 48, the chance mode notification effect is started at the start of the variable display of the game to be executed next to the game (assist winning game) whose result is the specified result. That is, the chance mode notification effect is started at the start of the variation display of the special figure variation display game executed first after shifting to the chance mode (t68, t78), but it is not limited to this. For example, the chance mode notification effect may be started at the start of the variation time of the special figure variation display game executed first after shifting to the chance mode (t67, t77), or at the start of the stop display time of the support winning game (t66, t76). Also, it may be started before the start of the stop display time of the support winning game (for example, during the temporary stop display of the result of the support winning game). Also, the chance mode notification effect and the right-hand hitting instruction effect may be started at the same timing, or may be started at different timings.

[Other modification 8]
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 43 and 48, the support number notification effect is started at the start of the stop display time of the support win game (t66, t76), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the support frequency notification performance may be started at the start of the variation time of the special figure variation display game first executed after shifting to the chance mode (t67, t77), or at the start of the variation display of the special figure variation display game first executed after shifting to the chance mode (t68, t78). Also, it may be started before the start of the stop display time of the support winning game (for example, during the temporary stop display of the result of the support winning game).

[Other modification 9]
In the present embodiment, the same random number is used to obtain the big winning pattern, the small winning pattern and the support winning pattern, but the big winning pattern, the small winning pattern and the supporting winning pattern may be obtained using different random numbers. In other words, different random numbers may be used as the big-hit pattern random number, the small-hit pattern random number, and the supporter-hit design random number, and the big-hit design, the small-hit design, and the supporter-hit design may be sorted.

[Other modification 10]
The gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is not limited to a gaming machine that preferentially executes the special figure 2 variation display game over the special figure 1 variation display game. That is, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment may be a gaming machine that preferentially executes one of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game over the other, or may be a gaming machine that executes the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in order of winning.

[Other modification 11]
The configuration of the game machine may be a so-called 1+2 type game machine in which a special game state is generated by winning a prize in the specific area 38h. FIG. 67 is a diagram exemplifying a game state transition diagram (game flow) showing transitions of game states in the gaming machine of this modified example.
The game state includes a normal game state ST14, a third specific game state ST13, a special game state ST15, and a small winning game state ST16. Also, in the gaming machine of this modified example, the probability of deriving a special result is always constant.

The normal game state ST14 is a state in which there is no electric power support for improving the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning, and there is no time reduction for shortening the variable time of the special figure variation display game or the normal figure variation display game. Also, the production mode that defines the production mode is the normal mode. The main variation special figure is the special figure 1 variation display game, the main starting area is the starting winning opening 36, and the shooting direction is left-handed in order to aim at this starting winning opening 36. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 1 variation display game is the main variation and the special figure 2 variation display game is the irregular variation.

The third specific game state ST13 is a state where there is a general electric support that improves the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning. If there is general electric support, there is also a time saving to shorten the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game and the general figure fluctuation display game. A performance mode that defines a performance mode is a chance mode. In addition, the main variation special figure is a special figure 2 variation display game, the main starting area is the normal variation winning device 37, and the shooting direction is right-handed in order to aim at this normal variation winning device 37. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 2 variation display game is the main variation and the special figure 1 variation display game is the irregular variation. When the special figure variation display game of the number of times of support is executed in this third specific game state ST13, it shifts to the normal game state ST14.

When a big hit is derived as a result of the special figure variation display game in the normal game state ST14 or the third specific game state ST13, the game shifts to the special game state ST15. Then, after the special game state ST15 ends, the game moves to the third specific game state ST13. The number of times of support in the third specific game state ST13 is determined by the kind of big win.

When a small hit is derived as a result of the special figure variation display game in the normal game state ST14 or the third specific game state ST13, the game moves to a small win game state ST16. Then, when the game ball flows into the specific area 38h (V winning) in the small winning game state ST16, the special game state ST15 is entered. After the end of the special game state ST15 in this case, the transition destination differs depending on the type of the derived small win, and if the number of times of support is set to 0, the game shifts to the normal game state ST14. Further, when the number of times of support is set to a value other than 0, the game moves to the third specific game state ST13. The number of times of support in the third specific game state ST13 is determined by the kind of small win.

When the game ball does not flow into the specified area 38h in the small win game state ST16, the transition destination differs depending on the type of the derived small win, and when the small win with the number of times of support set to 0, the game shifts to the normal game state ST14. In addition, when the number of times of support is set to a value other than 0, the game shifts to the third specific game state ST13. The number of times of support in the third specific game state ST13 is determined by the kind of small win.

FIG. 68 shows the allocation rate in the gaming machine of this modified example. All small hits also serve as support symbols, and the number of support times set for each is different. Incidentally, as in the first embodiment, the results of only the support symbols may be provided.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
In this modification, the game control device 100 executes the jackpot flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. 61(a) instead of the jackpot flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. 22(a). In this jackpot flag 1 setting process, the processes of steps A370 to A373 relating to the determination of the support hit are not performed. Therefore, in this modified example, the support hit determination process shown in FIG. 24 is not performed.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
In this modification, the game control device 100 executes the big hit flag 2 setting process shown in FIG. 61(b) instead of the big win flag 2 setting process shown in FIG. 22(b). In this jackpot flag 2 setting process, the processes of steps A390 to A393 relating to the determination of the support hit are not performed.

[Special figure 1 stop pattern setting process]
In this modification, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process shown in FIG. 65 in place of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process shown in FIG.

[Special figure 2 stop pattern setting process]
In this modification, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process shown in FIG. 66 in place of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process shown in FIG.

[Specific area switch monitoring process]
In the gaming machine of this modification, the process shown in FIG. 69 is performed in the specific area switch monitoring process (step A10) in the special game process. In this specific area switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not a small hit is in progress (step A41). During the small hit here is a period during which the small hit medium processing and the small hit remaining ball processing are performed. If the small hit is not in progress (step A41; N), the specific area switch monitoring process is terminated. That is, the specific area switch 38d is valid only during the small hit medium processing and the small hit remaining ball processing. Moreover, when it is during a small hit (step A41; Y), it is determined whether the condition device is operating (step A42).

If the condition device is in operation (step A42; Y), the specific area switch monitoring process is terminated. If the condition device is not in operation (step A42; N), it is determined whether there is an input to the specific area switch (step A43). If there is no input to the specific area switch (step A43; N), the specific area switch monitoring process is terminated. If there is an input to the specific area switch (step A43; Y), the specific area passage flag is set (step A44), and the specific area switch monitoring process ends. Afterwards, processing for generating a special game state is performed based on the existence of this specific area passing flag.

[Small hit remaining ball processing]
In the gaming machine of this modification, the processing shown in FIG. 70 is performed in the small hit remaining ball processing (step A18) in the special game processing. In this small hit remaining ball processing, first, it is determined whether or not a remaining ball error is occurring (step A861). If a remaining ball error is occurring (step A861; Y), the process proceeds to step A863. Also, if the remaining ball error is not occurring (step A861; N), it is determined whether the remaining ball counter is 0 (step A862). If the remaining ball counter is not 0 (step A862; N), the small hit remaining ball processing is terminated. Also, if the remaining ball counter is 0 (step A862; Y), the process for ending the small hits after step A863 is performed.

That is, after all the remaining balls in the first special variable winning device 38 are discharged, the process for ending the small winning is performed. However, in the case of a residual ball error in which discharge cannot be confirmed even after a predetermined time or more has passed since the game balls finally flowed into the first special variable winning device 38, it is assumed that the time required for discharge has passed sufficiently, and processing for ending the small winning is shifted to. Of course, when there is a remaining ball error, the processing for ending the small hit may not be performed. Therefore, the process of step A861 may not be performed.

In the processing for ending the small hit, first, it is determined whether or not the specific area has passed (step A863). When a gaming ball flows into and passes through the specific area 38h, it is detected by the specific area switch 38d and a specific area passing flag is set. Here, it is determined whether or not there is a specific area passage based on the presence or absence of the specific area passage flag. If there is passage through the specific area (step A863; Y), the process proceeds to step A870 to perform processing for generating a special game state. Moreover, when there is no specific area passage (step A863; N), it transfers to step A864, finishes a small hit game state, and performs the process for making a special figure variation display game executable.

In the processing for ending the small winning game state after step A864 and making the special figure variation display game executable, 10 for the small winning ending processing is set as the processing number (step A864), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A865). Next, the small winning ending time is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A866), and the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A867). Then, the big winning hole count area is cleared (step A868), the small hit middle control pointer area is cleared (step A869), and the small hit remaining ball processing is finished.

On the other hand, there is a passage through the specific area (step A863; Y), and when performing processing for generating a special game state after step A870, the command is loaded from the decoration special figure command area and prepared (step A870), and effect command setting processing is performed (step A871). Next, a V jackpot fanfare command is prepared (step A872), and effect command setting processing is performed (step A873).

After that, it is saved in the signal external information output data area regarding the start of the jackpot (V jackpot) (step A874), and the test signal regarding the start of the jackpot (V jackpot) is saved in the test signal output data area (for example, the condition device operating signal is ON, the character continuous operation device operating signal is ON, and the special pattern 2 winning signal is ON) (step A875).

Then, the number of the big win is saved in the game state display number area (step A876), the round number upper limit table is set (step A877), the round number upper limit value (10 in this modification) corresponding to the round number upper limit information is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit area (step A878). Furthermore, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area (step A879), and the initial value (here, 1) is saved in the round number area (step A880). Although 10 rounds are set as the upper limit of the number of rounds, 9 rounds are released in a special game state by setting 1 as the initial value of the number of rounds because the small win operation corresponds to the first round.

After that, set 3 for fanfare/interval processing as the processing number (step A881), and save in the special figure game processing number area (step A882). Further, the V jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A883), the fanfare/interval processing transition setting processing (step A884) is performed, and the processing proceeds to step A868.

With the configuration as described above, the following characteristic game progression is possible.
The third specific game state ST13 is a game state in which game balls flow into the specific area 38h in the small win game state ST16 associated with the derivation of the small win and there is a high possibility of shifting to the special game state ST15, so it is a game state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state ST14, and the longer this game state continues, the more advantageous it is to the player.
As the kind of the small win derived in the third specific game state ST13, if the small win with the number of times of support not being 0 is derived, the 3rd specific game state ST13 can be continued, but when the small win with the number of times of support being 0 is derived, the game state shifts to the normal game state ST14. That is, the derivation of a small hit with the number of times of support being 0 triggers the player to fall into a disadvantageous gaming state. By providing such a fall opportunity, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the third specific game state ST13.

In view of the above, a game machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a starting condition and that can generate a special game state in which a game value is awarded to a player when the result of the game becomes a special result is provided with a game control means (game control device 100) for controlling the game, and a normal variable winning device 37 that satisfies the starting condition when a game ball wins. The game control means can generate a normal game state, a specific game state in which winning to the normal variable prize winning device 37 is easier than in the normal game state, and a special game state, can generate a first special game state as a special game state based on the game result being the first special result, can generate the specific game state after generating the first special game state, and can be generated as the special game state based on the game result being the second special result. The second special game state can be generated, and when the second special game state is generated, the specific game state can be generated without generating the first special game state.
Therefore, since the specific game state can be generated based on the second special result that does not involve the operation of the conditional device, the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, the special variable winning device includes a first special variable winning device 38 and a second special variable winning device 39, and has a specific area 38h into which the game ball that has won the first special variable winning device 38 can flow, and based on the derivation of the first special result or the flow into the specific region 38h, it is possible to execute the first special game state in which the second special variable winning device 39 can be changed to the open state, and based on the derivation of the second special result, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened. A second special game state that can be converted to a state can be executed, and the game control means sets the number of executions of the special figure variation display game executable in the specific game state according to the type of the derived special result, and when a special result is derived during execution of the specific game state, discards the remaining number of special figure variation display games that can be executed in the specific game state being executed and sets the number of executions based on the derived special result, and 0 times can be set as the number of executions set based on the special result. .
Therefore, by setting 0 times, it is possible to set to end the specific game state or not to start the specific game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, a starting prize winning port 36 for establishing a starting condition by winning a game ball is provided, the game control means can execute the first game as a game based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning port 36, can execute the second game as the game based on the winning of the game ball to the normal variable prize winning device 37, and can set the number of executions of the specific game state to 0 when the result of the second game is the second special result.
Therefore, by setting 0 times, it is possible to set the specific game state to end or not to start the specific game state, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

In addition, although the dual-purpose symbol serving as both the small winning symbol and the support winning symbol is used, it is also possible to provide a support symbol that does not serve both as the small winning symbol and the supporting winning symbol.
In this case, by providing a support symbol in which the number of times of support is 0 as the support symbol, the configuration similar to that of the above-described modification can be obtained.
Also, in the special figure 1 variation display game, only the small win with the number of times of support set to 0 is provided, but a small win with the number of times of support other than 0 may be provided, or no small win may be generated.

From the above, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment executes a game (special figure variation display game) based on the establishment of the starting condition, and is a gaming machine that can generate a special game state that gives a game value to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result. A game state control means (game control device 100) capable of generating a game state ST12, a third specific game state ST13) and a special game state, the game state control means can generate a specific game state after generating a special game state when a game result is a predetermined result (in this embodiment, a normal jackpot or a probability variable A jackpot) among special results, and when a game result is a specific result (support hit) different from the special result. is configured so that a specific game state can be generated without generating a special game state (see FIG. 8).

Therefore, since the specific game state (general electric support) is generated with a predetermined probability until the special game state is generated, it is possible to suppress the amount of money used by the player and the speed of reduction of the number of balls held by the player, thereby enhancing the amusement of the game.
Further, the specific game state (general electric support) is generated not only after passing through the special game state but also without passing through the special game state, so that the shift timing of the game state is increased, and the amusement of the game can be enhanced.
In addition, if the specific game state (general electric support) occurs frequently, gambling may become too high, but since the ball output in the specific game state (general electric support) is included in the ball output rate and the accessory ratio, if the specific game state (general electric support) occurs frequently, it is necessary to suppress the ball output in the special game state accordingly. Therefore, even if the specific game state (universal electric support) occurs frequently, the gambling nature does not become too high, and furthermore, it is possible to moderate the waves of the winning balls.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with setting means (game control device 100) for setting a period corresponding to the specific result as a specific game period (number of times of support) for generating a specific game state (second specific game state ST12, third specific game state ST13) when the result of the game (special figure variation display game) is a specific result (sapo hit), and the setting means is during setting when the game result becomes the specific result during the occurrence of the specific game state. By resetting the specified game period, the period corresponding to the specified result can be reset (see FIG. 10).
By constructing in this way, when a specific result (support hit) is derived during the specific game state (second specific game state ST12, third specific game state ST13), the specific game period (number of times of support) can be extended, so that the interest in the game is improved.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes setting means (game control device 100) for setting a period corresponding to the specific result as a specific game period (number of times of support) for generating a specific game state (second specific game state ST12, third specific game state ST13) when the result of the game (special figure variation display game) becomes a specific result (sapo win). A period obtained by adding a period corresponding to the specific result to the remaining period of the game period can be configured to be reset as the specific game period (see FIG. 11(a)).
By constructing in this way, when a specific result (support hit) is derived during the specific game state (second specific game state ST12, third specific game state ST13), the specific game period (number of times of support) is extended, so that the interest in the game is improved.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with effect control means (effect control device 300) that executes effects related to the game (special figure variation display game), and the effect control means includes a specific game state (second specific game state ST12, third specific game state ST13) generated after the occurrence of the special game state, and a specific game state (second specific game state ST12, third specific game state ST13) generated without the occurrence of the special game state. , can be configured to be executable.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to improve the interest of the specific game state (second specific game state ST12, third specific game state ST13).
It should be noted that the specific game state generated after the special game state (second specific game state ST12, third specific game state ST13) and the specific game state generated without the special game state (second specific game state ST12, third specific game state ST13) may be performed in different manners. As a result, it is possible to suggest whether it is a specific game state (second specific game state ST12, third specific game state ST13) generated based on the derivation of the special result (jackpot) or a specific game state (second specific game state ST12, third specific game state ST13) generated based on the derivation of the specific result (supporting win) by the performance executed during the specific game state, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

In addition, the same mode of performance may be executed in the specified game state (second specified game state ST12, third specified game state ST13) generated after the occurrence of the special game state and in the specified game state (second specified game state ST12, third specified game state ST13) generated without the occurrence of the special game state.
Specifically, for example, when the specific game state (second specific game state ST12, third specific game state ST13) generated after the special game state occurs and the specific game state (second specific game state ST12, third specific game state ST13) generated without the special game state (second specific game state ST12, third specific game state ST13) have the same specific game period (the number of times of support), the same mode of performance may be executed. That is, for example, the effect mode of the effect executed in the chance mode generated based on the derivation of the jackpot corresponding to the number of support times of 100 (in the case of the present embodiment, the normal jackpot) may be the same as the effect mode of the effect executed in the chance mode generated based on the derivation of the support win corresponding to the number of support times of 100 times (the support win B in the case of the present embodiment).

In addition, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with instruction means (effect control device 300) for instructing the game ball shooting direction that is advantageous to the player, and the instruction means can be configured to start instructing the shooting direction in response to the start of the next game to be executed when the result of the game is a specific result (support hit) (see FIGS. 43 and 48).
By configuring in this way, it is possible to accurately indicate the direction in which the game ball is to be shot, thereby improving the interest in the game.

[Special figure fluctuation display game and decorative special figure fluctuation display game]
Next, a special figure variation display game on the collective display device 50 and a variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) on the display device 41 will be described with reference to FIGS.

71 and 72 show a case where the special figure 1 variation display game is executed after the special figure 1 variation display game in which the result is "big win". FIG. 71 is an example of display on the display device 41 and the collective display device 50, and FIG. 72 is an example of a timing chart.
FIG. 71(a) shows a state in which the first starting memory number is 1 and the second starting memory number is 0 during the stop display time of the special figure 1 variable display game in which the result is "loss". Here, since the game result is "lost", in the display device 41, the display modes of the first decorative game display section 81 and the second decorative game display section 82 are "123", which is one of the "loose" result modes. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 71 (a), the display mode of the special figure 2 indicator 52 is also "off" result mode (the LED lamp B0 is turned on and the LED lamps B1 to B7 are turned off).

Also, here, it is during the stop display time of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the number of the first starting memory is 1 and the number of the second starting memory is 0, so in the display device 41, the numerical value of the first starting memory number display section 85a is "1", and the numerical value of the second starting memory number display section 85b is "0". start memory display) is displayed. In addition, in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 pending indicator 53 corresponds to "one special figure pending" (the LED lamp C0 is turned on and the LED lamp C1 is turned off (see FIG. 4(d))), and the display mode of the special figure 2 pending indicator 54 is a mode corresponding to "no special figure pending" (the LED lamps C2 and C3 are turned off (see FIG. 4(d))).

Here, since the game result is ``losing'' and the number of first start memories is 1 and the number of second start memories is 0, when the stop display time ends, the special figure variation display game and the decoration special figure variation display game are finished, and the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game, which is the next special figure variation display game, starts. When the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game starts, as shown in FIG. 71 (b), in the display device 41, the decoration special figure starting memory display at the left end of the standby memory display section 83 is displayed to move to the running memory display section 84, and the numerical value of the first starting memory number display section 85a changes. Here, since the first starting memory is digested and becomes 0, the decorative special figure starting memory display (decorating special figure starting memory display corresponding to the first starting memory) of the standby memory display unit 83 becomes 0, and the numerical value of the first starting memory number display unit 85a becomes "0". In addition, in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 reservation indicator 53 changes, and the mode corresponding to "no special figure reservation" (the mode in which the LED lamps C0 and C1 are turned off (see FIG. 4 (d))).

When the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game, the variation display of the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game starts on the display device 41, and the variation display of the special figure 1 variation display game starts on the collective display device 50. Specifically, the variable display of the identification information (large symbols) is started in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas of the first decoration game display portion 81, and the variable display of the identification information (small symbols) is started in each of the left, middle, and right areas of the second decoration game display portion 82. In addition, the variable display on the special figure 1 indicator 51, that is, the mode corresponding to "varying" (the LED lamps A0, A2, A4, and A6 are lit and the LED lamps A1, A3, A5, and A7 are lit alternately). Thus, in the present embodiment, the special figure variation display game and the decorative special figure variation display game are started when the variation time starts, but the variation display does not start, and when the first predetermined time has passed from the start of the variation time, the variation display of the special figure variation display game and the decoration special figure variation display game is started.

When a game ball wins into the start winning opening 36 during execution of the special figure 1 variable display game and the first start memory (first special figure reservation) is generated, as shown in FIG.

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t11), as shown in FIGS. 71(d) and 72, in the display device 41, the variable display ends and the game result is displayed on the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82, and the decoration special figure start memory display (decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory) of the running memory display portion 84 disappears. Further, in the batch display device 50, the variable display is finished and the game result is displayed on the special figure 1 display device 51. FIG. Here, since the game result is a "big hit", the display mode of the first decorative game display section 81 and the second decorative game display section 82 in the display device 41 is "333" which is one mode of the result modes of the "big win", and in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 is one mode of the result modes of the "big win".

In addition, here, the game result is "big hit", the first start memory number is 1 and the second start memory number is 0, so when the stop display time ends, the special figure variation display game and the decorative special figure variation display game end and the first special game state starts (t12). When the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variable display game starts, as shown in FIG. 71 (f), in the display device 41, the decorative special figure starting memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 is displayed during execution. Along with the display of moving to the memory display unit 84, the numerical value of the first starting memory number display unit 85a changes, and in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 pending display 53 changes.

In this embodiment, the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 are hidden at the same time as the special game state starts, and then the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 reappear at the same time as the fluctuation time starts. That is, the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 become invisible at the same time as the special game state starts, and become visible at the same time as the change time starts. Then, the result of the previous special figure variation display game is first displayed in the reappearing first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 . Here, since the result of the previous special figure variation display game is ``333'' (see FIG. 71(d)), as shown in FIGS. Since the variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game is started when the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable time, during the period from the start of the variable time until the first predetermined time elapses (t13 to t14), the display modes of the first decorative game display section 81 and the second decorative game display section 82 do not change, and the state in which "333" is stopped is maintained.

In addition, the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 of the collective display device 50 is maintained in the same display mode as before the start of the special game state (see FIG. 71(d)) even during the special game state. Then, since the variation display of the special figure variation display game is also started at the time when the first predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation time, as shown in FIG. 72, from the start of the stop display time to the start of the variation display of the decoration special figure variation display game (t11 to t14), the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 does not change.

When the first predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation time (t14), as shown in FIG. 72, the first decoration game display section 81 of the display device 41 initially performs low-speed variation (variation display at an identifiable speed), the variation speed gradually increases during this low-speed variation (t14 to t15), and eventually high-speed variation (variation display at a difficult-to-identify speed) as shown in FIG. 71(f) is performed (t15 to t16). After that, as shown in FIG. 71(g), the high-speed fluctuation ends and the low-speed fluctuation starts (t16). During this low-speed fluctuation, the fluctuation speed gradually decreases (t16 to t17), and eventually a temporary stop state occurs (t17 to t19).

As shown in FIG. 71(g), the identification information of the first decorative game display section 81 starts slow fluctuation in the order of the left fluctuation display area, the right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area, and then enters the temporary stop state in the order of the left fluctuation display area, the right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area. In the temporary stop state, the identification information is displayed so as to sway, indicating that the vehicle is not completely stopped. As shown in FIG. 71(h), when the same identification information temporarily stops in the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area, the reach state is entered and the reach fluctuation starts (t18).
For the sake of convenience, FIG. 72 shows only the timing of the identification information displayed in the leftward movement display area as the identification information (large pattern) of the first decoration game display portion 81 . Therefore, in FIG. 72, "t14" is the timing at which the identification information (left pattern) displayed in the left fluctuation display area starts to fluctuate at low speed, and the timing at which the identification information (right pattern) displayed in the right fluctuation display area and the identification information (middle pattern) displayed in the middle fluctuation display area start to fluctuate at low speed is between "t14" and "t15." Further, 't16' is the timing at which the left pattern ends high-speed fluctuation (low-speed fluctuation starts), and the timing at which the right and middle patterns end high-speed fluctuation (low-speed fluctuation starts) is between 't16' and 't17'. Further, 't17' is the timing at which the left pattern starts to temporarily stop, 't18' is the timing at which the right pattern starts to temporarily stop, and the timing at which the middle pattern starts to temporarily stop is between 't18' and 't19'.

On the other hand, in the second decoration game display section 82 of the display device 41, high-speed variation is performed from the beginning to the end. That is, from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable time (t14 to t19), the display mode of the identification information (small symbols) on the second decoration game display section 82 is maintained in the high-speed variable display mode. Further, in the batch display device 50, from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable time (t14 to t19), the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 or the special figure 2 indicator 52 (here, the special figure 1 indicator 51) is maintained in a mode corresponding to "during variation".

Then, when the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game ends and the stop display time starts (t19), as shown in FIGS. 71(i) and 72, in the display device 41, the variation display ends and the game result is displayed on the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82, and the decoration special figure start memory display (decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory) of the running memory display portion 84 disappears. Further, in the batch display device 50, the variable display is finished and the game result is displayed on the special figure 1 display device 51. FIG. After that, the special figure variation display game and the decorative special figure variation display game are terminated with the end of the stop display time. Here, the game result is "lost", and since there is no starting memory, the state shifts to the customer waiting state. In addition, if there is a starting memory, the next special figure fluctuation display game will start. Also, if the result is a big hit, it will be in the first special game state, and if it is a small hit, it will be in the second special game state.

Of course, even when the game result is "hit", the game progresses in the same way as when the game result is "lose". That is, when the game result is "hit", only FIG. 71(i) is different among FIGS. 71(a) to (i). Specifically, when the game result is "win", the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 is one of the "hit" result modes in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 71 and 72, when the special figure 1 variation display game is executed after the special figure 1 variation display game whose result is "big win", at the start of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next (t13 to t14), the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 of the display device 41 is the result mode of "big hit", and the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 of the collective display device 50 is the "big win". This is the result mode of
Therefore, in this case, in a state in which the stop symbols (jackpot symbols) of the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 and the stop symbols (jackpot symbols) of the special figure 1 display device 51 are aligned, the variation display of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next (variation display on the special figure 1 display device 51) and the variation display of the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next (first decoration game display portion 81 and second decoration game display portion 81 and second decoration game display portion 81) Variable display on the decoration game display section 82) is started.

Similarly, when the special figure 1 variation display game is executed after the special figure 1 variation display game whose result is "small hit", or when the special figure 1 variation display game is performed after the special figure 1 variation display game whose result is "lost", the variation display of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next and the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next are similarly matched with the stop symbols of the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 1 display device 51. The variable display of the decoration special figure variable display game corresponding to the FIG. 1 variable display game is started.

That is, when the special figure 1 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 1 variation display game, the stop symbols of the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 1 display unit 51 are matched.
Similarly, when the special figure 2 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 2 variation display game, the stop symbols of the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 2 display unit 52 are matched.

73 and 74 show the case where the special figure 2 variation display game is executed after the special figure 1 variation display game with the result of "big hit". FIG. 73 shows an example of display on the display device 41 and the collective display device 50, and FIG. 74 shows an example of a timing chart. Since FIGS. 73(a) and (b) show the same state as FIGS. 71(a) and (b), description thereof will be omitted.
When the game ball wins the normal variable winning device 37 during execution of the special figure 1 variable display game and the second start memory (second special figure reservation) is generated, as shown in FIG.

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t21), as shown in FIGS. 73(d) and 74, in the display device 41, the variable display ends and the game result is displayed on the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82, and the decoration special figure start memory display (decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory) of the running memory display portion 84 disappears. Further, in the batch display device 50, the variable display is finished and the game result is displayed on the special figure 1 display device 51. FIG. Here, since the game result is a "big hit", the display mode of the first decorative game display section 81 and the second decorative game display section 82 in the display device 41 is "333" which is one mode of the result modes of the "big win", and in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 is one mode of the result modes of the "big win".

In addition, here, the game result is a "big hit", the number of first starting memory is 0 and the number of second starting memory is 1, so when the stop display time ends, the special figure variation display game and the decorative special figure variation display game end and the first special game state starts (t22), and when the ending time of the big win ends, the first special game state ends and the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game which is the next special figure variation display game starts (t23). When the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game starts, in the display device 41, as shown in FIG. 73 (e), the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the second start memory is displayed in the standby memory display unit 83. After that, as shown in FIG. Also, in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 pending display 54 changes.

In addition, in this embodiment, the time from the start of the variable time to the start of the transition effect (effect to display the transition of the decorative special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 to the running memory display unit 84) is, when the special figure 1 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 1 variation display game (Fig. When executing the variation display game, when executing the special figure 2 variation display game after the special figure 1 variation display game (see FIGS. 73(e) and (f)), and when executing the special figure 1 variation display game after the special figure 2 variation display game. In this embodiment, the time from the start of the variable time to the start of the transition effect is set to, for example, a second predetermined time that is shorter than the first predetermined time (the time from the start of the variable time to the start of the variable display).

Further, in the present embodiment, the decorative special figure starting memory display corresponding to the first starting memory has a circular shape, and the decorative special figure starting memory display corresponding to the second starting memory has a hexagonal shape. That is, in the present embodiment, by making the shape of the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory and the shape of the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the second start memory different, it is notified whether the decoration special figure start memory display being displayed corresponds to the first start memory or the second start memory. Of course, by changing the display mode (for example, color and size) other than the shape, it may be notified whether the decoration special figure start memory display being displayed corresponds to the first start memory or the second start memory.

As described above, in this embodiment, the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 are hidden at the same time as the special game state is started, and then the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 are reappeared at the same time as the change time is started. Then, the result of the previous special figure variation display game is first displayed in the reappearing first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 . Here, since the result of the previous special figure variation display game is ``333'' (see FIG. 73(d)), as shown in FIGS. Since the variable display of the decoration special figure variable display game is started when the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable time, during the period from the start of the variable time to the elapse of the first predetermined time (t23 to t24), the display modes of the first decorative game display part 81 and the second decorative game display part 82 do not change, and the state in which "333" is stopped is maintained.

In addition, the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 of the collective display device 50 is maintained in the same display mode as before the start of the special game state (see FIG. 73(d)) even during the special game state. Then, since the variation display of the special figure variation display game is also started when the first predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation time, as shown in FIG. 74, from the start of the stop display time to the start of the variation display of the decoration special figure variation display game (t21 to t24), the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 does not change.

When the first predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation time (t24), as shown in FIG. 74, the first decoration game display section 81 of the display device 41 initially performs low-speed variation (variation display at an identifiable speed), the variation speed gradually increases during this low-speed variation (t24-t25), and eventually high-speed variation (variation display at a difficult-to-identify speed) as shown in FIG. 73(f) is performed (t25-t26). After that, as shown in FIG. 73(g), the high-speed fluctuation ends and the low-speed fluctuation starts (t26). During this low-speed fluctuation, the fluctuation speed gradually decreases (t26-t27), and eventually a temporary stop state occurs (t27-t29). As shown in FIG. 73(h), when the same identification information temporarily stops in the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area, the reach state is entered and the reach fluctuation starts (t28).
For the sake of convenience, FIG. 74 shows only the timing of the identification information displayed in the leftward movement display area as the identification information (large pattern) of the first decoration game display portion 81 .

On the other hand, in the second decoration game display section 82 of the display device 41, high-speed variation is performed from the beginning to the end. That is, from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable time (t24-t29), the display mode of the identification information (small symbols) on the second decoration game display section 82 is maintained in the high-speed variable display mode. Further, in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 or the special figure 2 indicator 52 (here, the special figure 2 indicator 52) is maintained in a mode corresponding to "during variation" from the start of the variation display to the end of the variation time (t24 to t29).

Then, when the variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t29), as shown in FIGS. 73(i) and 74, in the display device 41, the variable display ends and the game result is displayed on the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82, and the decoration special figure start memory display (decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the second start memory) of the running memory display portion 84 disappears. Further, in the batch display device 50, the variable display is finished and the game result is displayed on the special figure 2 display device 52. After that, the special figure variation display game and the decorative special figure variation display game are terminated with the end of the stop display time. Here, the game result is "lost", and since there is no starting memory, the state shifts to the customer waiting state.

Of course, even when the game result is "hit", the game progresses in the same way as when the game result is "lose". That is, when the game result is "hit", only FIG. 73(i) is different among FIGS. 73(a) to (i). Specifically, when the game result is "hit", in FIG. 73 (i), the display mode of the first decorative game display section 81 and the second decorative game display section 82 is one of the "hit" result modes, and the display mode of the special figure 2 display 52 is one of the "hit" result modes.

As shown in FIGS. 73 and 74, when the special figure 2 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 1 variation display game whose result is "big hit", at the start of the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed next (t23 to t24), the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 of the display device 41 is the result mode of "big hit". Also, at the start of the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed next (t23 to t24), the result of the previous special figure 2 variation display game is displayed on the special figure 2 display device 52 of the collective display device 50. Therefore, if the result of the previous special figure 2 variation display game is "missing", as shown in FIGS. The display mode of the device 52 is the "miss" result mode.

Therefore, when the special figure 2 display device 52 of the collective display device 50 is stopped displaying the result mode of "lost", and the special figure 2 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 1 variation display game whose result is "big hit", the special figure 2 to be executed next in a state where the stop symbols (big hit symbols) of the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 (big hit symbols) and the stop symbols (lost symbols) of the special figure 2 display device 52 do not match. The variation display of the variation display game (variation display on the special figure 2 display device 52) and the variation display of the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed next (the first decoration game display section 81 and the variation display in the second decoration game display section 82) will be started.

Also, when the special figure 2 display device 52 of the collective display device 50 stops displaying the result mode of "losing", and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed next to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game whose result is "small hit", the stop pattern (minor winning pattern) of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 and the stop pattern (loss pattern) of the special figure 2 display device 52 do not match. The variation display of the FIG. 2 variation display game and the variation display of the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed next are started.

That is, when the special figure 2 display device 52 of the collective display device 50 is stopped displaying the result mode of "missing", and the special figure 2 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 1 variation display game whose result is "hit", the special figure 2 variation display to be executed next in a state where the stop symbols (hit symbols) of the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 (hit symbols) and the stop symbols (lost symbols) of the special figure 2 display device 52 do not match. The variation display of the game and the variation display of the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed next are started.

When the special figure 2 display device 52 of the collective display device 50 stops displaying the result mode of "losing", and when the special figure 2 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 1 variation display game whose result is "hit", in order to start the variation display in a state where the stop symbols of the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 2 display device 52 are consistent, At the start of the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed next (t 23 to t24), it is necessary to display the result mode of "lose" on the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 (the result mode of "loss" may be displayed after displaying the result of the previous game (result mode of "hit"), or the result mode of "loss" may be displayed without displaying the result of the previous game). Alternatively, at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed next (t23 to t24), it is necessary to display the result mode of "hit" on the special figure 2 display device 52.

In this case, the player may have the illusion that the special figure fluctuation display game has been executed even though the special figure starting memory has not been digested. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even if the stop symbols of the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 2 display device 52 are inconsistent, the special figure 2 variation display game and the variation display of the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game are started while inconsistent, so that it is possible to avoid erroneous recognition of the game situation, and it is possible to smoothly proceed with the variation display game without making the player feel uncomfortable.

FIG. 75 and FIG. 76 show the case where the special figure 1 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 2 variation display game in which the result is "big hit". FIG. 75 shows an example of display on the display device 41 and the collective display device 50, and FIG. 76 shows an example of a timing chart.
FIG. 75(a) shows a state in which the first start memory number is 0 and the second start memory number is 1 during the stop display time of the special figure 2 variable display game in which the result is "miss". Here, since the game result is "lost", the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 in the display device 41 is "123", which is one of the "loose" result modes. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 75(a), the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 is also the result mode of "off".

And here, since the game result is "lost" and the number of the first starting memories is 0 and the number of the second starting memories is 1, when the stop display time ends, the special figure variation display game and the decoration special figure variation display game are finished, and the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game which is the next special figure variation display game is started. When the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game starts, as shown in FIG. 75 (b), in the display device 41, the decorative special figure starting memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 is displayed during execution. Along with the display of moving to the memory display unit 84, the numerical value of the second starting memory number display unit 85b changes, and in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 pending display 54 changes.

When the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game, the variation display of the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game starts on the display device 41, and the variation display of the special figure 2 variation display game starts on the collective display device 50.
When a game ball wins into the start winning hole 36 during execution of the special figure 2 variable display game and the first start memory (first special figure reservation) is generated, as shown in FIG.

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t31), as shown in FIGS. 75(d) and 76, in the display device 41, the variable display ends and the game result is displayed on the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82, and the decoration special figure start memory display (decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the second start memory) of the running memory display portion 84 disappears. Further, in the batch display device 50, the variable display is finished and the game result is displayed on the special figure 2 display device 52. Here, since the game result is a "big hit", the display mode of the first decoration game display part 81 and the second decoration game display part 82 in the display device 41 is "333" which is one mode of the result modes of the "big hit", and in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 display device 52 is one mode of the result modes of the "big hit".

In addition, here, the game result is "big hit", the first start memory number is 1, and the second start memory number is 0, so when the stop display time ends, the special figure variation display game and the decorative special figure variation display game end and the first special game state starts (t32). When the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game starts, in the display device 41, as shown in FIG. 75(e), the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory is displayed in the standby memory display unit 83. After that, as shown in FIG. Also, in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 pending display 53 changes.

As described above, in this embodiment, the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 are hidden at the same time as the special game state is started, and then the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 are reappeared at the same time as the change time is started. Then, the result of the previous special figure variation display game is first displayed in the reappearing first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 . Here, since the result of the previous special figure variation display game is ``333'' (see FIG. 75(d)), as shown in FIGS. Since the variable display of the decoration special figure variable display game is started when the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable time, during the period from the start of the variable time to the elapse of the first predetermined time (t33 to t34), the display modes of the first decoration game display part 81 and the second decoration game display part 82 do not change, and the state in which "333" is stopped is maintained.

In addition, the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 of the collective display device 50 is maintained in the same display mode as before the start of the special game state (see FIG. 75(d)) even during the special game state. Then, since the variation display of the special figure variation display game is also started at the time when the first predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation time, as shown in FIG.

When the first predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation time (t34), as shown in FIG. 76, the first decoration game display section 81 of the display device 41 initially performs low-speed variation (variation display at an identifiable speed), the variation speed gradually increases during this low-speed variation (t34-t35), and eventually high-speed variation (variation display at a difficult-to-identify speed) as shown in FIG. 75(f) is performed (t35-t36). After that, as shown in FIG. 75(g), the high-speed fluctuation ends and the low-speed fluctuation starts (t36). During this low-speed fluctuation, the fluctuation speed gradually decreases (t36-t37), and eventually a temporary stop state occurs (t37-t39). As shown in FIG. 75(h), when the same identification information temporarily stops in the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area, the reach state is entered and the reach fluctuation is started (t38).
For the sake of convenience, FIG. 76 shows only the timing of the identification information displayed in the leftward movement display area as the identification information (large pattern) of the first decoration game display portion 81 .

On the other hand, in the second decoration game display section 82 of the display device 41, high-speed variation is performed from the beginning to the end. That is, from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable time (t34 to t39), the display mode of the identification information (small symbols) on the second decoration game display section 82 is maintained in the high-speed variable display mode. Further, in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 or the special figure 2 indicator 52 (here, the special figure 1 indicator 51) is maintained in a mode corresponding to "during variation" from the start of the variation display to the end of the variation time (t34 to t39).

Then, when the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game ends and the stop display time starts (t39), as shown in FIGS. 75(i) and 76, in the display device 41, the variation display ends and the game result is displayed on the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82, and the decoration special figure start memory display (decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory) of the running memory display portion 84 disappears. Further, in the batch display device 50, the variable display is finished and the game result is displayed on the special figure 1 display device 51. FIG. After that, the special figure variation display game and the decorative special figure variation display game are terminated with the end of the stop display time. Here, the game result is "lost", and since there is no starting memory, the state shifts to the customer waiting state.

Of course, even when the game result is "hit", the game progresses in the same way as when the game result is "lose". That is, when the game result is "hit", only FIG. 75(i) is different among FIGS. 75(a) to (i). Specifically, when the game result is "win", the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 is one of the "hit" result modes in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 75 and 76, when the special figure 1 variation display game is executed after the special figure 2 variation display game whose result is "big hit", the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 of the display device 41 is the result mode of "big hit" at the start of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next (t33 to t34). Also, at the start of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next (t33 to t34), the special figure 1 display device 51 of the collective display device 50 displays the result of the previous special figure 1 variation display game. The display mode of the device 51 is the "miss" result mode.

Therefore, when the special figure 1 display device 51 of the collective display device 50 stops displaying the result mode of "lost", and the special figure 1 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 2 variation display game whose result is "jackpot", the special figure 1 to be executed next in a state where the stop symbols (big hit symbols) of the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 (big hit symbols) and the stop symbols (loss symbols) of the special figure 1 display device 51 do not match. Variation display of the variation display game (variation display on the special figure 1 display device 51) and variation display of the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next (first decoration game display section 81 and variation display in the second decoration game display section 82) will be started.

Also, when the special figure 1 display device 51 of the collective display device 50 stops displaying the result mode of "losing", and the special figure 1 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 2 variation display game in which the result is "small hit", the stop pattern (small winning pattern) of the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 and the stop pattern (loss pattern) of the special figure 1 display device 51 do not match. The variation display of the FIG. 1 variation display game and the variation display of the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next are started.

That is, when the special figure 1 display device 51 of the collective display device 50 is stopped displaying the result mode of "losing", and the special figure 1 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 2 variation display game whose result is "hit", the special figure 1 variation display to be executed next in a state where the stop symbols (hit symbols) of the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 (hit symbols) and the stop symbols (lost symbols) of the special figure 1 display device 51 do not match. The variation display of the game and the variation display of the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next are started.

When the special figure 1 display device 51 of the collective display device 50 stops displaying the result mode of "losing", and when the special figure 1 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 2 variation display game in which the result is "hit", in order to start the variation display in a state where the stop symbols of the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 1 display unit 51 are consistent, At the start of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next (t 33 to t34), it is necessary to display the result mode of "lose" on the first decorative game display section 81 and the second decorative game display section 82 (the result mode of "loss" may be displayed after displaying the result of the previous game (result mode of "hit"), or the result mode of "loss" may be displayed without displaying the result of the previous game). Alternatively, at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next (t33 to t34), it is necessary to display the result mode of "hit" on the special figure 1 display device 51.

In this case, the player may have the illusion that the special figure fluctuation display game has been executed even though the special figure starting memory has not been digested. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even if the stop symbols of the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 1 display device 51 are inconsistent, since the special figure 1 variation display game and the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game are started while inconsistent, it is possible to avoid erroneous recognition of the game situation, and it is possible to smoothly proceed with the variation display game without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

FIGS. 77 and 78 show the case where the special figure 2 variation display game is executed after the special figure 1 variation display game with the result of "normal jackpot". FIG. 77 shows an example of display on the display device 41 and the collective display device 50, and FIG. 78 shows an example of a timing chart.
FIG. 77(a) shows a state in which the first start memory number is 1 and the second start memory number is 0 during the stop display time of the special figure 1 variable display game in which the result is "lost". Here, since the game result is "lost", the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 in the display device 41 is "123", which is one of the "loose" result modes, and in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 is the "loose" result mode. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 77(a), the display mode of the special figure 2 indicator 52 is one of the result modes of "probability variation big hit".

And here, since the game result is "lost" and the number of the first starting memories is 1 and the number of the second starting memories is 0, when the stop display time ends, the special figure variation display game and the decoration special figure variation display game are finished, and the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game which is the next special figure variation display game is started. When the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variable display game starts, as shown in FIG. 77 (b), in the display device 41, the decorative special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 is displayed during execution. Along with the display of moving to the storage display unit 84, the numerical value of the first start memory number display unit 85a changes, and in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 pending display 53 changes.

When the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game, the variation display of the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game starts on the display device 41, and the variation display of the special figure 1 variation display game starts on the collective display device 50.
When the game ball wins the normal variable winning device 37 during execution of the special figure 1 variable display game and the second start memory (second special figure reservation) is generated, as shown in FIG.

Then, when the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game ends and the stop display time starts (t41), as shown in FIGS. 77(d) and 78 , in the display device 41, the variation display ends and the game result is displayed on the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82, and the decoration special figure start memory display (decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory) of the running memory display portion 84 disappears. Further, in the batch display device 50, the variable display is finished and the game result is displayed on the special figure 1 display device 51. FIG. Here, since the game result is a "normal jackpot", the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 in the display device 41 is "222" which is one mode of the result modes of the "normal jackpot", and in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 is one mode of the result modes of the "normal jackpot".

In addition, here, the game result is "big win", the number of the first starting memory is 0 and the number of the second starting memory is 1, so when the stop display time ends, the special figure variation display game and the decorative special figure variation display game end and the first special game state starts (t42). When the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game starts, in the display device 41, as shown in FIG. 77 (e), the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the second start memory is displayed in the standby memory display unit 83. After that, as shown in FIG. Also, in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 pending display 54 changes.

As described above, in this embodiment, the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 are hidden at the same time as the special game state is started, and then the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 are reappeared at the same time as the change time is started. Then, the result of the previous special figure variation display game is first displayed in the reappearing first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 . Here, since the result of the previous special figure variation display game is ``222'' (see FIG. 77(d)), as shown in FIGS. Since the variable display of the decoration special figure variable display game is started when the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable time, during the period from the start of the variable time to the elapse of the first predetermined time (t43 to t44), the display modes of the first decoration game display part 81 and the second decoration game display part 82 do not change, and the state in which "222" is stopped is maintained.

In addition, the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 of the collective display device 50 is maintained in the same display mode as before the start of the special game state (see FIG. 77(d)) even during the special game state. Then, since the variation display of the special figure variation display game is also started at the time when the first predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation time, as shown in FIG. 78, from the start of the stop display time to the start of the variation display of the decoration special figure variation display game (t41 to t44), the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 does not change.

When the first predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation time (t44), as shown in FIG. 78, the first decoration game display section 81 of the display device 41 initially performs low-speed variation (variation display at an identifiable speed), the variation speed gradually increases during this low-speed variation (t44-t45), and eventually high-speed variation (variation display at a difficult-to-identify speed) as shown in FIG. 77(f) is performed (t45-t46). After that, as shown in FIG. 77(g), the high-speed fluctuation ends and the low-speed fluctuation starts (t46). During this low-speed fluctuation, the fluctuation speed gradually decreases (t46 to t47), and eventually a temporary stop state occurs (t47 to t49). As shown in FIG. 77(h), when the same identification information temporarily stops in the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area, the reach state is entered and the reach fluctuation starts (t48).
For the sake of convenience, FIG. 78 shows only the timing of the identification information displayed in the leftward movement display area as the identification information (large pattern) of the first decoration game display portion 81 .

On the other hand, in the second decoration game display section 82 of the display device 41, high-speed variation is performed from the beginning to the end. That is, from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable time (t44 to t49), the display mode of the identification information (small symbols) on the second decoration game display section 82 is maintained in the high-speed variable display mode. Further, in the collective display device 50, from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable time (t44 to t49), the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 or the special figure 2 indicator 52 (here, the special figure 2 indicator 52) is maintained in a mode corresponding to "during variation".

Then, when the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game ends and the stop display time starts (t49), as shown in FIGS. 77(i) and 78, the variation display ends and the game result is displayed on the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 in the display device 41, and the decoration special figure start memory display (the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the second start memory) of the running memory display portion 84 disappears. Further, in the batch display device 50, the variable display is finished and the game result is displayed on the special figure 2 display device 52. After that, the special figure variation display game and the decorative special figure variation display game are terminated with the end of the stop display time. Here, the game result is "lost", and since there is no starting memory, the state shifts to the customer waiting state.

Of course, even when the game result is "hit", the game progresses in the same way as when the game result is "lose". That is, when the game result is "hit", only FIG. 77(i) is different among FIGS. 77(a) to (i). Specifically, when the game result is "hit", in FIG. 77 (i), the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 is one of the "hit" result modes, and the display mode of the special figure 2 display 52 is one of the "hit" result modes.

As shown in FIGS. 77 and 78, when the special figure 2 variation display game is executed after the special figure 1 variation display game whose result is "normal big hit", the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 of the display device 41 is the result mode of "normal big hit" at the start of the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed next (t43 to t44). In addition, at the start of the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed next (t43 to t44), the result of the previous special figure 2 variation display game is displayed on the special figure 2 indicator 52 of the collective display device 50. Therefore, if the result of the previous special figure 2 variation display game is "probability variable big hit", as shown in FIGS. The display mode of the display 52 in FIG. 2 is the result mode of "probability variable jackpot".

Therefore, when the special figure 2 display device 52 of the collective display device 50 stops displaying the result mode of "probability variable big hit", and the special figure 2 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 1 variation display game whose result is "normal jackpot", the stop symbols (normal jackpot symbols) of the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 and the stop symbols (variability probability big hit symbols) of the special figure 2 display device 52 do not match. , The variation display of the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed next (variation display on the special figure 2 display device 52) and the variation display of the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed next (variation display in the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82) will be started.

Also, when the special figure 2 display device 52 of the collective display device 50 stops displaying the result mode of "normal big hit", and the special figure 2 variable display game is executed next to the special figure 1 variable display game whose result is "probable variable big hit", similarly, the stop symbols (variable probability big win symbols) of the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 and the stop symbols (normal big hit symbols) of the special figure 2 display device 52 do not match. In the state, the variation display of the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed next and the variation display of the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed next are started.

That is, when the result mode of the "first big win" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display 52 of the collective display device 50, and the result is the "second big win" different from the first big win, when the special figure 2 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 1 variation display game, the stop symbols (second big win symbols) of the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 2 display 52 (first big win) The variation display of the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed next and the variation display of the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed next are started in a state where the winning pattern is not matched.
Here, one of the "regular jackpot" and the "probability variable jackpot" is referred to as the "first jackpot" and the other is referred to as the "second jackpot", but the invention is not limited to this. For example, when one of ``10R jackpot'', ``7R jackpot'' and ``2R jackpot'' is set to ``first jackpot'' and the other one is set to ``second jackpot'', the variable display of the next game is similarly started in a state in which stop patterns are not matched.

For example, when the special figure 2 display device 52 of the collective display device 50 stops displaying the result mode of "probability variable big hit", and the special figure 2 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 1 variation display game whose result is "normal jackpot", in order to start the variation display in a state where the stop symbols of the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 2 display unit 52 match, the special figure 2 variation display to be executed next is performed. At the start of the game (t43 to t44), it is necessary to display the result mode of the "variable probability big hit" in the first decorative game display part 81 and the second decorative game display part 82 (the result mode of the "variable probability big win" may be displayed after displaying the result of the previous game (the result mode of the "normal big win"), or the result mode of the "variable probability big win" may be displayed without displaying the result of the previous game). Alternatively, at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed next (t43 to t44), it is necessary to display the result mode of "normal jackpot" on the special figure 2 display device 52.

In this case, the player may have the illusion that the special figure fluctuation display game has been executed even though the special figure starting memory has not been digested. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even if the stop symbols of the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 2 display device 52 are inconsistent, the special figure 2 variation display game and the variation display of the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game are started while inconsistent, so that it is possible to avoid erroneous recognition of the game situation, and it is possible to smoothly proceed with the variation display game without giving the player a sense of discomfort.
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the high probability state is reached depending on whether or not the game ball flows into the specific region (variable probability operation region). Therefore, even if the type of jackpot is a variable probability big hit, the high probability state does not occur unless the game ball flows into the specific region, and the high probability state occurs if the game ball flows into the specific region even if the type of jackpot is a normal jackpot.

79 and 80 show a case where the special figure 1 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 2 variation display game in which the result is "normal jackpot". FIG. 79 shows an example of display on the display device 41 and the collective display device 50, and FIG. 80 shows an example of a timing chart.
FIG. 79(a) shows a state in which the first start memory number is 0 and the second start memory number is 1 during the stop display time of the special figure 2 variable display game in which the result is "lost". Here, since the game result is "lost", the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 in the display device 41 is "123", which is one of the "loose" result modes. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 79(a), the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 is one of the result modes of "probability variation big hit".

And here, since the game result is "lost" and the number of the first starting memories is 0 and the number of the second starting memories is 1, when the stop display time ends, the special figure variation display game and the decoration special figure variation display game are finished, and the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game which is the next special figure variation display game is started. When the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game starts, as shown in FIG. 79 (b), in the display device 41, the decorative special figure starting memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 is displayed during execution. Along with the display of moving to the memory display unit 84, the numerical value of the second starting memory number display unit 85b changes, and in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 pending display 54 changes.

When the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game, the variation display of the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game starts on the display device 41, and the variation display of the special figure 2 variation display game starts on the collective display device 50.
When a game ball wins into the start winning hole 36 during execution of the special figure 2 variable display game and the first start memory (first special figure reservation) is generated, as shown in FIG.

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t51), as shown in FIGS. 79(d) and 80, in the display device 41, the variable display ends and the game result is displayed on the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82, and the decoration special figure start memory display (decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the second start memory) of the running memory display portion 84 disappears. Further, in the batch display device 50, the variable display is finished and the game result is displayed on the special figure 2 display device 52. Here, since the game result is a "normal jackpot", the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 in the display device 41 is "222" which is one mode of the result modes of the "normal jackpot", and in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 display 52 is one mode of the result modes of the "normal jackpot".

In addition, here, the game result is "big hit", the first start memory number is 1, and the second start memory number is 0, so when the stop display time ends, the special figure variation display game and the decorative special figure variation display game end and the first special game state starts (t52), and when the ending time of the big win ends, the first special game state ends and the variation time of the next special figure variation display game, the special figure 1 variation display game, starts (t53). When the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game starts, in the display device 41, as shown in FIG. 79(e), the decorative special figure starting memory display corresponding to the first starting memory is displayed in the standby memory display unit 83. After that, as shown in FIG. Also, in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 pending display 53 changes.

As described above, in this embodiment, the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 are hidden at the same time as the special game state is started, and then the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 are reappeared at the same time as the change time is started. Then, the result of the previous special figure variation display game is first displayed in the reappearing first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 . Here, since the result of the previous special figure variation display game is ``222'' (see FIG. 79(d)), as shown in FIGS. Since the variable display of the decoration special figure variable display game is started when the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable time, the display modes of the first decorative game display part 81 and the second decorative game display part 82 do not change and the state of stopping display of "222" is maintained until the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable time (t53 to t54).

Also, the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 of the collective display device 50 is maintained in the same display mode as before the start of the special game state (see FIG. 79(d)) even during the special game state. Then, since the variation display of the special figure variation display game is also started at the time when the first predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation time, as shown in FIG.

When the first predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation time (t54), as shown in FIG. 80, the first decoration game display section 81 of the display device 41 initially performs low-speed variation (variation display at an identifiable speed), the variation speed gradually increases during this low-speed variation (t54 to t55), and eventually high-speed variation (variation display at a difficult-to-identify speed) as shown in FIG. 79(f) is performed (t55 to t56). After that, as shown in FIG. 79(g), the high-speed fluctuation ends and the low-speed fluctuation starts (t56). During this low-speed fluctuation, the fluctuation speed gradually decreases (t56-t57), and eventually a temporary stop state occurs (t57-t59). As shown in FIG. 79(h), when the same identification information temporarily stops in the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area, the reach state is entered and the reach fluctuation starts (t58).
For the sake of convenience, FIG. 80 shows only the timing of the identification information displayed in the leftward movement display area as the identification information (large pattern) of the first decoration game display portion 81 .

On the other hand, in the second decoration game display section 82 of the display device 41, high-speed variation is performed from the beginning to the end. That is, from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable time (t54 to t59), the display mode of the identification information (small symbols) on the second decoration game display section 82 is maintained in the high-speed variable display mode. Further, in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 or the special figure 2 indicator 52 (here, the special figure 1 indicator 51) is maintained in a mode corresponding to "during variation" from the start of the variation display to the end of the variation time (t54 to t59).

Then, when the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game ends and the stop display time starts (t59), as shown in FIGS. 79(i) and 80, in the display device 41, as shown in FIGS. Further, in the batch display device 50, the variable display is finished and the game result is displayed on the special figure 1 display device 51. FIG. After that, the special figure variation display game and the decorative special figure variation display game are terminated with the end of the stop display time. Here, the game result is "lost", and since there is no starting memory, the state shifts to the customer waiting state.

Of course, even when the game result is "hit", the game progresses in the same way as when the game result is "lose". That is, when the game result is "hit", only FIG. 79(i) is different among FIGS. 79(a) to (i). Specifically, when the game result is "hit", in FIG. 79(i), the display mode of the first decorative game display section 81 and the second decorative game display section 82 is one of the "hit" result modes, and the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 is one of the "hit" result modes.

As shown in FIGS. 79 and 80, when the special figure 1 variation display game is executed after the special figure 2 variation display game whose result is "normal big hit", the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 of the display device 41 is the result mode of "normal big hit" at the start of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next (t53 to t54). In addition, at the start of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next (t53 to t54), the result of the previous special figure 1 variation display game is displayed on the special figure 1 display device 51 of the collective display device 50. Therefore, if the result of the previous special figure 1 variation display game is "probability variable big hit", as shown in FIGS. The display mode of the display 51 in FIG. 1 is the result mode of "probability variable jackpot".

Therefore, when the special figure 1 display device 51 of the collective display device 50 stops displaying the result mode of "variable probability big hit", and when the special figure 1 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 2 variation display game whose result is "normal jackpot", the stop symbols (normal jackpot symbols) of the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 and the stop symbols (variability probability big hit symbols) of the special figure 1 display device 51 do not match. , The variation display of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next (variation display on the special figure 1 display device 51) and the variation display of the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next (variation display in the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82) will be started.

Also, when the special figure 1 display device 51 of the collective display device 50 stops displaying the result mode of "normal big hit", and the special figure 1 variable display game is executed next to the special figure 2 variable display game whose result is "probable variable big hit", the stop symbols (variable probability big win symbols) of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 and the stopped symbols (normal big win symbols) of the special figure 1 display unit 51 do not match. In this state, the variation display of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next and the variation display of the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next are started.

That is, when the result mode of the "first big win" is stopped on the special figure 1 display device 51 of the collective display device 50, and the special figure 1 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 2 variation display game whose result is the "second big win" different from the first big win, the stop symbol (second big win symbol) of the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 and the stop symbol (first big win symbol) of the special figure 1 display device 51 The variation display of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next and the variation display of the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next are started in a state where the winning pattern is not matched.
Here, one of the "probability variable jackpot" and the "normal jackpot" is referred to as the "first jackpot" and the other is referred to as the "second jackpot", but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when one of ``10R jackpot'', ``7R jackpot'' and ``2R jackpot'' is set to ``first jackpot'' and the other one is set to ``second jackpot'', the variable display of the next game is similarly started in a state in which stop patterns are not matched.

For example, when the special figure 1 display device 51 of the collective display device 50 is stopped displaying the result mode of "probability variable big hit", and the special figure 1 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 2 variation display game whose result is "normal jackpot", in order to start the variation display in a state where the stop symbols of the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 1 display unit 51 match, the special figure 1 variation display to be executed next is performed. At the start of the game (t53 to t54), it is necessary to display the result mode of the "variable probability big hit" in the first decorative game display part 81 and the second decorative game display part 82 (the result mode of the "variable probability big win" may be displayed after displaying the result of the previous game (the result mode of the "normal big win"), or the result mode of the "variable probability big win" may be displayed without displaying the result of the previous game). Alternatively, at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next (t53 to t54), it is necessary to display the result mode of "normal jackpot" on the special figure 1 display device 51.

In this case, the player may have the illusion that the special figure fluctuation display game has been executed even though the special figure starting memory has not been digested. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even if the stop symbols of the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 1 display device 51 are inconsistent, since the special figure 1 variation display game and the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game are started while inconsistent, it is possible to avoid erroneous recognition of the game situation, and it is possible to smoothly proceed with the variation display game without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Thus, in this embodiment, at the start of the special figure 1 variation display game (between the start of the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game and the start of the variation display), when the stop symbols of the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 of the display device 41 match the stop symbols of the special figure 1 display device 51 of the collective display device 50, the decoration special figure variation corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 1 variation display game remains in the matching state. The variable display of the display game is started, and if there is no matching, the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game and the decoration special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game is started in the inconsistent state, so that the progress of the game can be smoothly performed.

Also, at the start of the special figure 2 variation display game (between the start of the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game and the start of the variation display), if the stop symbols of the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 of the display device 41 match the stop symbols of the special figure 2 display device 52 of the collective display device 50, the variation display of the special figure 2 variation display game and the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game is started while maintaining the matching state. Then, when they are not matched, the variation display of the special figure 2 variation display game and the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game is started in the unmatched state, so that the progress of the game can be smoothly performed.

Hereinafter, the case where the stop symbols of the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 1 display unit 51 match at the start of the special figure 1 variation display game, and the case where the stop symbols of the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 2 display unit 52 match at the start of the special figure 2 variation display game are simply referred to as "matching cases".
In addition, when the special figure 1 variation display game is started, the stop symbols of the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 and the special figure 1 display device 51 do not match, and when the special figure 2 variation display game starts, the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 and the special figure 2 display device 52 do not match the stop symbols.

In the above description, as an example of "when matching", the case where the special figure 1 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 1 variation display game, and the case where the special figure 2 variation display game is performed next to the special figure 2 variation display game. However, the "matching case" is not limited to these cases. For example, if the special figure 2 display device 52 of the collective display device 50 stops displaying the result mode of "jackpot" and the special figure 2 variation display game is executed after the special figure 1 variation display game with the result of "jackpot", or if the result mode of "loss" is stop-displayed on the special figure 2 display device 52 of the collective display device 50 and the special figure 2 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 1 variation display game with the result of "loss", "matching" is also performed. If you have

Also, in the above description, as an example of "if not consistent", when the result mode of "missing" is stopped on the special figure 2 display 52 of the collective display device 50 and the result is "hit", the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is followed by the special figure 2 variation display game (see FIGS. 73 and 74), and when the result mode of "missing" is stopped on the special figure 1 display 51 of the collective display device 50 and the result is "hit". When the special figure 1 variation display game is executed after the FIG. 2 variation display game (see FIGS. 75 and 76), when the special figure 1 variation display game is executed after the special figure 1 variation display game whose result is the "second jackpot" in the special figure 2 display 52 of the collective display device 50 (see FIGS. 77 and 78), and when the special figure 1 display 51 of the collective display device 50 displays the "first jackpot". When the result mode is stopped and the result is the "second big hit", the special figure 1 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 2 variation display game (see FIGS. 79 and 80). For example, when the special figure 2 variable display game is executed after the special figure 1 variable display game in which the result mode of "hit" is stopped on the special figure 2 display device 52 of the collective display device 50 and the result is "lost", or when the result mode of "either the big win or the small win" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device 52 of the collective display device 50, and the result is "either the other one of the big win or the small win", next to the special figure 1 variable display game. Also when executing the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, it becomes "if not consistent".

Here, the identification information (large pattern) of the first decoration game display unit 81 starts low-speed fluctuation (starts variable display) in the order of the left fluctuation display area, right fluctuation display area, and middle fluctuation display area, then starts high-speed fluctuation (finishes low-speed fluctuation) simultaneously in the left fluctuation display area, right fluctuation display area, and medium fluctuation display area, and then finishes high-speed fluctuation (starts low-speed fluctuation) in the order of the left fluctuation display area, right fluctuation display area, and medium fluctuation display area.
As shown in FIGS. 72, 74, 76, 78, and 80, the effect control device 300 changes the identification information (large pattern) of the first decoration game display section 81 at the start of the high speed fluctuation (t15, t25, t35, t45, t55) and at the end of the high speed fluctuation (t16, t26, t) in order to stop and display the desired result mode ("424" in this case) on the first decoration game display section 81. 36, t46, t56).

For example, in the examples shown in FIGS. 72, 74, and 76, since the result of the previous special figure variation display game is "333", the variation display starting from "333" is started (t14, t24, t34). Then, the performance control device 300 executes a first replacement process for replacing the variable display starting from ``333'' with the variable display starting from a predetermined fixed result mode (for example, ``123'') at the start of the high-speed fluctuation of the large pattern (t15, t25, t35). Further, at the end of the high-speed variation of the large pattern (t16, t26, t36), the variation display starting from the fixed result mode is replaced with the variation display starting from the result mode calculated based on the game result, the remaining variation time (t16 to t19, t26 to t29, t36 to t39) and the variation pattern (whether or not the ready-to-win state occurs, etc.).

In addition, in the examples shown in FIGS. 78 and 80, since the result of the previous special figure variation display game is "222", the variation display starting from "222" is started (t44, t54). Then, the performance control device 300 executes a first replacement process for replacing the variable display starting from ``222'' with the variable display starting from a predetermined fixed result mode (for example, ``123'') at the start of the high-speed fluctuation of the large pattern (t45, t55). Further, when the high-speed fluctuation of the large pattern ends (t46, t56), a second replacement process is executed to replace the fluctuation display starting from the fixed result mode with the fluctuation display starting from the result mode calculated based on the game result, the remaining fluctuation time (t46 to t49, t56 to t59), the fluctuation pattern (whether or not the ready-to-win state occurs, etc.).
Execution of these replacement processes is reserved, for example, in the variable command process (step C236 in FIG. 41).

In order to stop display a desired result mode on the first decorative game display section 81, it is also possible to replace the large symbols during low speed fluctuation or temporary stop display. However, in that case, the player may notice that the large pattern has been replaced, which may reduce the interest in the game. On the other hand, by replacing the large symbols during high-speed fluctuation as in the present embodiment, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the large symbols have been replaced.

It should be noted that the timing of replacing the large symbols can be appropriately changed as long as the large symbols are changing at high speed.
Also, the number of times the large pattern is replaced is not limited to two times and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the number of times of replacing the large symbol may be one, and in that case, it is preferable to perform only the second replacement process without performing the first replacement process. Specifically, for example, at the start of the high-speed variation of the large symbols (or after the start of the high-speed variation of the large symbols and before the end of the high-speed variation of the large symbols, or at the end of the high-speed variation of the large symbols), it is preferable to execute the second replacement process of replacing the variation display starting from the result mode of the previous special symbol variation display game with the variation display starting from the result mode calculated backward based on the game result or the like. Moreover, when the number of times of replacing the large pattern is plural times, it is preferable that the last replacement process is the second replacement process.

Further, in the first decoration game display section 81, the reach variation may be performed directly from the high speed variation without going through the low speed variation instead of performing the reach variation from the high speed variation via the low speed variation. When the low-speed variation is not passed, for example, at the end of the high-speed variation of the large symbols, a replacement process may be performed to replace the large symbols (for example, left and right symbols) temporarily stopped and displayed on the first decoration game display section 81 with desired ready-to-win patterns (desired ready-to-win patterns).

On the other hand, the identification information (small pattern) of the second decoration game display section 82 starts high-speed fluctuation (starts variable display) simultaneously in the left area, right area, and middle area, and then finishes high-speed fluctuation (finishes variable display) simultaneously in the left area, right area, and middle area.
As shown in FIGS. 72, 74, 76, 78, and 80, the effect control device 300 replaces the identification information (small symbols) of the second decoration game display section 82 at the end of the high-speed variation (t19, t29, t39, t49, t59) in order to stop and display the desired result mode (here, "424") on the second decoration game display section 82. Specifically, when the high-speed variation of the small symbols ends, a third replacement process is performed to replace the small symbols stopped and displayed on the second decoration game display section 82 with a desired result mode.
Execution of the third replacement process is reserved, for example, in the variable command process (step C236 in FIG. 41).

It should be noted that the timing of replacing the small symbols can be appropriately changed as long as the small symbols are changing at high speed. When the small patterns are replaced at a timing other than the end of the high-speed fluctuation of the small patterns, a first replacement process for replacing with a variable display starting from a predetermined fixed result mode may be executed, or a second replacement process for replacing with a variable display starting from a result mode calculated backward based on the game result, the remaining variable time, the variation pattern, etc. may be executed.
When executing the second replacement process for replacing the small symbols, the third replacement process need not be performed at the end of the high-speed fluctuation of the small symbols.
When executing the first replacement processing for replacing the small patterns, it is preferable to perform the second replacement processing for replacing the small patterns after the first replacement processing, or to perform the third replacement processing at the end of the high-speed fluctuation of the small patterns.

Also, the number of times that the small pattern is replaced may be one time or a plurality of times. If the number of times the small symbols are replaced is one, it is preferable to perform only the second replacement process without performing the first replacement process, or to perform only the third replacement process. Moreover, when the number of times that the small symbols are replaced is a plurality of times, the last replacement process should be the second replacement process or the third replacement process.

In this embodiment, the time from the start of the variable time to the start of the variable display is the same in the "matching case" (eg, t13-t14) and the "mismatching case" (eg, t23-t24, t33-t34, t43-t44, t53-t54).
In addition, the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the start of the high-speed fluctuation of the large pattern is the same in the "matching case" (eg, t14 to t15) and the "mismatching case" (eg, t24 to t25, t34 to t35, t44 to t45, t54 to t55).
In addition, the time from the start of the high-speed fluctuation of the large pattern to the end of the high-speed fluctuation of the large pattern is the same between the "matching case" (eg, t15-t16) and the "mismatching case" (eg, t25-t26, t35-t36, t45-t46, t55-t56).

In addition, the time from the start of the large pattern low speed fluctuation to the end of the large pattern low speed fluctuation is the same in the "matching case" (eg, t16 to t17) and the "mismatching case" (eg, t26 to t27, t36 to t37, t46 to t47, t56 to t57).
In addition, the time from the start of the temporary stop display of the large pattern to the start of the reach fluctuation of the large pattern is the same in the case of "matching" (eg, t17-t18) and the "case of mismatching" (eg, t27-t28, t37-t38, t47-t48, t57-t58).
In addition, the time from the start of the reach fluctuation of the large pattern to the end of the fluctuation time is the same for "matching" (eg, t18 to t19) and "not matching" (eg, t28 to t29, t38 to t39, t48 to t49, t58 to t59).

Thus, the time from the start of the fluctuation time to the start of the fluctuation display, the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the start of the high-speed fluctuation of the large pattern, the time from the start of the high-speed fluctuation of the large pattern to the end of the high-speed fluctuation of the large pattern, the time from the start of the low-speed fluctuation of the large pattern to the end of the low-speed fluctuation of the large pattern, the time from the start of the temporary stop display of the large pattern to the start of the large-pattern reach fluctuation, and the time from the start of the ready-to-win fluctuation of the large pattern to the end of the fluctuation time. By making each time the same for ``when matching'' and ``when not matching'', the variable time when starting variable display in a non-matching state and the variable time when starting variable display in a matching state can be made the same. That is, there is no need to determine whether or not there is a match when determining the fluctuation time (variation pattern).
It should be noted that at least one of these times may be different between "when matching" and "when not matching". If they are made different, it is necessary to determine whether or not they match when determining the variation time (variation pattern), so the processing load increases accordingly.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine that executes a variable display game (special figure variable display game) that variably displays identification information based on establishment of a starting condition, and that generates a special game state when the result mode of the variable display game becomes a special result mode. 1 display device 51), a second variable display means (special figure 2 display device 52) capable of displaying a second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) as a variable display game based on the establishment of the second start condition (a prize in the normal variable prize winning device 37), a game control means (game control device 100) for controlling the first and second variable display means, and a first decorative game that variably displays an identification pattern (large pattern) corresponding to the variable display game. and a second decoration game for variably displaying an identification pattern (small pattern) smaller than that of the first decoration game corresponding to the variation display game, and an effect display means (display device 41) capable of displaying and an effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the effect display means. There is a case where the result mode of the game (and/or the second decoration game) does not match, and in such a case, the game control means starts the variable display of the identification information in the second variable display game, and the effect control means starts the variable display of the identification pattern in the first decorative game (and/or the second decorative game) corresponding to the second variable display game (see FIGS. 73 and 77).

Therefore, at the start of the second variable display game (between the start of the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game and the start of the variable display), if the stop pattern of the effect display means (display device 41) and the stop pattern of the second variable display means (special figure 2 display device 52) do not match, the second variable display game and the first decorative game (and/or the second decorative game) corresponding to the second variable display game are started in the state of inconsistency, so the progress of the game is delayed. It can be performed smoothly, and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

The first variation display game may be the special figure 2 variation display game, and the second variation display game may be the special figure 1 variation display game (see FIGS. 75 and 79).
In this case, at the start of the second variable display game (between the start of the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game and the start of the variable display), if the stop symbol of the effect display means (display device 41) and the stop symbol of the second variable display means (special figure 1 display device 51) do not match, the variable display of the second variable display game and the first decorative game (and/or the second decorative game) corresponding to the second variable display game is started in the state of inconsistency, so the game progresses. can be performed smoothly, and the amusement of the game can be enhanced.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, if there is no consistency, at the end of the special game state in which the result mode of the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) becomes the special result mode ("win" result mode), the result mode stopped and displayed on the second variation display means (special figure 2 display device 52) is a result mode ("lost" result mode) other than the special result mode ("loss" result mode) and is the right to execute the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game). A case where the number of memories (first starting memory) is 0 and the number of starting memories (second starting memory) that is the right to execute the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) is 1 or more is included, in which case the game control means (game control device 100) starts variable display of the identification information in the second variable display game from a state in which the second variable display means stops displaying the result mode other than the special result mode after the end of the special game state, and the effect control means (effect control). The device 300) can be configured to start the variable display starting from the special result mode as the variable display of the identification symbols in the first decorative game (and/or the second decorative game) corresponding to the second variable display game after the end of the special game state (see FIGS. 73 and 77).

By configuring in this way, at the start of the second variation display game (from the start of the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game to the start of the variation display), if the stop symbol of the effect display means (display device 41) is a winning symbol and the stop symbol of the second variation display means (special figure 2 display device 52) is a winning symbol, the second variation display game and the first decoration game (and/or the second decoration game) corresponding to the second variation display game are changed in that state. Since the display can be started, the game can be smoothly progressed, and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

The first variation display game may be the special figure 2 variation display game, and the second variation display game may be the special figure 1 variation display game (see FIGS. 75 and 79).
In this case, at the start of the second variable display game (between the start of the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game and the start of the variable display), if the stop symbol on the effect display means (display device 41) is a winning symbol and the stopped symbol on the second variable display means (special figure 1 display device 51) is a winning symbol, the variable display of the second variable display game and the first decorative game (and/or the second decorative game) corresponding to the second variable display game can be started in that state. Therefore, the game can be smoothly progressed, and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

Further, the special result mode at the time when the special game state in which the result mode of the first variable display game is the special result mode is ended is not limited to the "win" result mode. That is, the special result mode may be only the result mode of "big win" among the result modes of "hit", only the result mode of "minor win" among the result modes of "hit", only the result mode of "probability variable big win" among the result modes of "hit", only the result mode of "normal big win" among the result modes of "hit", or the result of "10R jackpot" among the result modes of "hit". It may be only the mode, it may be only the result mode of "7R win" among the result modes of "hit", or it may be only the result mode of "2R win" among the result modes of "hit".

In this embodiment, the special figure 2 variation display game is preferentially executed over the special figure 1 variation display game. That is, the game control means (game control device 300) is configured to execute the special figure 2 variation display game with priority over the special figure 1 variation display game in a state where the start memory as the execution right of the special figure 1 variation display game and the start memory as the execution right of the special figure 2 variation display game are stored.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to execute the special figure 2 variation display game after the special figure 1 variation display game, at the end of the special game state in which the result mode of the special figure 1 variation display game is the special result mode, if the second start memory number is 1 or more, the first start memory number may not be 0 (that is, the first start memory number may be 1 or more).
That is, in a gaming machine in which the special figure 2 variation display game is executed with priority over the special figure 1 variation display game, when the first variation display game is the special figure 1 variation display game and the second variation display game is the special figure 2 variation display game, in order to execute the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) after the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game), at the end of the special game state in which the result mode of the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) has become the special result mode, " It is necessary to satisfy the condition that the number of starting memories (second starting memories) that is the right to execute the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) is 1 or more, but it is not necessary to satisfy the condition that ``the number of starting memories (first starting memories) that is the right to execute the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) is 0''.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in order to execute the special figure 1 variation display game after the special figure 2 variation display game, it is necessary that the first start memory number is 1 or more and the second start memory number is 0 at the end of the special game state that occurs when the result mode of the special figure 2 variation display game becomes the special result mode.
That is, in a gaming machine in which the special figure 2 variation display game is executed with priority over the special figure 1 variation display game, when the first variation display game is the special figure 2 variation display game and the second variation display game is the special figure 1 variation display game, in order to execute the second variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) after the first variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game), at the end of the special game state in which the result mode of the first variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) has become the special result mode, " It is necessary to satisfy both the condition that the number of starting memories (second starting memory) that is the right to execute the first variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) is 0 and the condition that the number of starting memories (first starting memory) that is the right to execute the second variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) is 1 or more.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 may be a gaming machine in which the special figure 1 variation display game is preferentially executed over the special figure 2 variation display game.
In this case, in order to execute the special figure 2 variation display game after the special figure 1 variation display game, the second start memory number must be 1 or more and the first start memory number must be 0 at the end of the special game state in which the result mode of the special figure 1 variation display game is the special result mode.
That is, in a gaming machine in which the special figure 1 variation display game is executed with priority over the special figure 2 variation display game, when the first variation display game is the special figure 1 variation display game and the second variation display game is the special figure 2 variation display game, in order to execute the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) after the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game), at the end of the special game state in which the result mode of the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) has become the special result mode, " It is necessary to satisfy both the condition that the number of starting memories (first starting memory) that is the right to execute the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) is 0" and the condition that "the number of starting memories (second starting memory) that is the right to execute the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) is 1 or more".

On the other hand, in this case, in order to execute the special figure 1 variation display game after the special figure 2 variation display game, the second start memory number does not have to be 0 (that is, the second start memory number may be 1 or more) at the end of the special game state in which the result mode of the special figure 2 variation display game is the special result mode, if the first start memory number is 1 or more.
That is, in a gaming machine in which the special figure 1 variation display game is executed with priority over the special figure 2 variation display game, when the first variation display game is the special figure 2 variation display game and the second variation display game is the special figure 1 variation display game, in order to execute the second variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) after the first variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game), at the end of the special game state in which the result mode of the first variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) has become the special result mode, " It is necessary to satisfy the condition that the number of starting memories (first starting memories) that is the right to execute the second variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) is 1 or more, but it is not necessary to satisfy the condition that ``the number of starting memories (second starting memories) that is the right to execute the first variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) is 0''.

Further, the gaming machine 10 may be a gaming machine that executes the first variable display game (one of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game) and the second variable display game (the other of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game) in order of winning.
In this case, in order to execute the second variable display game after the first variable display game, at the end of the special game state in which the result mode of the first variable display game is the special result mode, both the condition that "the number of starting memories that are the right to execute the first variable display game is 0" and the condition that "the number of starting memories that are the right to execute the second variable display game is 1 or more" are met, or the condition that "the number of starting memories that are the right to execute the first variable display game and the right to execute the second variable display game are satisfied." It is necessary to satisfy the condition that the earliest starting memory among the starting memories is the starting memory that has the right to execute the second variable display game.

That is, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game control means (game control device 100) can be configured to execute the variable display games (special figure variable display games) in the order in which they are stored in a state in which the start memory that is the right to execute the first variable display game and the start memory that is the right to execute the second variable display game are stored.
And, when configured in this way, if the above is not matched,
at the end of the special game state in which the result mode of the first variable display game is the special result mode, the result mode stopped and displayed on the second variable display means is a result mode other than the special result mode, and the number of starting memories that are the right to execute the first variable display game is 0 and the number of starting memories that are the right to execute the second variable display game is 1 or more;
at the end of the special game state in which the result mode of the first variable display game is the special result mode, the result mode stopped and displayed on the second variable display means is a result mode other than the special result mode, the number of starting memories that are the right to execute the first variable display game is one or more, the number of starting memories that are the right to execute the second variable display game is one or more, and the starting memory stored first is the starting memory that is the right to execute the second variable display game; and in those cases,
After the end of the special game state, the game control means starts variable display of the identification information in the second variable display game from a state in which result modes other than the special result mode are stopped in the second variable display means,
The effect control means can be configured to start the variable display starting from the special result mode as the variable display of the identification symbols in the first decorative game (and/or the second decorative game) corresponding to the second variable display game after the end of the special game state.

With this configuration, at the start of the second variable display game (between the start of the variable time and the start of the variable display), if the stop symbol of the effect display means (display device 41) is a winning symbol and the stopped symbol of the second variable display means is a losing symbol, the second variable display game and the first decorative game (and/or the second decorative game) corresponding to the second variable display game can be started in that state, so that the game progresses smoothly. It becomes possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect control means (the effect control device 300) can convert the display mode of the identification pattern into a low-speed variation display mode in which the identification pattern can be identified and a high-speed variation display mode in which the identification pattern is difficult to identify when the identification symbol (large symbol) is variably displayed in the first decoration game. The time until the start of the display mode can be configured to be the same when the result mode stop-displayed on the second variable display means and the result mode of the first decoration game stop-displayed on the effect display means match (t14-t16) and when they do not match (t24-t26, t34-t36, t44-t46, t54-56) at the start of the second variable display game.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to set the variation time to the same time when the variable display is started in the non-matching state and when the variable display is started in the matching state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load compared to the configuration in which the time from the start of the variable display of the identification information (large pattern) to the start of the low-speed variation through the high-speed variation is different between the "matching case" and the "non-matching case".

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) can convert the display mode of the identification pattern to a high-speed variation display mode in which the identification pattern is difficult to identify when performing the variable display of the identification pattern (small pattern) in the second decoration game, and the time (t14 to t19) from the start of the variation display of the identification pattern in the second decoration game corresponding to the second variation display game to the end of the variation display via the high-speed variation display mode. , t24 to t29, t34 to t39, t44 to t49, t54 to t59) is when the result mode stop-displayed on the second variable display means and the result mode of the second decorative game stop-displayed on the effect display means match (t14-t19) and when they do not match (t24-t29, t34-t39, t44-t49, t54-) at the start of the second variable display game. 59).
By configuring in this way, it is possible to set the variable time to the same time when the variable display is started in the non-matching state and when the variable display is started in the matching state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load compared to the configuration in which the time from the start of the variable display of the identification information (small pattern) to the stop of the variable display through the high-speed fluctuation is different between the "matching case" and the "non-matching case".

In this embodiment, both the first decoration game and the second decoration game are displayed, but only one of the first decoration game and the second decoration game may be displayed. Specifically, for example, there may be a mode in which the first decoration game and the second decoration game are displayed, a mode in which the first decoration game is displayed and the second decoration game is not displayed, and a mode in which the second decoration game is displayed and the first decoration game is not displayed.

Also, the gaming machine 10 may be a gaming machine capable of simultaneously executing the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game.
For example, in a gaming machine capable of executing the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game at the same time, displaying only the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the main variation (the special figure variation display game determined to be main in each gaming state) and not displaying the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the irregular variation (the special figure variation display game determined not to be main in each gaming state), at the start of the first special figure variation display game after the main variation is switched, the stop diagram of the display device 41 The pattern and the stop pattern on the batch display device 50 may not match.
Specifically, when switching from the first game state in which the special figure 1 variation display game is the main variation to the second game state in which the special figure 2 variation display game is the main variation, the stop symbols of the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 of the display device 41 and the stop symbols of the special figure 2 display device 52 of the collective display device 50 may not match at the start of the special figure 2 variation display game that is first executed in the second game state. In that case, the variation display of the special figure 2 variation display game and the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game is started while remaining in an inconsistent state.

In addition, when the second game state in which the special figure 2 variation display game is the main variation is switched to the first game state in which the special figure 1 variation display game is the main variation, the special figure 1 variation display game that is first executed in the first game state is started. In that case, the variation display of the special figure 1 variation display game and the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game is started while remaining in an inconsistent state.
As a result, the game can be smoothly progressed, and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

In addition, in a gaming machine capable of simultaneously executing the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game at the same time, the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the main variation is displayed on the main variation display section provided in the display area of the display device 41, and the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the irregular variation is displayed on the irregular variation display section provided in the display area of the display device 41. There is a case where the stop pattern and the stop pattern of the collective display device 50 do not match.
Specifically, when switching from the first game state in which the special figure 1 variation display game is the main variation to the second game state in which the special figure 2 variation display game is the main variation, the stop pattern of the main variation display part of the display device 41 and the stop pattern of the special figure 2 display device 52 of the collective display device 50 may not match at the start of the special figure 2 variation display game that is first executed in the second game state. In that case, the variation display of the special figure 2 variation display game and the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game is started while remaining in an inconsistent state.

Further, when switching from the second game state in which the special figure 2 variation display game is the main variation to the first game state in which the special figure 1 variation display game is the main variation, the stop pattern of the main variation display part of the display device 41 and the stop pattern of the special figure 1 display device 51 of the collective display device 50 may not match at the start of the special figure 1 variation display game that is first executed in the first game state. In that case, the variation display of the special figure 1 variation display game and the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game is started while remaining in an inconsistent state.
As a result, the game can be smoothly progressed, and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

<Second embodiment>
Next, the gaming machine of the second embodiment will be described. It should be noted that, basically, it has the same configuration as that of the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment, and mainly different parts will be described below. Specifically, the gaming machine of the second embodiment differs from the gaming machine of the first embodiment in that the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game can be executed at the same time.

First, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81 is a front view of the game board 30 of this embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 81, the game board 30 includes a flat plate-like game board main body 80 that serves as an attachment base for various members. The game board main body 80 is made of wood or synthetic resin, and a game area 32 surrounded by a resin side case 33 provided at each of the four corners of the game board 30 and an outer peripheral wall (guide rail) 31 is provided on the front surface of the game board main body 80.例文帳に追加The game machine 10 is configured to play a game by shooting game balls from a hitting ball shooting device into a game area 32 surrounded by an outer peripheral wall 31 . In the game area 32, windmills, obstacle nails, etc. are arranged as members for changing the flowing direction of the game ball, and the shot game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

A center case 40 that forms a window that serves as a display area for the variable display game is attached to substantially the center of the game area 32 . Behind the window formed in the center case 40, a display device 41 is arranged as a performance display device (variation display device) for variably displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information.
The display device 41 (variable display device) is composed of a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) or a CRT (cathode-ray tube). Still images and moving images can be displayed as effect images in an area (display area) in which an image can be displayed on the display screen. For example, a plurality of pieces of identification information (special symbols), characters for directing a special figure variation display game, background images for enhancing effect effects, and other game-related information are displayed. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variably displayed), and a decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game is performed. The display screen also displays images for effects based on the progress of the game (for example, a big win display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.).

The center case 40 is provided with a warp passage forming member 614 forming a warp passage for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, and a stage portion 620 on which the game ball passing through the warp passage can roll. Since the stage portion 620 of the center case 40 is arranged above the first starting prize winning port 36, the game ball rolling on the stage portion 620 easily enters the first starting prize winning port 36.例文帳に追加
Further, the center case 40 is provided with a board presentation device 44 having a movable member and a light-emitting member, and performing game presentation by the operation of the movable member and the light emission of the light-emitting member.

As shown in FIG. 81, the game area 32 below the center case 40 is provided with a first start winning port 36 (first start winning area) that provides a condition for starting the special figure 1 variation display game (first special figure variation display game). A game ball that has entered the first starting winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 82). In the game area 32 below the first start winning opening 36, an out opening 30a for recovering game balls that have not won a winning opening or the like is provided.

A general prize winning port 35 is provided in the game area 32 below the center case 40 and to the left of the first start prize winning port 36 . Winning of the game ball to the general winning opening 35 is detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 82). In addition, in the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40 and in the game area 32 below the center case 40 and to the right of the first start winning opening 36, a general winning opening 35 is provided. Winning of game balls into these general winning holes 35 is also detected by a winning hole switch 35a (see FIG. 82).

As shown in FIG. 81 , a normal symbol start gate (normal pattern start gate) 34 is provided in the upper part of the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40 . Inside the normal pattern starting gate 34, a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 82) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal pattern starting gate 34 is provided. When the game ball hit into the game area 32 passes through the normal pattern starting gate 34, the normal pattern fluctuation display game is executed. Below the normal figure starting gate 34, a general winning opening 35 is provided. Game balls can flow down to the left and right of this general winning hole 35 .

In the central part of the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, there is provided a first special variable winning device (upper big winning opening) 38 capable of switching between a state in which game balls are not accepted and a state in which game balls are readily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. The first special variable prize winning device 38 tilts the opening/closing member 38c to the right around the lower end to convert the upper big prize winning opening into a state in which game balls can flow in. A first special variable prize winning device 38 converts the closed state in which the upper large prize winning port is closed to an open state according to the result of the special figure variable display game, and facilitates the inflow of game balls into the upper large prize winning port, thereby imparting a predetermined game value (prize balls) to the player. A game ball that has won the first special variable winning device 38 is detected by a big winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 82).

Inside the upper big winning opening (winning area), a specific area into which game balls can flow is provided, and a lever member operated by a lever solenoid 38f (see FIG. 82) is provided so as to change the inflow probability of game balls into the specific area. A specific area switch 38d (see FIG. 82) capable of detecting the inflow of a game ball is provided in the specific area, and based on the detection of the game ball by the specific area switch 38d, a state advantageous to the player occurs (in this embodiment, a high probability state occurs after the special game state ends). A game ball that has flowed into the specific area is discharged to the outside of the first special variable winning device 38 .

Further, inside the upper big winning opening, there is provided a remaining ball discharge opening switch 38e (see FIG. 82) for detecting game balls discharged to the outside of the first special variable winning device 38 without flowing into the specific area. When the number of game balls detected by the large winning opening switch 38a provided inside the upper big winning opening (the number of game balls flowing into the upper big winning opening) matches the number of game balls detected by the specific area switch 38d and the remaining ball discharge opening switch 38e (the number of game balls discharged from the upper big winning opening), it can be confirmed that all the game balls in the upper big winning opening have been discharged. is not opened.

At the lower part of the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, there is provided a normal variable prize winning device 37 (first starting prize winning area) that provides a starting condition for the special figure 1 variable display game (first special figure variable display game). A game ball that has won the normal variable prize winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 82). The normal variable winning device 37 is provided with a plate-like movable member 37b that can slide back and forth, and the movable member 37b normally projects forward to hold a closed closed state (unfavorable state for the player) in which game balls cannot flow into the normal variable winning device 37.例文帳に追加Then, when the result of the normal pattern variation display game becomes a predetermined result, the movable member 37b is retracted backward by the normal solenoid 37c (see FIG. 82) as a driving device, and the normal variation winning device 37 is changed to an open state (a state advantageous to the player) in which game balls easily flow.

In the present embodiment, the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37 is a so-called tongue type normal electric accessory that opens and closes by sliding back and forth in the forward and backward direction by the normal electric solenoid 37c, but the movable member of the normal variable winning device 37 is not limited to this. The movable member of the normal variable winning device 37 may be, for example, an attacker-type normal electric accessory that is opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted forward by the general electric solenoid 37c, or a tulip-shaped normal electric accessory that is opened in a reverse "V" shape by the general electric solenoid 37c. Further, the normal variable prize winning device 37 may allow game balls to win prizes even when the movable member is in the closed state, and may be in a state in which the game balls are less likely to win in the closed state than in the open state.

Game balls can flow down to the left and right of this normal variable winning device 37 . The flow path on the right side of the normal variable winning device 37 is provided with an out port 30a for recovering game balls that do not win, such as a winning port. Also, the left channel of the normal variable winning device 37 communicates with the lower part of the game area 32 .
A right part of the game area 32 below the center case 40, that is, below the normal variable winning device 37, is provided with a second start winning opening 97 (second starting winning area) that provides a condition for starting the special figure 2 variation display game (second special figure variation display game). A game ball that has entered the second starting winning opening 97 is detected by the starting opening 3 switch 97a (see FIG. 82).

In the game area 32 below the center case 40, on the right side of the first start prize winning port 36 and to the left of the second start prize winning port 97, there is provided a second special variable prize winning device (lower big prize winning port) 39 capable of switching between a state of not accepting game balls and a state of easy acceptance according to the result of the special figure variation display game. The second special variable winning device 39 converts the lower big winning opening into a state in which game balls can flow in by moving forward and backward (sliding) of the opening/closing member 39c. The second special variable prize winning device 39 converts the closed state of the lower special prize winning port to the open state according to the result of the special figure variable display game, and facilitates the inflow of game balls into the lower special prize winning port, thereby imparting a predetermined game value (prize ball) to the player. A game ball that has won the second special variable winning device 39 is detected by a big winning opening switch (count switch) 39a (see FIG. 82). The game area 32 on the right side is covered with a transparent plate that allows the game area 32 to be seen through.
In addition, outside the game area 32 and in the lower left part of the game board main body 80, a batch display device 50 for executing a special figure variation display game (a special figure 1 variation display game, a special figure 2 variation display game) and a normal figure variation display game is provided.

That is, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the normal variable winning device 37 is not the second start winning region that provides the condition for starting the special figure 2 variation display game (second special figure variation display game), but the first start winning region that provides the condition for starting the special figure 1 variation display game (first special figure variation display game). It differs from the gaming machine 10 (see FIG. 3) of the second embodiment in that a second starting winning area) is provided.

FIG. 82 is a block diagram of the control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of this embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 82, the game control device 100 of the present embodiment differs from the game control device 100 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 5) in that the interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 is connected to the starting port 3 switch 97a in the second starting winning port 97.

FIG. 83 shows an example of distribution ratios in this embodiment.
In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the same random number as used for the big hit determination (big hit lottery) is used to perform the small hit determination (small hit lottery) and the support hit determination (support hit lottery). That is, in the present embodiment, using the jackpot random number, the jackpot determination, the small hit determination, and the support hit determination are performed (see FIG. 83(a)), and when the determination result is a jackpot, the stop symbol information corresponding to the special symbol random number is acquired (see FIG. 83(b)), and when the determination result is a minor hit, the stop symbol information corresponding to the special symbol random number is acquired (see FIG. 83(c)), and the determination result is If it is a support hit, the stop symbol information corresponding to the special symbol random number is acquired (see FIG. 83(d)), and if the determination result is neither, the lost stop symbol information is acquired. The support hit may be derived only in the low probability state (normal game state ST24, third specific game state ST23), the support hit may be derived only when there is no general electric support (normal game state ST24, first specific game state ST21), or the support hit may be derived only in the normal game state ST24 (low probability no support).

[Game state transition diagram (game flow)]
Next, the transition (transition) of the game state by the game control of the game control device 100 will be described. FIG. 84 is a diagram exemplifying a game state transition diagram (game flow) showing transitions of game states in this embodiment.
The game state includes a normal game state ST24, a first specific game state ST21, a second specific game state ST22, and a third specific game state ST23. In addition, there are a first special game state (big win game state) based on the first special result (big win) and a second special game state (small win game state) based on the second special result (small win) as game states, but they are omitted here.

In each game state, the special figure probability for deriving the first special result (big hit) to be controlled by the game control device 100, the production mode controlled by the production control device 300 to determine the game production mode, the main start area which is the start area to be mainly targeted in the game state, the main variation special figure which is the type of special figure variation display game to be mainly executed, and the shooting direction of the game ball are determined.

In the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to aim to win a prize in the first starting prize winning port 36 by hitting to the left, and to aim to win a prize to the normal variable prize winning device 37 or the second starting prize winning port 97 by hitting to the right. In other words, it is possible to select the target starting area according to the player's will.
Further, in the present embodiment, the special figure 2 is higher than the special figure 1 in the small hit probability, which is the probability of becoming a small hit (second special result).

The normal game state ST24 is a state in which the special figure probability is low, there is no electric power support for improving the opening time per unit time of the ordinary variable prize winning device 37 to facilitate winning, and there is no time reduction for shortening the variation time of the special figure variation display game or the normal figure variation display game. Also, the production mode that defines the production mode is the normal mode. The main variation special figure is the special figure 1 variation display game, the main starting area is the first start winning opening 36, and the shooting direction is left-handed in order to aim at this first starting winning opening 36. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 1 variation display game is the main variation and the special figure 2 variation display game is the irregular variation. In this normal game state ST24, a very long variation time is set for the special figure 2 variation display game. As a result, the execution of the special figure 2 variation display game becomes inefficient in terms of time, and the player does not select the execution of the special figure 2 variation display game aiming at obtaining a small hit in the normal game state ST24.

The first specific game state ST21 is a state in which the special figure probability is high probability, and there is no electric power support for improving the opening time per unit time of the normal variation winning device 37 to facilitate winning, but there is a time reduction to shorten the variation time of the special figure variation display game and the normal figure variation display game. Also, the effect mode that defines the effect mode is a small hit RUSH. The main variation special figure is a special figure 2 variation display game, the main starting area is the second start winning opening 97, and the shooting direction is right-handed in order to aim at this second starting winning opening 97. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 2 variation display game is the main variation and the special figure 1 variation display game is the irregular variation.

In this first specific game state ST21, the variable time of the special figure 2 variation display game is shortened compared to the case of the normal game state ST24, and it is more advantageous for the player to play the special figure 2 variation display game by hitting the right hand and aiming at the second start winning opening 97.例文帳に追加Since the special figure 2 variation display game has a higher small winning probability than the special figure 1 variation display game and the winning probability of the small winning is higher than that of the big winning, the small winning occurs with high frequency in the first specific game state ST21 and the number of balls possessed by the player increases. Since small hits occur with high frequency in this way, the effect mode is a mode called a small hit RUSH.

The second specific game state ST22 is a state in which the special figure probability is high probability, and there is a general electric support that improves the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning. If there is general electric support, there is also a time saving to shorten the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game and the general figure fluctuation display game. A performance mode that defines a performance mode is a chance mode. In addition, the main variation special figure is the special figure 1 variation display game, the main starting area is the normal variation winning device 37, and the shooting direction is right-handed in order to aim at this normal variation winning device 37. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 1 variation display game is the main variation and the special figure 2 variation display game is the irregular variation. In this second specific game state ST22, the variable time of the special figure 1 variation display game is shortened as compared with the case of the normal game state ST24.
The third specific game state ST23 is the same as the second specific game state ST22 except that the special figure probability is a low probability state.

Among these four game states, the normal game state ST24 is the most disadvantageous state for the player. The third specific game state ST23 is a state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state ST24 because of the general power support, and the second specific game state ST22 is a high probability state, so it is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state ST24 and the third specific game state ST23. The first specific game state ST21 is a state with a high probability, and is a state in which the number of balls possessed by the player increases due to frequent occurrence of small wins, so it is a state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state ST24, the second specific game state ST22 and the third specific game state ST23.
In this embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 83(b), there are two types of big hits in the special figure 1 variation display game, namely, the variable A big hit and the normal big win, and there are three types of big wins in the special figure 2 variation display game, namely, the variable A big hit, the variable B big hit, and the normal big hit.

The transition of the game state is performed by ending the first special game state based on the derivation of the first special result (jackpot), derivation of the support hit, and completion of the prescribed number of games. Therefore, the game state does not shift due to the end of the second special game state based on the derivation of the second special result (minor win).
Basically, when the special result that triggers the start of the special game state is a normal jackpot with a low probability state after the end of the special game state, it shifts to a third specific game state ST23, among the variable probability big wins with a high probability state after the end of the special game state, it shifts to a second specific game state ST22 when it is a variable probability A big win, and shifts to a first specific game state ST21 when it is a variable probability B jackpot.

Specifically, a special game state is entered by deriving a probability variable A big hit as a result of the special figure variation display game, and when there is V passage in the special game state (when a game ball flows into the specific area (variability operation area) of the first special variable prize winning device 38 and is detected by the specific area switch 38d), the process shifts to the second specific game state ST22 after the special game state is completed. In addition, as a result of the special figure variation display game, the probability variable B big hit is derived and becomes a special game state, and when there is V passage in the special game state (when the game ball flows into the specific region (probability variable operation region) of the first special variable winning device 38 and is detected by the specific region switch 38d), the game moves to the first specific game state ST21 after the end of the special game state. In addition, as a result of the special figure variation display game, a normal big win is derived to enter a special game state, and when there is no V passage in the special game state (when the game ball does not flow into the specific area (probability variable operation area) of the first special variable prize winning device 38), the game moves to a third specific game state ST23 after the special game state ends. Since the second specific game state ST22 and the third specific game state ST23 are set to the same chance mode as the performance mode, it is difficult for the player to grasp the shift.

In addition, the number of ST (for example, 2000 times), which is the number of times of the special figure variation display game that can be executed in the high probability state, is set, and when the number of times of execution of the special figure variation display game from the end of the special game state in the first specific game state ST21 reaches the number of times of ST, the game may be shifted to the normal game state ST24.
Also, the number of times of special figure fluctuation display games that can be executed in a high probability state is set (for example, 2000 times), and when the number of times of execution of special figure fluctuation display games from the end of the special game state in the second specific game state ST22 reaches the number of times of ST, the game may be shifted to the normal game state ST24 (or the third specific game state ST23).
Also, in FIG. 84, the transition of the game state when a big hit is derived as a result of irregular variation is omitted. Specifically, although illustration is omitted in FIG. 84, for example, in the normal game state ST24, the second specific game state ST22, and the third specific game state ST23, as a result of the irregular fluctuation (special figure 2 fluctuation display game), the probability variable B jackpot is derived and becomes a special game state, and in the case where there is V passage in the special game state (when the game ball flows into the specific region (probability variable operation region) of the first special variable winning device 38 and is detected by the specific region switch 38d ), it shifts to the first specific game state ST21 after the end of the special game state.

When a normal big win is derived and shifts to a third specified game state ST23, it is possible to stay in the third specified game state ST23 until 100 times of special figure variation display games are executed, and when 100 times of special figure variation display games are executed without deriving a big win or a support win in the third specified game state ST23, the game moves to a normal game state ST24. That is, in this embodiment, the normal jackpot support count is set to "100". It should be noted that the number of times the normal jackpot is supported is not limited to "100 times" and can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, when the probability variable big win A is derived and the state shifts to the second specific game state ST22, it is possible to stay in the second specific game state ST22 until the special figure variation display game is executed 1000 times, and when the special figure variation display game is executed 1000 times without deriving the big win or the support hit in the second specific game state ST22, the state shifts to the first specific game state ST21. That is, in the present embodiment, the number of support times for the probability variable A jackpot is set to "1000 times". In addition, the number of support times of the variable probability A jackpot is not limited to "1000 times", and can be changed as appropriate. For example, it may be "until the next jackpot or support hit".

Further, as described above, the transition of the game state is also performed by derivation of the support win.
Specifically, in the normal game state ST24 and the third specific game state ST23, when the support hit is derived as a result of the special figure variation display game, the process shifts to the third specific game state ST23 after the special figure variation display game ends. In addition, in the first specific game state ST21 and the second specific game state ST22, when the support win is derived as a result of the special figure variation display game, the process shifts to the second specific game state ST22 after the special figure variation display game ends. That is, the transition (transition) of the game state when the variable probability big win or the normal big win is derived goes through the special game state, whereas the transition (transition) of the game state when the support win is derived does not go through the special game state. Therefore, for example, in the first specific game state ST21 (no high probability support), when the support win is derived as a result of the special figure variation display game, after the special figure variation display game ends, it is possible to shift to the second specific game state ST22 (with high probability support) without going through the special game state.

When the support hit A out of the support hits is derived and the state shifts to the third specific game state ST23 (or the second specific game state ST22), it is possible to stay in the third specific game state ST23 (or the second specific game state ST22) until the special figure variation display game is executed 50 times, and the jackpot or the support win is not derived in the third specific game state ST23 (or the second specific game state ST22), and 50. When the special figure variation display game is executed once, the game is shifted to the normal game state ST24 (or the first specific game state ST21). That is, in the present embodiment, the number of times of support per support A is set to "50 times". It should be noted that the number of times of support per support A is not limited to "50 times", and can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, when the support hit B out of the support hits is derived and the transition to the third specific game state ST23 (or the second specific game state ST22) is made, it is possible to stay in the third specific game state ST23 (or the second specific game state ST22) until the special figure variation display game is executed 100 times, and the big hit or the support hit is not derived in the third specific game state ST23 (or the second specific game state ST22). When the special figure variation display game is executed 100 times, the game is shifted to the normal game state ST24 (or the first specific game state ST21). That is, in this embodiment, the number of times of support per support B is set to "100 times". It should be noted that the number of times of support per support B is not limited to "100 times", and can be changed as appropriate.

Further, when the support hit C out of the support hits is derived and the transition is made to the third specific game state ST23 (or the second specific game state ST22), it is possible to stay in the third specific game state ST23 (or the second specific game state ST22) until the special figure variation display game is executed 1000 times, and the big hit or the support hit is derived in the third specific game state ST23 (or the second specific game state ST22). When the special figure variation display game is executed 1,000 times without being stopped, the game shifts to the normal game state ST24 (or the first specific game state ST21). That is, in this embodiment, the number of times of support per support C is set to "1000 times". Note that the number of times of support per support C is not limited to "1000 times", and can be changed as appropriate.

In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, when a support win is derived during the chance mode (during general electric support), that is, when a support win is derived in the second specific game state ST22 and the third specific game state ST23, the support count is reset and the support count corresponding to the new support win is set again (see FIG. 10). Further, in the present embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, the presentation mode is changed according to the change in the number of remaining support. It should be noted that it is not necessary to change the presentation mode in response to the change in the number of remaining support times. Alternatively, only the rank-up of the performance mode may be permitted, and the performance mode switching such as the rank-down may not be performed.

Alternatively, when the support hit is derived during the chance mode (during the general electric support), the support count corresponding to the new support hit may be added to the remaining support count (see FIG. 11(a)). In this case, an upper limit number (for example, 1000 times) may be set for the number of times of support, and if the sum of the number of remaining support times and the number of times of support corresponding to the new support hit exceeds the upper limit number of times, the remaining number of times of support may be changed to the upper limit number of times. Also, in this case, the rendering mode may or may not be changed in accordance with the change in the remaining support count. Alternatively, only the rank-up of the performance mode may be permitted, and the performance mode switching such as the rank-down may not be performed.

Alternatively, when the support hit is derived during the chance mode (during the general electric support), the remaining support count and the support count corresponding to the new support hit are compared, and the larger one (which is advantageous for the player) may be adopted (FIG. 11(b)). In this case, the presentation mode may or may not be changed in accordance with the change in the remaining support count. Alternatively, only the rank-up of the performance mode may be permitted, and the performance mode switching such as the rank-down may not be performed. Further, when the number of times of support corresponding to a new support win is not adopted, the support win pattern may be displayed on the display device 41 as a game result, or the losing pattern may be displayed on the display device 41 instead of the support win pattern as the game result.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by shooting game balls (pachinko balls) toward the game area 32 from a ball shooting device (not shown). The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by direction changing members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged in various places in the game area 32, and enters the normal figure start gate 34, the general winning opening 35, the first starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning opening 37, the second starting winning opening 97, the first special changing winning opening 38, or the second special winning winning opening 39, or flows into the out exit 30a. It is discharged from the game area 32 . Then, when the game ball wins the general winning port 35, the first starting winning port 36, the normal variable winning device 37, the second starting winning port 97, the first special variable winning device 38, or the second special variable winning device 39, the number of winning balls corresponding to the type of the winning winning port is discharged to the upper tray 21 or the lower tray 23 of the glass frame 15 from the payout unit controlled by the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 82).

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player can aim to win the first start winning port 36 or the general winning port 35 arranged to the left of the first start winning port 36 by adjusting the shooting momentum and shooting the game ball to the left side game area (so-called left hitting), and by shooting the game ball to the right side game area (so-called right hitting), the normal game starting gate 34 or the normal game starting gate 34 arranged below the normal game starting gate 34 A general winning opening 35, a normal variable winning device 37, a second start winning opening 97, a first special variable winning device 38, a second special variable winning device 39, and a general winning opening 35 arranged to the left of the second special variable winning device 39 can be aimed at.

A gate switch 34a composed of a non-contact type switch or the like for detecting a game ball passing through the normal pattern starting gate 34 is provided in the normal pattern starting gate 34, and when the game ball hit into the game area 32 passes through the normal pattern starting gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, based on the input of the game ball detection signal from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal pattern start gate 34, if the normal pattern start memory number is less than the upper limit number (for example, 4), the normal pattern start memory number is added (+1) and one normal pattern start memory is stored in the RAM 111C. The number of memory of this general-purpose starting winning prize is displayed on the general-purpose holding indicator of the collective display device 50. - 特許庁In addition, in the normal pattern start memory, a hit determination random value (hit random value) for determining the result of the normal pattern variation display game extracted based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a is stored.

Then, when there is the normal pattern start memory and the normal pattern change display game can be started, that is, when the normal pattern change display game is not being executed and the normal pattern change display game is not in a winning state to convert the normal pattern change prize winning device 37 to the open state, the random value for winning determination stored in the normal pattern start memory and the determination value stored in the ROM 111B are compared with each other to determine hit/loss of the normal pattern change display game, and processing for starting the normal pattern change display game is performed. When the hit determination random number matches the determination value, the normal pattern variation display game becomes a hit and a specific result mode (normal pattern specific result) is derived.

In addition, the game control device 100 performs the process of executing the normal pattern fluctuation display game, in which a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns are repeatedly displayed in a predetermined order over a predetermined fluctuation time on the normal pattern display unit provided in the collective display device 50. After performing the display during normal pattern fluctuation, the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is stopped and displayed to display the normal pattern fluctuation display game. In addition, the normal figure display unit of the batch display device 50 is configured by the display device 41, and for example, numbers, symbols, character patterns, etc. are used as the normal identification information, and after displaying this for a predetermined period of time, it is stopped and displayed. It may be configured to display the result.

When the result of the normal pattern variation display game is a hit, the normal pattern display part of the collective display device 50 stops displaying the lighting pattern as a special result mode, operates the general electrical solenoid 37c, and controls the movable member of the normal variation prize winning device 37 to open for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds). That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member). In addition, when the result of the normal pattern variation display game is a loss, control is performed to display a lighting pattern as a result mode of the result on the general pattern display section of the collective display device 50 .

Also, the winning balls to the first starting winning opening 36, the winning balls to the normal variable winning device 37, and the winning balls to the second starting winning opening 97 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a, and the starting opening 3 switch 97a, respectively. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, the first start memory forming the starting memory (special figure starting memory) based on the winning to the first starting winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 is stored within a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4 pieces), and the second starting memory forming the starting memory (special figure starting memory) based on the winning to the second start winning opening 97 is limited to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4 pieces). memorize to A jackpot random number value, a special symbol symbol random number value, and each variation pattern random number value are extracted as starting memory information based on the winning to a first start winning prize port 36, a normal fluctuation prize winning device 37, and a second start winning prize port 97, respectively, and the extracted random number values are stored in a RAM 111C as a first start memory and a second start memory. Then, the memory number of this starting memory is displayed in the first memory display unit (special figure 1 reservation display) and the second memory display unit (special figure 2 reservation display) for notifying the number of starting winnings of the collective display device 50. It is also displayed as a decorative special figure start memory display in the display device 41 of the center case 40.

The game control device 100 performs a special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display (first variation display device) of the collective display device 50 based on the first start memory, and performs a special figure 2 variation display game on the special figure 2 indicator (second variation display device) of the collective display device 50 based on the second start memory. The special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game can be executed at the same time, but when the other special figure variation display game becomes the first special result (big hit) during execution of one of the special figure variation display games, the one special figure variation display game is terminated as a result other than the special result (loss result). In addition, when one special figure variation display game is executed and the other special figure variation display game results in a second special result (minor win), the one special figure variation display game is interrupted until the special game state based on the minor win ends.

That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 serves as first execution control means for controlling the execution of the special figure 1 variation display game (first special figure variation display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning port 36 (first start winning area) or the normal variation winning device 37 (first starting winning area). In addition, the game control device (game control means) 100 serves as second execution control means for controlling the execution of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the second start prize opening 97 (second start prize area).

In the special figure 1 indicator and the special figure 2 indicator of the collective display device 50, after performing the variable display, the predetermined result mode is stopped and displayed. Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big win, the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator or the special figure 2 indicator becomes a special result mode (jackpot result mode) corresponding to the first special result, resulting in a big win and a first special game state (so-called big win state). Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a small win, the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator or the special figure 2 indicator becomes a special result mode (minor win result mode) corresponding to the second special result, resulting in a small win and a second special game state (so-called small win state). That is, the special figure 1 display device of the collective display device 50 can display the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning port 36 or the normal variation winning device 37. It constitutes the first variation display means. Also, the special figure 2 display device of the collective display device 50 constitutes a second variation display means capable of displaying a second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening 97 .

In addition, the game control device (game control means) 100 can perform control to generate a game state (specific game state) in which the game can be progressed in a situation (a high probability of winning or a general electric support) more advantageous to the player than in the normal game state after the end of the jackpot game state (first special game state). That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 serves as a specific game state generating means.

In addition, in response to the execution of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game, the decoration special figure variation display game for variably displaying a plurality of types of decoration identification information (numbers, symbols, character patterns, etc.) on the display device 41 is executed. The decoration special figure variation display game on the display device 41 includes a decoration special figure 1 variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game and a decoration special figure 2 variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game, which are displayed in separate display areas. Then, the variation display is performed with the variation of the corresponding special figure variation display game, and the display corresponding to the result is performed with the derivation of the result mode in the corresponding special figure variation display game.

In other words, the display device 41 serves as decoration variation display means capable of displaying a decoration variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) that variably displays ornament identification information corresponding to the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) and the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game). In addition, separate display devices may be used for the decoration special figure 1 variation display game and the decoration special figure 2 variation display game, or only one decoration special figure variation display game may be displayed. Also, the game machine 10 may not be equipped with the special figure 1 display device and the special figure 2 display device of the collective display device 50, and the special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41.

In the game machine of the present embodiment, the special figure 2 variation display game has a higher probability of a small hit, but in the case of a normal game state with a low probability, a long variation with a very long variation time (about 10 minutes) is selected as the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game. As a result, the execution of the special figure 2 variation display game becomes inefficient in terms of time in the normal game state, and the player is prevented from selecting the execution of the special figure 2 variation display game aiming at obtaining a small hit in the normal game state. Therefore, in the normal game state, it is more advantageous for the player to play the special figure 1 variable display game by hitting to the left and aiming at the first start winning opening 36. - 特許庁In addition, the long fluctuation time is about 10 minutes, but it may be longer or shorter (5 minutes, 50 minutes, 10 hours, etc.).

From the above, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment executes a game (special figure fluctuation display game) based on the establishment of the starting condition, and is a gaming machine that can generate a special game state that gives a game value to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result. A game state control means (game control device 100) capable of generating a game state ST22, a third specific game state ST23) and a special game state, the game state control means can generate a specific game state after generating a special game state when a game result is a predetermined result (in this embodiment, a normal jackpot or a probability variable A jackpot) among special results, and when a game result is a specific result (support hit) different from the special result. is configured so that a specific game state can be generated without generating a special game state (see FIG. 84).

Therefore, since the specific game state (general electric support) is generated with a predetermined probability until the special game state is generated, it is possible to suppress the amount of money used by the player and the reduction speed of the balls in hand, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.
Further, the specific game state (general electric support) is generated not only after passing through the special game state but also without passing through the special game state, so that the shift timing of the game state is increased, and the amusement of the game can be enhanced.
In addition, if the specific game state (normal support) occurs frequently, gambling may become too high, but since the ball output in the specific game state (general support) is included in the ball output rate and the accessory ratio, if the specific game state (general support) occurs frequently, it is necessary to suppress the ball output in the special game state accordingly. Therefore, even if the specific game state (universal electric support) occurs frequently, the gambling nature does not become too high, and furthermore, it is possible to moderate the wave of paid out balls.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with setting means (game control device 100) for setting a period corresponding to the specific result as a specific game period (number of times of support) for generating a specific game state (second specific game state ST22, third specific game state ST23) when the result of the game (special figure variation display game) becomes a specific result (sapo hit), and the setting means sets a period corresponding to the specific result during the occurrence of the specific game state. By resetting the specified game period, the period corresponding to the specified result can be reset (see FIG. 10).
By constructing in this way, when a specific result (support hit) is derived during the specific game state (second specific game state ST22, third specific game state ST23), the specific game period (number of times of support) can be extended, so that the interest in the game is improved.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with setting means (game control device 100) for setting a period corresponding to the specific result as a specific game period (number of times of support) for generating a specific game state (second specific game state ST22, third specific game state ST23) when the result of the game (special figure variation display game) becomes a specific result (support hit). A period obtained by adding a period corresponding to the specific result to the remaining period of the game period can be configured to be resettable as the specific game period (see FIG. 11(a)).
By constructing in this way, when a specified result (support hit) is derived during the specified game state (second specified game state ST22, third specified game state ST23), the specified game period (number of times of support) is extended, so that the interest in the game is improved.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with effect control means (effect control device 300) that executes effects related to the game (special figure variation display game), and the effect control means includes a specific game state (second specific game state ST22, third specific game state ST23) generated after the occurrence of the special game state, and a specific game state (second specific game state ST22, third specific game state ST23) generated without the occurrence of the special game state. , can be configured to be executable.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to improve the interest of the specific game state (second specific game state ST22, third specific game state ST23).
It should be noted that the specific game state (second specific game state ST22, third specific game state ST23) generated after the special game state has occurred and the specific game state (second specific game state ST22, third specific game state ST23) generated without the occurrence of the special game state may be performed in different manners. As a result, it is possible to suggest whether it is a specific game state (second specific game state ST22, third specific game state ST23) generated based on the derivation of the special result (jackpot) or a specific game state (second specific game state ST22, third specific game state ST23) generated based on the derivation of the specific result (sapo hit) by the performance executed during the specific game state, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

In addition, the same mode of performance may be executed in the specified game state (second specified game state ST22, third specified game state ST23) generated after the occurrence of the special game state and in the specified game state (second specified game state ST22, third specified game state ST23) generated without the occurrence of the special game state.
Specifically, for example, when the specified game state (second specified game state ST22, third specified game state ST23) generated after the occurrence of the special game state and the specified game state generated without the occurrence of the special game state (second specified game state ST22, third specified game state ST23) have the same specific game period (number of times of support), the same mode of performance may be executed. That is, for example, the effect mode of the effect executed in the chance mode generated based on the derivation of the jackpot corresponding to the number of times of support of 100 (normal jackpot in the case of the present embodiment) may be the same as the effect mode of the effect executed in the chance mode generated based on the derivation of the support win of the corresponding support times of 100 (the support win B in the case of the present embodiment).

In addition, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with instruction means (effect control device 300) for instructing the game ball shooting direction that is advantageous to the player, and the instruction means can be configured to start instructing the shooting direction when the game results in a specific result (sapo hit) in response to the start of the next game to be executed (see FIGS. 43 and 48).
By configuring in this way, it is possible to accurately indicate the direction in which the game ball is to be shot, thereby improving the interest in the game.
Of course, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment can also execute the effects exemplified in the first embodiment (special effects performed during the special figure variation display game with the result of "support hit", additional effects performed after the special figure variation display game with the result of "support hit", etc.). Also in the present embodiment, the modifications in the first embodiment ([Modification 1 of support hit determination] to [Modification 5 of support hit determination], [Other modification 1] to [Other modification 11], etc.) can be applied as appropriate.

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine shown in the above embodiment, but can be applied to all gaming machines that use game balls, such as other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, and majang ball gaming machines. It is also possible to apply the present invention to slot machines. The slot machines are not limited to slot machines using medals, but include all slot machines such as slot machines using game balls. Also, the configurations of the modifications and embodiments described above can be appropriately combined and applied.

In addition, the embodiments disclosed this time should be considered as examples in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the scope and meaning of equivalents of the scope of the claims.

For example, a gaming machine 10 is a gaming machine that executes a special diagram 2 fluctuation display game with priority to the special diagram 1 fluctuation display game, or a gaming machine 10 is a play machine that executes a special diagram 1 fluctuation display game with a priority on the special map 2 fluctuation display game, and a special diagram 1 fluctuation display game and special map 2 fluctuation display game in order of the winning order. It may be a play machine that can be executed at the same time as a special map 1 fluctuation display game and special diagram 2 fluctuation display game.

In addition, the game machine 10 is not limited to a game machine that does not simultaneously display the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory and the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the second start memory on the display device 41 at the same time. That is, the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory and the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the second start memory may be displayed on the display device 41 at the same time.

Moreover, the gaming machine 10 is not limited to a gaming machine having a specific area (variable probability operating area). That is, instead of generating a high probability state based on the fact that a game ball has flowed into the specific area (detection of the game ball by the specific area switch 38d), the high probability state may be generated based on the fact that the result of the special figure variation display game has become a hit.

10 game machine 41 display device (display means)
44 board production device (first production means)
350 display board (second effect means)

Claims (1)

display means for displaying a predetermined image;
a first effect means positioned in front of the display means and capable of executing a predetermined effect of changing the visibility of the predetermined image;
a second effect means positioned in front of the first effect means and capable of executing an effect that changes the visibility of the first effect means;
A game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and when the result of the game is a special result, a state advantageous to the player is generated,
After displaying the first identification information in each of the plurality of fluctuation display areas in correspondence with the game, the fluctuation display is stopped in each of the above multiple fluctuations display areas, and the result of corresponding to the result of the game is displayed by the combination of the 1st identification information that is stopped in the multiple fluctuations display area, and the result corresponding to the result of the game is displayed. After displaying the second identification information that is smaller than the first identification information in correspondence with the game, the second decoration game that stops the result of the game result is displayed in the above means, and the display is displayed in the display.
The first effect means can render the first identification information displayed in at least one of the variable display areas unidentifiable by executing the predetermined effect,
The second effect means is capable of executing a specific effect that reduces the visibility of the first identification information, the second identification information and the first effect means,
The game machine is characterized in that the visibility of the second identification information can be made higher than the visibility of the first identification information displayed in the one variable display area by the first effect means executing the predetermined effect and the second effect means executing the specific effect.

Images